R
»f
?co
!CT> ?00
■CD
00
m
m
m
mm
IS
HI
SI
m
mm
mm
m
I
llill
Hil
JHili BHUi
■Mve IRiHI
fflm
QMS
mm
mm
H
f«
A GRAMMAR
OF THE
SOMALI LANGUAGE
CAMBKIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS WAREHOUSE,
C. F. CLAY, Manager.
fLonUon: AVE MARIA LANE, E.C.
©laBuoto: 50, WELLINGTON STREET.
TLtijjjifl: F. A. BROCKHAUS.
fleto gorfe: THE MACMILLAN COMPANY.
Bombas ant) Calcutta: MACMILLAN AND CO., Ltd.
[All Rights reserved.]
A GRAMMAR
OF THE
SOMALI LANGUAGE
WITH EXAMPLES
IN
PROSE AND VERSE
AND AN ACCOUNT OF THE
YIBIR AND MIDGAN DIALECTS
BY
J. W. C. KIRK, B.A.,
KING'S COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE,
LIEUTENANT, DUKE OF CORNWALL'S LIGHT INFANTRY,
AND 6TH (SOMALILAND) BATTALION, KING'S AFRICAN RIFLES
CAMBRIDGE
AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS 1905
PT
'JOS'
Qtantbrftge :
PRINTED BY JOHN CLAY, M.A. AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS.
S.B.N. — GB: 576.11490.1
Republished in 1969 by Gregg International Publishers Limited Westmead, Farnborough, Hants., England
Printed in Holland
PREFACE.
ri^HERE are but few people who have made any serious study J- of the many and interesting tongues of that part of the African Continent in which the Somali race has grown up. Our knowledge of the Somali language is due to the labours of Rigby, Hunter, and Larajasse and Sampont. As this is not a written language, great praise is due to those who first grappled with the difficulty of reducing the speech to writing This has now been done so satis- factorily that I myself have lately carried on a successful corre- spondence with an educated Somali in his native tongue, using the spelling and orthography of the present book. Schleicher's work is rather a philological treatise on the language, gathered largely from isolated individuals of the people, and not from practical acquaintance with the race in their own country ; but he is to be congratulated on having collected a number of stories which are a useful and important foundation to a Somali literature. Paulitschke's work is a purely comparative treatise on the three dialects, Somali, Gala, and Danakil, written from an ethnological point of view.
While serving with Somali troops during the campaigns of 1902 -1904 against the Mullah, Mohammed Abdallah, I had the most favourable opportunities for a practical and wholesale study of the colloquial dialect of this people ; and it seemed only right that results obtained from so intimate an acquaintance should not be left unrecorded, in spite of the many imperfections which must still exist in the record. The work done by others hitherto has been largely confined to the coast and to the mixed population which assembles at the sea-port towns; and it is but recently that any strangers except a few sportsmen have been able to dwell in the interior, and so to know and converse with the natives in their own homes and natural surroundings. The result is that it has now
VI PREFACE
been possible to correct and add to our knowledge, hitherto incom- plete, on certain grammatical points, and to give their proper value to certain variations of speech. I refer especially to such peculiarities of the language as the Syntax of the Suffixes, Particles, Verbs, Concord of Nouns, and Compound Sentences. It is generally found to follow very clear and defined, though unwritten, rules, which are disturbed by very few exceptions.
In regard to Orthography, where I have differed from Schleicher and from Larajasse and Sampont, I have given the latters' corre- sponding signs in the Alphabet. In the spelling of words I have in most cases (subject to the orthographical variations) followed that used by Larajasse in his Dictionary, which leaves little room for improvement or addition. This book is indispensable to the student of Somali, or to anyone who wishes to examine the stories and songs given by Schleicher or myself. I have therefore not included a vocabulary, as such are necessarily deficient and frequently mis- leading.
In 1903 I published a small practical hand-book, Notes on the Somali Language, but this was written on lines totally different from those of the present Grammar. It was a compilation of notes which I had found useful to myself, and was intended to serve as an elementary guide to beginners, who had not the time to digest a more lengthy work. The orthography, the spelling, and the few grammatical rules, have since been entirely revised and corrected.
I desire to express my grateful appreciation of the assistance rendered me by Mr H. J. Edwards, Fellow and Assistant Tutor of Peterhouse, Cambridge, and by Mr R. R. Marett, Fellow and Tutor of Exeter College, Oxford, in revising the whole of the present work, in manuscript and proof : Professor E. G. Browne kindly suggested some improvements in the Introduction. I acknowledge with gratitude and admiration the promptness shown by the officials and staff of the Cambridge University Press, in completing against time a work involving unusual difficulties of composition and proof- reading.
J. W. C. K.
Sevenoaks,
December, 1904.
CONTENTS.
PART I. ORTHOGRAPHY.
The Alphabet Vowels
Diphthongs ... Vowel changes Consonants ...
PAGE
1 2 4 5 6
PART II. ACCIDENCE.
THE PARTS OF SPEECH A. Substantives ...
1. Classes of Nouns
2. Gender of Nouns
3. The Suffixes
(a) Linking Consonants
(6) Definite Article
(c) Demonstrative Adjective ...
(d) Possessive Pronominal Adjectives
(e) Interrogative Adjective
4. Plural of Nouns
5. Cases of Nouns
6. Numerals
7. Pronouns
(a) Simple Personal Pronouns ... (6) Possessive „
(c) Demonstrative „
(d) Relative „
(e) -Interrogative „ (/) Indefinite „
10
12 12 15 16
17 18 19 20 21
22 25 27 29 29 32 33 33 33 34
vm
CONTENTS
B. Adjectives
C.
I).
E.
F.
1. Classes of Adjectives
(«) Radical
(b) Derivative
(c) Compound
2. Inflexions of Adjectives
(a) Radical
(b) Derivative
(c) Compound
Comparison of Adjectives
3 Verbs
1. Conjugation
(a) Moods and Tenses ...
(b) Affirmative Conjugation
(c) Negative „
(d) Interrogative „
(e) Negative-Interrogative Conjugation
2. Peculiarities and Irregular Verbs
(a) 1st Conjugation
Irreg. Verb, oil (6) 2nd Conjugation ....
Irreg. Verbs, imo, ogho, oclo (c) 3rd Conjugation (rf) Irreg. Verbs, aho, laho, wah (e) The Passive Voice ...
3. Derivative Verbs
(a) Intensive
(6) Reflexive
(c) Attributive
(d) Causative
Particles
1. Verbal
(a) Adverbial
(b) Prepositional
2. Conjunctive
(a) Introductory
(b) Conjunctive
Adverbs, Prepositions, and Conjunctions Interjections, and Salutations
CONTENTS
IX
PART III. SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES.
A Structure of a Simple Sentence
1. Order of Words
2. The Particles wa, ba, ya
3. Simple Interrogative and Negative Sentences
4. Verbs of Existence
B. The Parts of Speech
1. The Article
2. The Noun
(a) Cases
(b) Number
(c) Concord
3. The Adjective
(a) Order
(b) Comparison
(c) Similarity .
4. The Numerals
5. The Pronouns and Pronominal Adjectives
(a) Persons
(b) Simple Personal Pronouns
(c) Suffixes
(d) Impersonal Pronouns
(e) Possessive Adjective
(/) Interrogative Pronouns and Adjectives
(g) Indefinite Pronouns and Adjectives
6. The Verb
(a) Moods and Tenses
(b) Persons
(c) Negative Tenses
7. The Particles
(a) Order
(6) Uses
(c) Adverbial Particles
(d) Prepositional „
PAGE 81
81
82 86 88
90
90
92
92
94
95
98
98
99
101
102
103
103
103
106
107
107
108
109
111
111
114
115
117 117 117 118 119
PART IV. SYNTAX OF COMPOUND SENTENCES.
A. Co-ordinate Sentences
Conjunctive Particles
B. Subordinate Sentences
1. General rules ...
123 123 124 125
X |
CONTENTS |
PAGE |
2. |
Adjectival Sentences |
125 |
3. |
Adverbial „ |
127 |
(a) Temporal and Locative |
127 |
|
(b) Final |
128 |
|
(c) Conditional |
129 |
|
(d) Causal |
130 |
|
(e) Concessive |
131 |
|
4. |
Substantival Sentences |
131 |
(a) Subjective |
131 |
|
(6) Objective |
132 |
|
5. |
Oratio Obliqua |
133 |
Appendix |
I. Seasons, months, days |
134 |
» |
II. Money, weights, measures |
136 |
» |
III. Tribes and Sub-tribes |
138 |
EXAMPLES OF PROSE AND VERSE.
Part I. Somali Stories, and Narrative 141
„ II. Translations of the Stories 160
„ III. Somali Songs (with translations) 170
THE DIALECTS OF THE OUTCAST TRIBES, MIDGAN AND YIBIR.
Account of the two tribes
Observations on the Dialects
3. Examples of the Dialects :
Midgan sentences ...
Yibir sentences
Yibir story of Mohammed Hanif
4. Vocabularies :
Yibir-Bnglish and Midgan-English
Comparative vocabulary, English — Somali — Yibir — Midgan
Index
184 185
191 192 197
200 207 215
BIBLIOGRAPHY.
Rigbt, Lieut. C. P., "On the Somauli Language"; Transactions of the Bombay Geographical Society, VoL ix, 1849.
Hunter, Capt. F. M., A Grammar of the Somali Language ; Bombay, 1880.
Cust, R., The Modern Languages of Africa ; London, Triibner & Co., 1883.
Schleicher, A. W., Die Somali-Sprache ; Berlin, 1892.
Paulitschke, Dr Philipp, Ethnographie Nordost-Afrikas ; Berlin, 1896.
Larajasse and Sampont, Practical Grammar of the Somali Language ; London, Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner & Co., 1897.
Larajasse, Somali-English and English-Somali Dictionary ; London, Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner & Co., 1897.
Schleicher, Dr A. W., Somali-Texte (edited by Leo Reinisch); Vienna and Leipzig, 1900.
These are the most important works upon the language, though other writers are also quoted by Paulitschke.
ERRATUM.
§ 15 (b). for warm, warming read warn, warning.
INTRODUCTION.
Somali is the language spoken by the inhabitants of the square tract of country, known as the Horn of Africa (Regio Aromatifera of the ancients), which lies between the French port of Djibouti, Cape Guardafui and the river Juba. This country was formerly inhabited by a people, now known as Gala1, who have been steadily driven inland by Mohammedan propagandists, who call themselves Somali. The neighbours of the Somali are the Danakil on the north, the Abyssinians, speaking Amharic, on the north-west, and the retreating Gala on the west and south-west. The languages of the Somali and the Gala are quite distinct, and mutually unintelli- gible, but possess so many fundamental characteristics in common, that there is ample evidence of their close relationship, even if it can not be proved that modern Somali is actually derived from Gala. There has always been considerable trade between the inhabitants of Aden and Southern Arabia and those of the Somali coast, and the Semitic element in Somali is sufficient proof of the local tradi- tion that the present Somali race had its origin in a Mohammedan colonisation from Southern Arabia.
If we compare the vocabularies of the three languages, Arabic, Gala and Somali, we find many words having a root common to all three, such as the Somali words, aba father, wil boy, faras horse.
The majority of words common to Arabic and Somali are found to be technical or legal terms, or names of utensils or articles of commerce not native to the country. These are obviously borrowed
1 Gal (of which the plural is Galo) is the name used generally to denote infidels, i.e. those who are not Mohammedans, and may be used by Somalia, without any disrespect, to include English, Abyssinians or others as well as those former inhabitants who would not embrace the faith preached by the Mohammedan missionaries, and to whom the name is now specially applied.
XIV INTRODUCTION
direct from the Arabic and have no bearing on the relationship of the languages. But in a few Somali verbs the Arabic root can be recognised, such as, ghad take, carry ; akhri read ; Ibi sell, buy ; gajo be hungry.
On the other hand a large number of words in ordinary use are common to Gala and Somali, but are not of Arabic origin. These have simple and elementary meanings, and include many verbs.
Such are,
arag see nin man
eg |
look |
dig |
blood |
jir |
be |
if |
light |
gal |
enter |
af |
month |
dul |
attack |
arrab |
tongue |
der |
long |
The Somali numerals are common to Gala, except one, six, ten and a hundred, and are all quite different from the Arabic.
In regard to the structure of the language, the most striking features are the Suffixes, with their generic linking consonants, the use of the Definite Article and its concord with noun aud adjective (the latter is comparable with the declension of the German adjective), the Negative Conjugation of verbs, and .the Particles. In all these points Somali resembles Gala, but apparently has little or no resemblance to Arabic, except in the particles.
All three languages employ similar inflexions in the persons of the verb conjugation, but in the two former, as in Arabic, prefixes are not used, except in the five irregular Somali verbs.
Example,
wan imi I came
wad timi thou earnest
wu yimi he came
wei timi she came
weinu nimi we came
The regular forms being as follows :
wan shega I tell
wad shegta thou tellest
wu shega he tells
wei shegta she tells
weinu shegna we tell
INTRODUCTION XV
The Semitic element is also exemplified in the guttural and aspirate sounds, which correspond to the Arabic letters Ghain, 'Ain, and Ha ; and in the form and concord of plural nouns, which largely resemble the Arabic broken plurals.
The Bantu languages, which are prefix languages, seem to have nothing in common with Somali, either in construction or vocabulary.
There are certain slight variations in the speech of different tribes, which almost constitute different dialects. The most notable are the Ishhak, Dolbohanta, Mijjertein and the Esa and Gadabursi.
For instance : |
||
Ishhak |
Dolbohanta |
|
camel |
aur |
rati |
road |
dau |
jid |
go |
tag |
ad |
the saddles koryashi koryalki
A Dolbohanta will say wa ddnahaya (I want), pronounced by the Ishhak as wa ddneya or wa ddnaya. " I want " is translated by wa ddneya in Bari, wa ddnaya in Galbed
Practically all the men I have served with have belonged to the Ishhak section, and in this book it is the everyday speech of these people which is presented, while words and forms which are not familiar to them, but are used by Dolbohanta and others, have been avoided. The Ishhak almost entirely inhabit the British Protectorate, and their speech may therefore be taken by Englishmen as the standard form of the language.
Within the Ishhak there are slight variations again in accent, phrases and idioms, of no great importance. These depend chiefly on geographical distribution.
In the East {Bari) the common forms for the personal pronoun are ban, bad, bu, etc., while in the West {Galbed) they are represented by yan, yad, yu, etc.
The Midgan and Yibir dialects are quite apart. These are dialects spoken by two outcast and homeless tribes living among the Somalis, and are now published for the first time, having hitherto been kept a secret even from the Somalis themselves. They are discussed in full at the end of this book.
XVI INTRODUCTION
Finally, with regard to speaking the language, the mode of speech is that of all Eastern people, like the language of the Bible. Sentences are split up into strings of short simple remarks, with numerous copulative particles, and expressions meaning, "and so," "and then," " he said," etc. In a narrative, after each remark the speaker pauses, when the listener is expected to answer with some suitable expression of assent, such as Kodi, or Haiye.
Correct pronunciation is most important, and as there are no definite rules for the accentuation of syllables I have had to use accents freely all through the book. The Somali is not a polite person, and though extremely good-natured he is quite outspoken, and has no hesitation in ridiculing one's false quantities or concords, that is to say, if one's efforts are at all recognisable to him. He expects a high standard of accuracy, chiefly because he is unaccus- tomed to hearing a European endeavour to grapple with his language, but this has the advantage of not allowing the stranger to form too favourable an idea of his own skill.
PART I. ORTHOGRAPHY.
1. In reducing the Somali language to writing, we are faced by the fact that there is no written language. Many educated Somalis write Arabic, but, so far as the writer is aware, they have never attempted to write their own language either in Arabic or any other characters. Nor would it be possible to employ the Arabic characters to represent Somali sounds. The list of Arabic consonants is too elaborate, whilst the three vowel-signs are in- sufficient, a great variety of vowel sounds being an important peculiarity of the Somali language.
According to Hunter the alphabetical signs for Urdu contain all the necessary elements, but he and all others have agreed to adopt the Roman characters, for obvious reasons.
The alphabet that is used here, so far as it is applicable, is that recommended by the Royal Geographical Society in "Hints to Travellers," with the addition of two extra signs for the Arabic Aine (c) and the cerebral d (Sanskrit ^), which are represented
respectively by the inverted comma ', and d, as in the grammar published by Larajasse and Sampont. The double hh is employed to represent the Arabic Ha (*-). Accents are also employed freely
to express the different values of the vowels.
a, a, d, - Arabic "fatha," or t b » V
d „ >, J
d Sanskrit ^5"
(half d, half r) e, £ as in Latin languages / = Arabic \J
The Alphabet |
|
ir 1 9 = ■ |
Arabic J> |
gh |
„ £ (L. & S. h) |
h |
» x |
hh |
(L. & S. h) |
i, i |
>> |
3 |
" 7r |
k = |
Arabic J) |
u, |
u = Arabic J |
||
kh I |
» t .. J |
w y |
5 |
||
m |
>» J» |
» t |
|||
n o, o, 6 |
j |
Diphthongs. |
|||
r |
» J |
ai |
|||
s sh |
* |
(Schl. |
§) |
ei au |
|
t |
„ & |
oi |
There is no doubt a double / (according to Hunter, the Sanskrit "&), but it is so seldom used (as in lehh = six) that it is not necessary to have a separate sign. The same remark applies to the Arabic i, which occurs in some Somali words, and is commonly used in Yibir.
Vowels.
3. The following accents are used to represent the different values of vowels : —
w and A are only used with special forms of a and o respectively.
The grave accent, v , is used to express the long drawn sounds of each vowel.
The acute accent, ', is only used to denote the syllable upon which the accentuation should fall, and may therefore vary in the same word in different contexts or forms ; it is to be understood that this accent does not alter the length or value of the vowel in any way.
4. a corresponds to the Arabic "fatha" and has a nondescript sound, as the u in " bun," " sun," or the a in " balloon " :
badan many ban plain dab fire
& is pronounced like a in "rat," "ham," but is not a common sound :
wan&ksan good r&g men
k&leh other
shalei yesterday
VOWELS o
& is long as in " father," " mast " : san skin dar stone building
e is pronounced like e in "pen," "fell" :
hebel a certain man sheg tell
Before cerebral d this has almost the value of u, as in English "fur." Example, hed tie.
& is like the vowels of "fate," "weight," "fare" :
adSr uncle
habSn night
gdnyo mare
g&d tree
i is short as in "pin" :
mid one illin entrance
Care must be taken to pronounce i with exactly this value before r, as y in " tyranny," and not as in English "fir" :
bir iron jir be
1 is like ee in " feel," " seem " :
'Id sand dlr trees lln orange
O is short as in "on," "cot" :
kol time 'oil army ghor write
6 is quite long as in " foal," " sole " : ddn wish gdb a kind of fruit g61 lioness
6 This is represented by Larajasse and Sampont by ow, which, however, seems liable to confusion with the English diphthong
1—2
4 ORTHOGRAPHY
ou. It has a very long drawn out hollow sound like a gasping « Ohh ! "
dd near
ild forget
mado black
u is pronounced as in "full," "put" :
Before r it must retain the same value and not be pronounced like the English "fur."
gur pick up kun thousand kulul warm
ti is long and full as oo in " fool," " rule " :
gilr start to march fiid soup fid ride
5. Diphthongs.
ai is pronounced as in "aisle," or "fire" : ain sort, 'kind
ei is pronounced like " feign," but in this case the i is sometimes almost heard :
weidi ask samei make
Note. In many words it is hard to distinguish whether the diphthong is the one or the other of these, the common a, or " fatha," and e being so much alike when preceding another vowel. Thus this work differs from that of other writers in that the past terminations of verbs, and the Continuative tense inflexions are spelt with an e, instead of a, the former being to the writer's ear distinctly the sound produced by the tribes he has been in contact with.
au is like the English diphthong in " how," "hour," but with a round full sound almost like " ao " : aur camel
oi very seldom occurs, but where it does it is exactly the same as in English :
hoi ! an exclamation
VOWEL CHANGES 5
Note. The above diphthongs may occur before another vowel, in which case i becomes y, and u becomes w :
laya |
slay ye (lai-a) |
|
wa tegey a |
I am going (tegei-i |
a) |
wa samey a |
I make (samei-a) |
|
bilawa |
dagger (bilau-a) |
|
goya |
cut ye (goi-a) |
|
6. Vowel changes. |
When two vowels occur in succession they may both be pro- nounced separately and distinctly, in which case the second vowel is marked with the diaeresis, " :
ai curse baan badtempered ei dog
More commonly the hiatus is avoided (a) by elision, (b) by the use of the semi-vowels y, w, (c) by the insertion of some consonant.
(a) Elision is the suppression of one of the vowels, and takes place especially before the pronouns which are attached as suffixes to the preceding word.
Examples, gorti-u becomes gortu when he
hadi-an „ hadan if I
(b) y is used instead of i, or after 1, when preceding a vowel. Examples, wa samei-a becomes wa sameya I make
wa sl-a „ wa slya I give
(c) Consonants are inserted in the case of certain inflexions. Examples, abi-hi for abi-i the father
madd-ba „ madd-a the black wa ild-ba „ ild-a I forget
When a is followed by i, it is very frequently changed into e, whether a consonant is between or not. Examples, ka' wake, awaken ke'i
la i becomes lei. sa' cow, si'i, or su'u (for sa'i, sa'u) the cow
wan taga I go, wan tegeya I am going aba father, abihi, or abuhu (for abahi, abahu)
the father
orthography
7. Consonants. The consonants are sounded as follows :
Faucals (', h, hh). |
|
' (aine) is an Arabic sound caused by a sudden contraction of |
|
the glottis in place of a hiatus |
i. It is treated like a consonant in all |
rules as to inflexions, etc. : |
|
'ab |
drink |
maga' |
name |
la'ag |
money |
b'e'id |
oryx |
'Id |
sand |
lo' |
cows |
'oil |
army |
'ur'ur |
forearm |
In order to learn the correct pronunciation compare the above |
|
with |
|
aba ' |
father |
nag |
woman |
baan |
badtempered |
beid |
egg |
idlad |
end, completion |
lohh |
plank |
urur |
assembly |
ulul |
growl |
Note. The Aine is a hard letter, and must be followed by the hard form of any other class of consonant in inflexion :
wa ka'da she gets up for ka'ta
h is like the English h in "hit," but is scarcely sounded when at the end of a word :
harag sheep-skin gesiah brave
hh is the long drawn Arabic consonant ; in the middle, or end, of a word it is sounded almost as a whole syllable, but is hardly different from h at the beginning of a word :
CONSONANTS 7
dehh middle (dehh(e))
libahh lion (libahh(a))
lehhda the six (lehh(e)da)
hhun bad
Gutturals (g, gh, k, kh).
g is always hard as in "go."
It most nearly resembles the Arabic J> : ga'an hand gel camels
gh is the Arabic " ghain," 6, and must be learned by ear :
ghad carry ghor write ghanso bow
k is like the English k :
kali come here
hakama bridle
kh is a softer guttural-aspirate than the ghain or gh, and more nearly corresponds to the Scotch ch, as in "loch," but is harder than this :
sandukh box
akhal house
Note. It is often difficult to distinguish between gh and kh, the former oeing softer, and the latter harder than in the true Arabic forms.
Palatals1 (j, sh, y).
j is a hard,/, as in English "journey," " John2 "
ja'al like j6g stand
sh is like the English, as in " shoot " :
shimbir bird sheg tell
1 These are not found at the end of a word in Somali.
2 There is no sound ch, as in "church," iu Somali; the English sound is reproduced by the native as j.
8 ORTHOGRAPHY
y is like the English, as in " you " :
yer small blyo water
Dentals (t, d, d, r, s, 1, n).
t as in English :
tuka crow
tehh shower of rain
d as in English :
wadan skin pail durug move
Note. At the end of a word d ia sounded nearly like t : mid one.
d is a cerebral letter, and, as mentioned above, is of Sanskrit origin.
In the middle of a word it has almost the sound of r, but at the beginning, or end, of a word it more nearly approaches d.
It is formed by curling the tongue back and bringing it forward along the roof of the mouth :
adi sheep
fadi sit
hed tie
dan all, complete
r is always pronounced distinctly, like the r of Latin languages, as in " arrow " :
ra' accompany
bir iron
shimbirtu the bird
s as in English :
1 as in English :
san skin so'o go on hes song
libahh lion lln orange
filfil pepper
CONSONANTS 9
n as in English :
nag woman mindi knife
Note. 1 and t, where they occur in inflexions or suffixes, become sh.
hashi the camel, for hal-ti
wa yesha thou doest, for yel-ta
Labials (b, m, f, w).
b as in English :
barbar youth
bilawa dagger
albab door
m as in English :
m6d think dambe behind
f as in English :
af mouth
iftin light
afar four
w as in English :
wiyil rhinoceros walal brother
PART II. ACCIDENCE.
THE PARTS OF SPEECH.
8. All languages cannot be arranged on exactly the same system, and, in the Somali Language, the arrangement and definitions which are applicable to the grammar of well-known tongues, such as English or Arabic, will not altogether hold good.
Somali is undoubtedly a simple and elementary language, in which the only true and fundamental parts of speech are
Substantive, Verb, Adjective, Particle,
and it is by various combinations or forms of these that the other generally recognised parts of speech are formed.
9. A Substantive is a word describing, or referring to, something which exists, or some object of thought, either material or im- material.
A Verb is a word expressing thought, being, action, or the suffering of action, and affirms or predicates something of some person or thing.
These two parts of speech are complementary and essential one to the other, and in any form of speech both these elements must necessarily occur, unless it is tacitly agreed, to save unnecessary verbiage, that one or the other may be obviously understood from the context, and may be omitted from actual expression.
An Adjective is a word which describes or qualifies the object or thought represented by a substantive, according to any known idea of quality, such as colour, size, nature, etc.
A Particle is a word which has no meaning in itself and can only occur in conjunction with other parts of speech. It may qualify the
Suffixes, known as -
PARTS OF SPEECH 11
meaning of a verb, or it may be " Conjunctive," that is, it may connect, or act as a link between, two expressions or parts of speech.
10. Other parts of speech that occur in more advanced languages are, in Somali, all derived from substantives, or are represented by suffixes.
Substantives may be qualified
(i) according to place, context, possessor, etc., by 'Definite Article, Demonstrative Adjective, Possessive Pronominal Adjective, ^Interrogative Adjective ;
(ii) according to number, by Inflexions. They include,
(i) Nouns (actually descriptive of an object or idea), (ii) Numerals1 (expressing the abstract idea of a number), (iii) Pronouns (words used to refer to a noun or numeral already expressed, or understood, to avoid lengthy and unnecessary repetition).
Note a. All substantives are recognisable by the fact that they are able to have attached to them the suffixes mentioned above, and may stand alone as Subject or Object to a Verb.
Note b. Nouns and numerals have no declension, nouns alone being inflected in the plural. Personal pronouns have an Objective (or Accusative) form as well as the Subjective (or Nominative).
In addition to the above, there are formed, by the use of a noun alone, or a noun combined with any of the other substantives, with or without suffixes or inflexions, and with or without an adjective,
(iv) Adverbs (words expressing time, place or manner, relative to the action of a verb).
(v) Relative Conjunctions (words introducing expressions of the same value as the above).
(vi) Prepositions (words expressing the relationship of one substantive to another).
1 These are undoubtedly treated as Substantives in Somali.
12 ACCIDENCE
A. Substantives.
11. These will be dealt with in the order given in the classi- fication above, but it is necessary first to describe the Noun itself, its Forms, and Gender, after which will follow the Suffixes, to be followed again by the Plural Inflexions.
The reason of this order will be seen on a perusal of the following pages, as the questions of gender and number are inextricably mixed with those concerning the form of the Suffixes.
1. Classes of Nouns.
12. Nouns are classified into Proper and Common. ' Proper ' nouns are names of people or places.
The commoner and typical Somali men's names are, Jama, Farah, Hassan, Hussein, Mohammed, Mahhmud, Ahhmed, Ali, Omar, Nur, Liban, Egal, Dualeh, Abdallah, Abdi, Robleh.
Nicknames are very common ; in fact nearly everyone, whether Somali or English, is always known by his friends by some nickname, such as, Gurreh left-handed, Farurah hare-lipped, Dunjog active or " cute," Bulali fair, Timo-wein long hair, Awarah one-eyed, Galds, Delowein, etc., always referring to some feature or eccentricity, but without any idea of disrespect.
13. Common nouns are classed in various ways : according to their Nature they are Concrete, or Abstract,
according to their Derivation they are Radical, Derivative, or Borrowed,
according to their Gender they are Masculine, Feminine, or Common.
14. Concrete Nouns include the names of all animate or inanimate objects, or parts of them.
Nearly all of these are Radical words, or else are borrowed entirely from another language.
(i) Animate : nin man, nag woman, wil boy,
gabad girl, libahh lion, faras horse, aur camel, shimbir bird.
ABSTRACT NOUNS 13
They include collective words, as :
dad people, rag men, dumar women, artir children, gel camels, bdlo flocks, ghalab, alabo baggage, kit.
Names of relations :
aba father, hoyo mother, walal brother or sister, fnan son, or daughter, adSr uncle.
(ii) Inanimate objects are :
wahh thing, bir iron, ghori wood, dagahh stone, bur hill, mlyi jungle, akhal house.
15. Abstract Nouns.
(a) Many abstract nouns of action and sense are radical, in which case they are also used as intransitive verbs.
hadal talk, yab wonder, dagal fight, 'ur smell, harad thirst, bandn pain, ai curse, gabei chant, ado rage.
(b) Verb-nouns, describing the action of a verb, are formed from the verb-root by the addition of certain terminations :
1st Class (ending in a consonant) add -nin, or -in.
2nd Class ( „ „ -o ) „ -d.
3rd Class ( „ „ -i ) „ -s, or -n.
1st |
Class. |
|||
dig |
warm |
dignin warming |
||
tol |
sew |
tdlin sewing, seam |
||
ghor |
write |
ghorin writing |
||
bdd |
jump |
bo din jumping |
||
sug |
wait |
sugnin waiting |
||
(Note : |
fed |
ride |
fCdan riding.) |
|
2nd Class. |
so'o walk so'od walking
nokho return nokbod return
garo understand garad sense
babso escape babsad escape
idlo come to an end idlad end, completion
ACCIDENCE |
||
3rd Class. |
||
weidi |
ask |
weidis |
goi |
cut |
gois |
si |
give |
sin |
samei |
make |
samein |
safei |
clean |
safein |
14
question cutting, cleft present construction cleaning
(c) Abstract Nouns of Quality are derived from adjectives, or nouns, and have the following forms :
'ulusnimo heaviness from 'ulus heavy
'ajisnfmo laziness „ 'ajis lazy
fulanfmo cowardice „ fulei coward
nagnfmo womanliness „ nag woman
hoyonfmo motherliness „ hoyo mother
'adan |
whiteness |
>> |
'ad |
white |
'asan |
redness |
» |
'as |
red |
weinan |
largeness |
>> |
wein |
large |
adkan |
hardness |
» |
adag |
hard |
derer fudeid 'uleis adeig
length lightness weight strength
der long
fudud light
'ulus heavy
adag hard, strong
(d) Other radical abstract nouns are those of Quantity, Time, and Place, some of which are used as Indefinite Pronouns.
in some (quantity) ghar some (number)
gidi, kulli, daman all, whole gor, kol time malin, 'asho day mel, hag place
16. Borrowed words are chiefly Arabic, many being common to all East African languages.
mes table, sa'ad hour, kursi chair, sandukh box, bandukh gun, hukum order, askari soldier
In albab (door), the Somali has taken the Arabic definite article as well, but adds his own article to it : albabki the door.
Verbs are very seldom borrowed, such as safei (clean). English words are now becoming familiar and naturalised over the whole of our Protectorate, as,
GENDER OF NOUNS 15
kdd (coat), tfcbel (table), sord (sword), drabel (trouble), ketli (kettle), kob (cup).
2. Gender of Nouns.
17. There are no rules determining the gender of a Radical Noun, either according to its meaning or form. It must therefore be learned by practice in the case of each word. This however is not so difficult as it would appear, as the definite article is so much a part of the noun, and the gender is so clearly marked by it, that it is best to learn the definite article with the noun in each case. I shall, therefore, when quoting a noun, give the definite article, separated by a hyphen, as in
nin-ki man nag-ti woman.
This will imply that
nin =a man nag = a woman
ninki = the man nagti = the woman.
It will suffice here to say that all Feminine nouns are those which take the dental article, i.e. -ti or -di ;
While all Masculine nouns are those which take a guttural article, i.e. -ki, -gi, -hi, or in some cases the vowel -i, alone.
In both cases the Suffix consists of two parts. The" final vowel is the Article Suffix, the consonant is the Linking Consonant.
18. The Derivative and Borrowed Nouns do follow certain determinate rules in respect of gender.
Borrowed words are masculine :
mes-ki, kursi-gi, hukum-ki, sandukh-i, albab-ki, t^bel-ki, kod-ki, etc.
Exceptions, sa'ad-di hour ) ,. . .
.. , . . . , , > are feminine. warkhad-di letter j
19. Of Derivative Nouns,
Verbal Nouns in -in (1st and 3rd Classes) are Feminine : dignin-ti, sugnin-ti, samein-ti, etc.
Verbal Nouns in -d, -s (2nd and 3rd Classes) are Masculine : so'od-ki, idlad-ki, gois-ki, etc.
16
ACCIDENCE
Adjectival Nouns in -nimo -an are Feminine. 'ajisnfmo-di, weinan-ti.
Adjectival Nouns of other forms are Masculine, derer-ki, 'uleis-ki, etc.
20. Names of men and animals may have special forms for
each gender : |
|||
Examples, |
|||
nin-ki |
man, husband |
nag-ti |
woman, wife |
aba-hi |
father |
hoyo-di |
mother |
aur-ki |
male camel |
hal-shi ' |
female camel |
sanga-hi |
stallion |
g6nyo-di |
mare |
wan-ki |
ram |
sabein-ti |
ewe |
orgi-gi |
he-goat |
ri-di |
she-goat |
ar-ki |
lion |
gol-shi1 |
lioness |
21. Some nouns are of common gender, and vary only in the form of the definite article.
inan-ki son Inan-ti daughter
son walal-ki brother
walal-shi1 sister
3. The Suffixes.
22. The Suffixes consist of two parts, namely (1) a vowel termination, or syllable beginning with a vowel, and (2) a linking consonant, connecting the termination to the substantive, and denoting the gender of the word.
23. The following parts of speech are represented by Suffixes in Somali :
viz.
i Definite Article (the) -i
Demonstrative Adjective (this; that) -an; Possessive Pronominal Adjective.
(my, thy, his, her) -ai
(our (1 and 3), our (1, 2 and 3)
your, tlieir) -aya
Interrogative Adjective (what ?) ... -e P
-a
-as
or or
-u.
-a.
-Is -ed.
-fcn -In -6d.
1 In Feminine nouns ending in -I, the final I and the t of the Article are transformed into sh ; thus nashl the she-camel, for halti, walashi for walilti.
LINKING CONSONANTS
17
ninki, ninka, or ninku the man
ninkan this man
ninkas or ninka that man
ninkai, ninka, ninkis, &c. my, thy, his, etc. man
ninke ? what man ?
The above forms are constant, whether the noun qualified is in the Singular or Plural.
(a) Linking Consonants.
24. The Linking Consonants are peculiar to each noun, and conform to its gender and the final letter of the word.
25. Masculine words take the gutturals, k, g, h.
Nouns ending in any consonant, except g, or a gutt. aspirate, take k
„ g
h
-i or g -a
Note i. Nouns ending in -h, hh, or a guttural aspirate, would logically be followed by h, but this additional aspirate is hardly to be detected by the ear, and need not therefore be written.
Note ii. With nouns ending in ' no linking consonant is required, unless it be another ', but this again the ear cannot detect.
Note iii. Where the noun ends in a, -ah, the -a is assimilated to the form of suffix vowel which follows, i.e. if the suffix is -i, the a becomes i, if u, it becomes u.
Examples,
(The suffix is here separated by a hyphen, but it must be remembered that it is not spoken as a separate word, and will not be so written in examples later.)
albab-ki
shabel-ki
sul-ki
san-ki
af-ki
mlyi-gi
askari-gi
the door the leopard the thumb the nose the mouth the jungle the soldier
harag-gi
ilig-gi
libahh-i
sandukh-i
maga'-i
muda'-i
the sheep-skin, the tooth the lion (i) the box (i) the name (ii) the fork (ii)
kbra a saddle
dayah a moon
K.
the saddle kdri-hi, kdra-ha, or
kdru-hu (iii)
the moon dayi-hi, daya-ha, or
dayu-hu (iii)
2
18
; |
ACCIDENCE |
and |
|
(waranleh |
a spearman the s. |
farddleh |
a horseman the h. |
waranlihi, waranlaha, waranluhii the h. fardblihi, fardalaha,
farddluhu)
26. Feminine words take the dentals -t or -d. Nouns ending in any consonant except d, or ', take -t.
„ „ -d, -i, -o, ', or an aspirate, „ -d.
Examples,
nag-ti the woman laf-ti the bone
lan-ti the branch miyid-di the corpse
far-ti the finger salo-di the dung
ga'an-ti the hand ghorahh-di the sua
hal-shi the she-camel warakh-di the letter
ri-di ' the goat Nogal-shi the Nogal
27. In many cases the linking consonant may be omitted, as has been noticed after aspirates, and ' .
It is also omitted in certain words,
rag-i the men
g£l-i the camels - with the simple Personal Pronouns,
an-i, an-a I
ad-i, ad-a thou, etc. after some of the Possessive Pronominal suffixes,
akhal-kls-i his house
has-k£d-a her family
dad-kdn-i our people or after the Demonstrative suffix,
nin-kan-a this man
aur-kas-i that camel
(b) The Definite Article.
28. It is seen in § 23 that the Definite Article has three alternative forms, the use of which depends entirely on the context of the noun defined.
A short general rule is given here, but the question will be more fully dealt with under Syntax (§ 150, etc.).
DEFINITE ARTICLE 19
" The horse " may be, faraski, faraska, or farasku. " The place " „ meshi, mesha, or meshu.
29. (i) -i is the most general form, and is used when -a, or -u, are not required.
(ii) -a is used in the following cases :
(1) when referring to a person or thing actually present in front of the speaker, and is very nearly equivalent to the demonstrative adjective (this), but must not be confounded with the demonstrative suffix -a (that) ;
(2) when the noun is used possessively, adjectivally or ad- verbially.
Examples,
(1) sandukha ghad take the box (which you see)
ninka ba 6g the man (i.e. he that is present) knows
ninka ad arkesa the man thou seest
(but, ninki ad araktei the man thou sawest)
(2) akhalki sirkalka the house of the officer nin magaloda a man of the town galabta this evening
(iii) -u is used when referring to a well-known, or already mentioned, object or person.
Any definition is supposed to be unnecessary, and therefore -u is not employed if the noun is qualified by an adjective, nor is it used with the object of a sentence.
It may be represented in English by the use of "The" or capital letters. Examples, Sirkalku The Officer (as a soldier would refer to
his company officer or Commandant) Wadadku The Mullah (i.e. Mohammed Abdallah
Hassan) ghorahhdu the sun dayuhu the moon
rbbku the rain
(c) The Demonstrative Adjective.
30. The suffixes are,
-an this
-as, or -a that
2—2
20 ACCIDENCE
Examples, faras-kan this horse
faras-kas that horse
nag-tan this woman
gSd-kas that tree
sandukh-an this box
busta-has that blanket
ha-shan this camel
magalo-dan this town
31. The Demonstrative may be intensified by the addition of the definite article in two ways (cf. § 198) :
(i) The definite article -a and demonstrative adjective both require linking consonants.
In this case the linking consonant used with the Demonstrative Suffix is always k for masculine words, and t for feminine words.
Examples, nfnkakan this man nagtata that woman
gh6rigakan this wood mSshatas that place
dagahhakan this stone sanadukhdatan these boxes
(ii) The definite article is suffixed to the demonstrative without any linking consonant.
Examples,
ninkasa that man gabaddasu that girl
nimankani these mei gddkasa that tree
rdbkanu this rain inantasi that daughter
(d) Possessive Pronominal Adjectives.
32. my -ai- (-gi, or -di) thy -a- (-gi, or -di) his -is- (-i)
her -Sd- (-i)
our -fcn- (-i) (including " you ")
our -aya- (-gi, or -di) (excluding " you ")
your -in- (-i)
their -6d- (-i) Except when qualifying terms of relationship, as "father," "mother," "husband," etc., the above suffixes require the definite article as well, as given in brackets after each person. Only -ai, -a, -aya, however, require the linking consonant, the remainder taking the article without any link.
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVE
21
The linking consonant to the article, when used, is always for masculine words, -d- for feminine words.
Example, aur-ki |
camel |
||
aurkaigi |
aurkaiga |
aurkaigu |
my camel |
aurkagi |
aurkaga |
aurkagu |
thy camel |
aurkisi |
aurklsa |
aurklsu |
his camel |
aurkedi |
aurkeda |
aurkedu |
her camel |
aurkSni |
aurkena |
aurkdnu |
our camel |
aurkayagi |
aurkayaga |
aurkayagu |
our camel |
aurklni |
aurklna |
aurklnu |
your camel |
aurkbdi |
aurkdda |
aurkddu |
their camel |
aur-ti |
camels |
||
aurtaidi |
aurtaida |
aurtaidu |
my camels |
aurtadi |
aurtada |
aurtadu |
thy camels |
aurtlsi |
aurtlsa |
aurtlsu |
his camels |
aurtfcdi |
aurtdda |
aurtadu |
her camels |
aurteni |
aurtena |
aurtenu |
our camels |
aurtayadi |
aurtayada |
aurtayadu |
our camels |
aurtlni |
aurtlna |
aurtlnu |
your camels |
aurtddi |
aurtdda |
aurtddu |
their camels |
With terms of relationship, the definite article is not used after the possessive.
Examples,
abahai |
my father |
hoyoda |
thy mother |
nagtls |
his wife |
ninked |
her husband |
aderken |
our uncle |
tolkaya |
our tribe |
awdwigln |
your grandfather |
walalkdd |
their brother |
(e) The Interrogative Adjective.
33. " Which ? " "What ? " are expressed often by the suffix -e ? This suffix is sounded distinctly at the end of the noun, like English " eh ? ", but must not be pronounced as ei or S.
ninke ? what man ?
sandukhe ? what box ? gabadde P what girl ?
22
ACCIDENCE
This form is most commonly used alone, or with the word wa (is), and usually repeats some noun already mentioned.
Examples, ninki yimi the man has come
ninke P or wa ninke P what man ?
4. The Plural of Nouns.
34. The only inflexion which nouns undergo occurs in the formation of the Plural.
There are six methods of forming the Plural, and in all except the first (Masculine Monosyllables) the gender is reversed in the process, and the linking consonant, required with the suffixes, is altered from guttural to dental, or vice versa.
35. (i) Masculine Monosyllables repeat the last two letters. The masculine, or guttural, linking consonant is retained. In words ending in -n, the -n becomes -m, while the inflexion is always -an.
Examples,
dab-ki |
fire |
plural |
dabab-ki |
fas-ki |
axe |
>> |
fasas-ki |
rad-ki |
track |
>> |
radad-ki |
kob-ki |
cup |
>> |
kobob-ki |
'oll-ki |
army |
>> |
'oll'oll-ki |
nin-ki |
man |
>> |
niman-ki |
tin-ki |
tin |
>> |
timan-ki |
'ain-ki |
belly-band strap ' |
j> |
'aiman-ki |
sun-ki |
>> |
suman-ki |
|
Exceptions |
|||
rer-ki |
family, household |
plural |
rdro-hi |
na's-ki |
fool |
j> |
na'syo-di |
ges-ki |
horn |
>> |
gesas-ki, or geso-hi |
'el-ki |
well |
>> |
'elal-shi |
bal-ki |
feather |
>> |
balal-shi |
aur-ki |
camel |
>> |
aur-ti |
sais-ki |
groom |
>> |
saisis-ki, or saisin-ti |
36. (ii) Nouns ending in -a, or -ei (all Masculine) change -a, or -ei into -yal, and take the feminine, or dental, linking consonant.
Examples,
kdra-hi saddle plural kbryal, kdryashi
busta-hi blanket „ bustyal-shi
aba-hi father „ abyal-shi
PLURAL OF NOUNS
23
tuka-hi crow plural tukyal-shi
bilawa-hi dagger „ bilawyal-shi
hakama-hi bridle „ hakamyal-shi
odei-gi old man ,, odyal-shi
fCilei-gi coward ,, fulyal-shi
Exceptions :
These plurals are used with the masculine, or guttural, linking consonant, by Dolbohanta, and other eastern tribes :
bustyalki, kdryalki, hakamyalki, etc.
37. (iii) Nouns ending in -o (all Feminine) add -in, and take the masculine, or guttural, linking consonant.
Examples,
'asho-di day plural 'ashoin-ki
hoyo-di mother ,, hoyom-ki
^udimo-di native axe „ gudimoin-ki
dero-di gazelle „ d£roin-ki
ghanso-di bow „ ghansoin-ki
38. (iv) Masculine Polysyllables (except those under ii) add -o. If the final letter is an aspirate or ', -yo is added.
These plurals take the feminine, or dental linking consonant, the -o being then usually changed to -a. Examples,
fandal-ki |
spoon |
plural |
fandalo, fandaladi |
libahh-i |
lion |
i> |
libahhyo-di |
kursi-gi |
chair |
J> |
kursyo-di |
muda'-i |
fork |
)> |
muda'yo-di |
muftah-i |
key |
J> |
muftahyo-di |
maga'-i |
name |
J) |
maga'yo-di |
Exceptions, |
|||
dagahh-i |
stone |
>> |
dagahhan-ti |
ugahh-i |
egg |
)) |
ugahhan-ti |
sibaihh-i |
sepoy |
>> |
sibaihhin-ti |
aghil-ki |
chief |
>) |
aghilin-ti, or oghal-shi |
faras-ki |
horse |
)> |
fardo-hi |
ilig-gi |
tooth |
>> |
ilko-di |
askari-gi |
soldier |
11 |
askarr-ti |
1 The common word now used, word gudin, which is also used.
But it is originally the plural of an older
24
ACCIDENCE
guri-gi enclosure plural gurio-hi
Yibir-ki Yibir „ Yibro-hi
Midgan-ki Midgan „ Midgo-hi
Foreign words often add -yo in other cases than those given in the rule above :
rakab-ki stirrup plural rakabyo-di kitab-ki book „ kitabyo-di
39. (v) Words borrowed from the Arabic usually form their plurals after the fashion of the broken plurals of that language, and take the feminine linking consonant.
Examples,
sandukh-i |
box |
plural |
sanadukh-di |
|
bandukh-i |
gun |
■>■> |
banadukh-di, |
or banadikh-di |
sirkal-ki |
officer |
)y |
sirakll-shi |
|
kursi-gi |
chair |
j> |
kurasi-di |
|
warkhad-di |
paper |
>> |
warakh-di |
|
moskhln-ki |
beggar |
3) |
mosakhln-ti |
|
musmar-ki |
nail |
») |
musamar-ti |
40. (vi) All Feminine Nouns, except those in (iii), add o, and take the masculine linking consonant, h.
When the noun is denned the o is assimilated to the form of the article vowel, as in the case of masculine nouns in a.
Examples,
nag-ti |
woman |
plural |
nago, nagihi, nagaha, naguhu |
hal-shi |
she-camel |
)> |
halo, halihi, halaha, haluhu |
mel-shi |
place |
>> |
melo-hi |
lug-ti |
leg |
>> |
lugo-hi |
deg-ti |
ear |
m |
dego-hi |
lan-ti |
branch |
>> |
lamo-hi |
'alen-ti |
leaf |
)> |
'alemo-hi |
jdniad-di |
bag |
it |
j6niado-hi |
ga'an-ti |
hand |
)> |
ga'amo-hi |
ri-di |
goat |
}> |
riyo-hi |
kab-ti |
shoe |
>> |
kabo-hi |
Exception, |
|||
il-shi |
eye |
i) |
indo-hi |
CASES OF NOUNS 25
There exist the following plural nouns, all of which end in o and take the masculine article hi, and therefore belong to this class.
blyo-hi water
'ano-hi milk
g£do-hi grass
timo-hi hair
h61o-hi flocks, property
41. An Intensive Plural, ending in -al, -yal, is used in poetic phraseology.
Example, Idinku baneyal...dftlan ma bulaten P Have ye over plains and plains gone to war ? Gerar wa bogholal. Songs are in hundreds.
42. After Numerals the plural form of a noun is not used except in the case of Feminine Nouns of class (vi). In this case d is added to the inflexion.
Examples, 2 men laba nin
4 boxes afar sandukh
3 blankets sadehh busta 7 days todbba 'asho
but, 5 she-camels shan halod
2 places laba melod
4 bags afar joniadod 9 months sagal bilod
5. Cases of Nouns.
43. There are no inflexions of the noun to represent the Declension ; the cases must therefore be distinguished by position and context. This is not an easy matter, and requires a knowledge of other parts of speech not yet described : it will therefore be left to be discussed under Syntax (cf. § 155).
44. The usual order of a simple sentence is,
(i) Subject, (ii) Object, (iii) Verb. An Adverb may be placed first of all, or before the Verb.
26
ACCIDENCE
Examples,
Adv.
galabta
this evening-
Subject
sirkalku the officer
an
I
harudki
the jowaree
Object
sandukh
a box
faraska the horse
Burao
Burao
faraska
(to) the horse
Verb
la kali
bring
fuleya \
is riding J
ghobon dona | am going to reach J
}
give J
45. The Possessive Case may be expressed in two ways.
(i) The common method is by the use of the Possessive
suffix.
Examples,
nin akhalklsu sirkalku farasklsa nagti bokhorkeda
a man his house the Officer his horse the woman her sash
(ii) The Noun in the possessive case is placed after the noun possessed.
This can only be done where the Possessor is defined by the definite article. The Possessor always takes the suffix a.
Example,
akhalki ninka the house of the man not akhalki ninki
(nor is it possible to say, akhalki nin for " the house of a man ").
The following are the typical forms :
The horse of the officer faraski sirkalka or sirkalka farasklsu
nin sirkal farasklsu far as sirkalka fardaha sirkalka mid ba dintei (literally, of the horses of the officer one has died). A horse of an officer sirkal farasklsi
The horse of an officer
A horse of the officer
A horse of the officer
has died
NUMERALS |
|||
6. |
Numerals. |
||
16. |
Cardinals, |
||
1. |
(ko-di), mid-ki |
16. |
lehhyo-tdban-ki |
2. |
laba-di |
17. |
toddbyo-tdban-ki |
3. |
sadehh-di |
18. |
sid6dyo-tdban-ki |
4. |
afar-ti |
19. |
sagalyo-t6ban-ki |
5. |
shan-ti |
20. |
labaton-ki |
6. |
lehh-di |
21. |
kobyo-labaton-ki |
7. |
tod6ba-di |
22. |
labyo-labaton-ki |
8. |
sid&d-di |
etc. etc. |
|
9. |
sagal-ki |
30. |
s6ddon-ki |
10. |
t6ban-ki |
40. |
afarton-ki |
11. |
kobyo-tdban-ki |
50. |
konton-ki |
12. |
labyo-tdban-ki |
60. |
16hhdon-ki |
13. |
sadehhyo-t6ban-ki |
70. |
todobaton-ki |
14. |
afaryo-tdban-ki |
80. |
sid6ton-ki |
15. |
shanyo-tdban-ki |
90. |
sagashon-ki |
100. |
b6ghol-ki |
27
1,000. kun-ki
47. Rules for the use of the Numerals.
(i) The Numerals are placed before the noun they qualify.
(ii) Masculine nouns, and Feminine nouns ending in o are used in the singular.
Feminine Nouns (except those ending in o) add od.
(iii) If the Noun qualified by a numeral is defined by the Definite Article, Demonstrative, or Possessive, the suffix is attached to the numeral and not to the noun, numerals 1 — 8 taking the dental linking consonant, the remainder the guttural linking con- sonant, irrespectively of the gender of the noun.
Examples,
laba nin 2 men afar faras 4 horses lehh halod 6 camels tobanki askari afarti nin labada halod
sadehh 'asho 3 days
shan k6ra 5 saddles
todoba jdniadod 7 bags the ten soldiers the four men those two camels
b6gholkaigi adi my hundred sheep.
28
ACCIDENCE
48. (i) K6 is only used in counting, and is never used with a noun :
mid is not used to qualify a noun, but is used as an Indefinite Impersonal Pronoun.
one man nin
one (thing) is bad mid ba hhun
one (man) is bad nin ba hhun
(ii) The numerals 19, 29, 39, etc., are usually translated by,
labaton midla 20 minus one = 19 sdddon midla 30 minus one = 29 b6ghol midla 100 minus one = 99
(iii) The numerals over 100 are translated as follows :
(iyo = and)
101 bogh61-iyo mid
102 bogh<51-iyo laba 130 bogh61-iyo s6ddon
146 bogh61-iyo 16hhyo-afarton
(iv) Time in hours is translated by the Cardinal numerals with the Definite Article, (sa'adod = hours, may be used.)
3 o'clock sadehhda (sa'adod)
1 o'clock kddi
half-past 2 labada iyo badki
49. Fractions,
50.
a portion mel-shi |
|||
| bad-ki |
i |
fallad-di |
|
£ daldl-ki T\ |
rima-di |
||
I wahh-di |
|||
L Ordinals, |
|||
first |
kdwad, h6re |
eighth |
sidedad |
second |
labad |
ninth |
sagalad |
third |
sadehhad |
tenth |
t6bnad |
fourth |
afrad |
eleventh |
i k6byo-t6bnad |
fifth |
shanad |
etc. |
|
sixth |
lehhad |
twentieth labatonad |
|
seventh |
todbbad |
PERSONAL PRONOUNS 29
These are used like adjectives and follow the nouns they qualify, but are not inflected.
nin labad a second man nagti afrad the fourth woman ki 16hhad the sixth
51. Distributive Numbers. No special forms are used for these,
each = kasta every = walba (see § 68) ;
but distributive numbers are usually expressed by the particle ba (S 143 («)).
give 10 each nin ba tdban si
one by one mid mid
in tens tdban tdban
52. |
Periodical Numbers, |
||
(time |
mar, kol, gor) |
||
once |
kol, mar |
||
three times |
sadehh gor |
||
7. |
Pronouns. |
}
she
(a) Simple Personal Pronouns. (1) Subjective. 53. The simple, or Enclitic, forms are :
-an I
-ad thou
-u he
-ai
-ei
-ainu ]
} we (inclusive) -emu J x '
-annu we (exclusive)
-aiding
-eidin j y
t } -
These cannot stand alone in a sentence, but must follow, and be attached to, some preceding word, which may be any part of speech.
30 ACCIDENCE
Examples,
gortas-u yidi then-he said
'had'-an imado if-I come
Burao-einu nil ' at Burao-we lived 1lmis'-ad dbnesa ? how-many-do-you want ?
ninki-an ddneya the man-(whom)-I want
54. Very often, however, these simple forms are combined with the letters w-, b-, or y- (which represent certain particles, wa, ba, ya) and are then used as separate words.
wan, wad, wu, etc. are forms which may be used at the
beginning of a sentence, but are never used in any other position.
ban, bad, bu, etc.] r , . , , , ,
, \ are synonymous forms, and are interchangeable.
yan, yad, yu, etc. J J J
b- is preferred by Eastern and Southern Somalis.
y- is preferred by the Coast, Western and Central tribes.
These forms usually occur immediately before the verb or its
particles, but never at the beginning of a sentence (cf. § 236).
55. There are two ways of emphasising the Personal Pronouns, which may be u^ed disjunctively, like the French " moi," " toi," etc. This is done by the addition of the Definite Article.
In both cases the simple form for the third person singular masculine is is.
(i) The article suffix is added to the simple form without any linking consonant, thus :
ani I adi Thou (isi) He
ana ada (isa)
arm adu isu
These are the only persons which are found in this form.
(ii) The article suffix and linking consonant is added to the last or to the Enclitic forms of the plural.
The -a and -u suffixes only are used in this case, thus :
anigu, aniga I
adigu, adiga Thou
isagu, fsaga He
iyadu, iyada She
1 A final vowel iB usually dropped before the personal pronoun, as is shown here by an apostrophe '.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS
31
fnnagu, |
innaga |
We |
annagu, |
annaga |
We (exclusive) |
idinku, |
idinka |
Ye |
iyagu, |
fyaga |
They |
To translate " I myself" cf. § 190.
56. Another form is produced by the suffix -na (and).
and I and you
anna
adna
isna
iyana
innuna
annuna
idinna
iyana
57. A compound, of wahh (thing).
wahhan has the meaning of "this is what I..."
These forms are especially used with the verbs " want," "think." "do," but may be used with any verb.
and he and she and we and we and ye and they
Indicative," form is made by the addition
say,
wahhan wahh ad wuhhu wahhai wahhainu wahhannu wahhai din wahhai
this is what I... thou, he...
she...
we...
we...
ye...
they...
58. An interrogative form of the same is made with mahha ? (what ?)
mahhan... ?
mahhad...?
muhhu...P
mahhai...?
mahhainu...?
mahhannu...?
mahhaidin...?
mahhai...?
what... what... what... what... what... what..,
I...?
thou...?
he...?
she...?
we...?
we...?
what... ye...? what... they...?
32 ACCIDENCE
59. These two forms are used very frequently in introducing questions and answers. Examples,
mahhad ddnesa P ) wahhan dbneya, etc.
| wahhan doneya, etc. \ f I want, etc. J
what do you want ?
hagg'eidin takten ?\ wahhannu tagnei, etc.)
where did you go ? J we went to, etc. J
muhhuyidi? | wuhhuyidi... y
what did he say ? J he said... J
(2) Objective.
60. The objective, or oblique, case of the Personal Pronouns has special forms, which are used independently as separate words.
Simple |
Emphatic |
|
me |
i |
aniga |
thee |
ku |
adiga |
him |
u |
isaga |
her |
ku |
iyada |
us |
na |
rinnaga lannaga |
you |
idin |
idinka |
them |
u, or ku |
iyaga |
The accentuation of these emphatic forms must be noticed, to distinguish them from the Subjective case.
Examples, isaga (Obj.) and isaga (Subj.) iyaga „ and iyaga
61. (iii) The Reflexive Pronoun is iss.
iss dil kill yourself This is also used reciprocally :
iss laya slay each other
(b) Possessive Pronouns.
62. These have the same forms as the suffixes (§ 32) with a consonant (k masc. t fern.) prefixed, and the definite article suffixed, to them (cf. § 199).
Masc. Fern,
mine kai-gi, -ga, -gu. tai-di, -da, -du.
thine ka-gi, -ga, -gu. ta-di, -da, -du.
his kis-i, -a, -u. tis-i, -a, -u.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS 33
hers k£d-i -a -u tfcd-i -a -u
ours k£n-i -a -u t&n-i -a -u
ours kaya-gi -ga -gu taya-di -da -du yours kln-i -a -u tln-i -a -u
theirs k6d-i -a -u t6d-i -a -u
In the Plural, the above prefix ku, tu, instead of k, t, to the
suffix, as,
kuaigi, tuaidi, kuagi, tuadi, etc.
(c) Demonstrative Pronouns.
63. These also have the same forms as the adjectival suffixes (§ 30), and are used with consonants as above.
Sing. Plur.
Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem.
this kan, tan these kuan, tuan
, i kas, tas those kuas, tuas that 1 ka ta
They may be intensified by the definite article, as follows : sing, kani, kana, kanu, kasa, tasu, etc. plur. ktiakan, tiiatan, kiiakas, etc. or kuani, tuani, kuasi, etc. Another form is,
ko, to that yonder kuo, tu6 those yonder The definite article is used independently as a pronoun in the
same way.
ki, ka, ku ; ti, ta, tu.
ki kaleh the other one
ta wein the big one.
The plur. form is
kuer, tuer Example, kuer 'ad'ada the white ones
64. (e?) Relative Pronouns.
None.
65. (e) Interrogative Pronouns.
(i) Subjective :
who ? what ? ya P (sing.) kue ? (plur.)
K. 3
34 ACCIDENCE
ke P te ? are also used disjunctively in this sense, as the other suffixes.
(ii) Objective :
whom ? ya P
what? mahha ? (§ 58)
66. The suffix -ma is used as an interrogative pronominal adjective, but is not included among the other suffixes, as it has not the typical form, but is really the interrogative particle (cf. § 94).
ninma P what man ?
gonna P when ?
wa sa'adma ? what hour is it ?
-ma is also used suffixed to the simple personal pronouns, and definite article, meaning "which of?"
kuma P tuma P which one ? (indefinite)
irmama P which of us ? annama ? „
idinma P which of you two ?
iyama P which of them ?
These are used both subjectively and objectively.
The possessive case is,
yaleh ? kumaleh P whose ?
(/) Indefinite Pronouns.
67. la one, they, people
(similar to the French pronoun "on," in meaning and construction).
This pronoun is used in construction like any simple personal pronoun.
The following euphonic alterations take place when any simple pronoun or particle follows :
la i becomes lei la u „ lo
la ku „ lagu
la idin „ leidin
la ka „ laga
ADJECTIVES
35
68. The following are substantival and are used with the definite article suffix when necessary.
wahh-i something, anything gidi-gi |
) |
|
mid-ki one, an, a |
kulli-gi |
\ all, whole |
'id-di someone, anyone |
i daman-ti ) |
|
ghof-ki person |
hebel-ki |
a certain man |
ghar-ki some, several |
keli-gi |
alone |
daur-ki some, a few |
gdni-gi |
solitary, apart |
in-ti some, a quantity |
||
The following are treated as adjectives i |
md follow the noun |
|
qualified, but are not inflected for number or gender. |
||
badan many |
walba, waliba |
every |
yer few |
kasta |
each |
hoga little |
o dan |
all |
un any, soever |
keliah |
only |
k&leh other |
gdniah |
separate, special |
B. |
Adjectives. |
69. Adjectives follow the noun they qualify, and agree in Number and Definition.
1. Classes of Adjectives.
70. They are divided into :
a. Radical.
b. Derivative.
c. Compound.
(a) Radical Adjectives.
71. These are not numerous, and express some simple, natural, or inherent, quality, such as size, shape, colour, or nature. They are radical words and are not derived from other roots.
A complete list is given, with their inflexions, in the Table, § 76.
(b) Derivative Adjectives. (i) Verbal Adjectives.
72. Verbal Adjectives are the Passive Past Participles of verbs, ending in -an, or -san.
They express the result of the action of the verb.
3-2
36
ACCIDENCE |
||||
Examples, |
||||
'adeisan |
clean |
from |
'adei |
clean |
hagaksan |
straight |
hagaji |
straighten |
|
furan |
open |
fur |
open |
|
hedan |
closed |
hed |
close |
|
wanaksan |
good |
wanaji |
make good |
|
dameyan |
finished |
damei |
finish |
(ii) Noun Adjectives. 73. These are formed in four ways.
(1) by the suffix -leh (possessing, containing).
Examples,
garadleh sensible from garad
uskagleh dirty „ uskag
arleh speckled „ ar
blyoleh containing water ,, blyo
(2) by the suffix -la (deprived of). garadla foolish from garad indala blind „ indo degala deaf „ dego
(3) by the suffix -ah (being, made of), ghoriah wooden from ghori birah of iron „ bir farldah clever „ farld
Adjectives may be formed at will like the above from any noun as required.
(4) by the suffix -ed (expressing origin). Somalied Somali
Arabed Arab
Admed of Aden
baded of the sea from bad sea
'ano wlyiled rhinoceros milk, „ wlyil rhinoceros
sense dirt spot water
sense
eyes
ears
wood
iron
cleverness
(c) Compound Adjectives. 74. Formed from two separate words : (i) Noun and Adjective. h6g-wein strong (hdg strength, wein
hunguri-wein greedy (hunguri throat)
great)
RADICAL ADJECTIVES 37
didid-badan sweaty (didid sweat, badan plenty)
af-badan sharp (af edge)
adeig-run hardy (adeig hardness, run right)
(ii) The 3rd person singular Present Perfect Indicative of a verb, being really an adjectival Relative Clause.
nin ghora clerk, lit. a man who writes fuli yaghan knowing how to ride af yaghan interpreter, eloquent la arka visible
an la arkin invisible
2. Inflexions of Adjectives.
75. Adjectives are inflected to agree with the nouns they qualify in the following cases :
(i) in the plural number,
(ii) when the noun is defined by the article suffix -i (and in certain cases -a),
(iii) in case (ii) the inflexion is different for masc. {guttural), and fern, (dental) linking consonants (cf. § 34).
(a) Radical Adjectives.
76. The following general rules are followed : (i) Plural. Reduplicate the first syllable, (ii) | ("Article -ki, -gi, -hi. Add -a.
(iii)J [Article -ti, -di. Add -eid.
(iv) If the noun is defined with article, -a, the adjective only agrees with it in number.
Note. The rule for the inflexions -a, -eid, (ii and iii) is invariable.
But when qualifying plural nouns with the definite article (other than the Reduplicated Plurals, as niman), adjectives may or may not take the plural inflexion (cf. § 164). Thus, nagihi waweina, or nagihi weina the big women, askarrti hhunhhumeid, or askarrti hhumeid the bad soldiers.
When qualifying the Reduplicated Plurals, and all indefinite plurals, the plural inflexion of the adjective is always required. Examples, nimanki waweina nago wawein askarr hhunhhun
38
ACCIDENCE
I
5 S -a
di "!^ «3
■d.a
■rl d>
5 B
««-S -a-SS 3S2S:22
iil*&lil?l 1*1111
silo's 2 ? »».a'm'io
v< d ^
2 bo3
B J
is ii
^
o
^
^
I
I 2 d
s3§ fe2« &?"SSI
S "3 F P * h
eS -3 <° <° 5 S
1 1 p * t g
12 02
«2s
5 5 ■ i 5 P £ I If - s 5 § 5 -3 « i* •? * h
?3\*lls3F&iiafcSsa3:3?g&
+3 2
C'2
bp a to
E
2 3 2 3-9 £
d
bog 3P
'£• « i 1 3 • « « fi S3
"2 CO
5§
*3
3,3.2 " 5 2
a * d * 1 a 3
£.5
3 a>
.2p-3^o«-Ss*Sa
DERIVATIVE ADJECTIVES
39
(b) Derivative Adjectives.
77. These are not usually inflected (except some Verbal adjec- tives) when qualifying a plural noun, the inflexion entirely depending on the definite article, suffix, and linking consonant.
(i) Verbal Adjectives.
78. The Inflexions are the same as for Radical Adjectives, except that only some are reduplicated in the plural :
good
broad
stout
empty
absent
tied
clean
sing, plur.
sing, plur.
sing, plur.
sing.
plur.
sing.
plur.
sing.
plur.
sing. \
plur.)
Indefinite, orDef. Art. -ka, -ta
wanaksan
baladan
balbaladan
buran
burburan
madan
madmadan
maghan
hedan hedhedan
safeisan
Def. Art. -ki
wanaksana
baladna
balbaladna
burra
burburra
madana
Def. Art. -ti
wanaksaneid
baladneid
balbaladneid
burreid
burburreid
madaneid
madmadana madmadaneid
maghana maghaneid
hedna hedhedna
safeisana
hedneid hedhedneid
safeisaneid
(ii) Noun Adjectives. 79. These are not altered in the Plural.
Classes (i), (ii), and (iii) (adjectives in -leh, -la, -ah), obey the following rules :
1. If the qualified noun is defined by -a, or -i, the noun portion of the adjective takes its proper article suffix -a.
2. After Article -a (guttural or dental) there is no further inflexion.
3. After Article -i the terminal portion of the adjective is also inflected :
(a) After Masc. (Gutt.) Link. Cons.
-ki, -gi, -hi -a is added
(b) After Fern. (Dent.) Link. Cons.
-ti, -di -aid is added
40
ACCIDENCE
garadkaleh
akhligaleh
Indefinite
(i) garadleh sensible
akhlileh sensible
oghonleh
knowing
uskagleh dirty
baraleh
spotted
blyoleh
containing water
(ii) garadla garadkala
senseless
indala
blind
lugla
legless
haulla
unemployed
farldah
clever
Inflexions of Noun Adjectives Art. -ka, -ta Art. -ki
Art. -ti
garadkalaha garadkalahaid
(iii)
birah of iron
ghoriah wooden
akhligalaha akhligalahaid
oghdntaleh oghdntalaha oghontalahaid
uskaggaleh uskaggalaha uskaggalahaid
barahaleh barahalaha barahalahaid
blyahaleh blyahalaha blyahalahaid
garadkalaa garadkalaaid
indahala indahalaa indahalaaid
lugtala lugtalaa lugtalaaid
haushala haushalaa haushalaaid
farldkaah farldkaaha farldkaahaid
birtaah birtaaha birtaahaid
ghorigaah ghorigaaha ghorigaahaid
The following have special plural forms : 'ajisah (sing, 'ajiskaah 'ajiskaaha 'ajiskaahaid lazy \plur. 'ajisintaah 'ajisintaaha 'ajisintaahaid
gesiah (sing, gesigaah gesigaaha gesigaahaid brave \plur. gesiyintaah gesiyintaaha gesiyintaahaid
80. The last class of Noun Adjectives, in -ed, have only one inflexion.
When qualifying a noun with article suffix -i of any gender or number they take -a.
The e is usually dropped.
COMPOUND ADJECTIVES 41
Examples, Somalied Somalida Arabed Arabta
biladki Somalida the Somali country afki Arabta the Arab language
(c) Compound Adjectives.
81. It is impossible to give rules for the inflexions of these, since as far as possible the necessity is avoided, by a separation into the component parts, and the natives themselves are by no means unanimous on the question.
The following examples, however, are given, being the few types that I have satisfied myself about : af badan sharp :
mindi af badan a sharp knife ; mindida af ka badan the
sharp knife ; or, mindidi af ka badneid mindiyo afaf badbadan sharp knives mindiyaha afafka badbadan, or, mindiyihi afafka badbadna the sharp knives hog wein strong :
nin, ninka, nag, nagta, hog wein a, or the, strong man,
or woman ninki or nimanki, hog weina the strong man, or men ; nagti hog weineid the strong women ; nagihi hog weina the strong women. af yaghan eloquent :
In adjectives like this the verb is conjugated and therefore agrees in number and gender.
nin af yaghan an eloquent man nag af taghan „ woman
ninki )
ninka I a^a Yagnan the eloquent man
nagti
nagta I afka taghan ,, woman
niman af yaghanin eloquent men nago af yaghanin ,, women
nimanki i nimankal a^^a yagbanin the eloquent men
nagihi )
nagahaf afka ya£han » women
42 ACCIDENCE
This adjective may be treated as one word, and take the termination -ah, in which case it is inflected regularly like such derivative adjectives :
afyaghanah, afyaghankaah, afyaghankaaha,
af y aghank aah aid.
(3) Comparison of Adjectives.
82. There is no inflexion for the comparison of Adjectives. This want is supplied by the use of the particles ka more, more than ; u, ugu most,
Examples, akhalkan akhalkas ka wein
This house is bigger than that house mid ka wein la kali bring a bigger one ki u wanaksana The best
ya ugu horeya ? Which is first of all ?
"is most," is usually translated by ba, sa.
kas sa wanaksan that is best
sadehhdas kan ba wein of those three this is the biggest
C. Verbs.
1. Conjugation.
(a) Moods and Tenses.
83. The Verb has four moods :
Imperative, Indicative,
Infinitive, Subjunctive.
Also, Verbal Adjective, or Past Participle, and Verbal Noun.
84. There are three Regular Conjugations, distinguished by the form of the Verb root, and the formation of the Infinitive.
The Verb root is the 2nd person singular of the Imperative. 1st Conjugation. Root ends in a consonant. 2nd „ „ „ -o.
3rd „ „ „ -i.
The Infinitive is formed in 1, by adding -i to the root.
2 and 3, by adding -n to the root.
VERBS
43
85. The following is a paradigm of the verb sheg (tell), a regular verb of the 1st Conjugation.
There are four terminations for the Tense inflexions, -a is used in the Present Indicative tenses.
-e „ -o „
Imperative Verb Adjective Verb Noun Infinitive
Indicative :
Aorist Preterite
Continuative Present Continuative Past Future Definite Habitual Present Habitual Past Conditional
Potential
Subjunctive : Aorist Continuative
Future
Habitual
,, rast ,,
,, Potential tense. „ Subjunctive mood.
sheg tell thou,
shegan told.
shegnin telling,
shegi to tell
lwa shega wa shSgei wa shSgeya wa shSgeyei wa shegi d6na wa shegi jira wa shegi jirei wa sh&gi laha
an shege
I (usually) tell, I am to tell.
I told, have told, had told.
I am telling, intend to tell.
I was telling.
I am going to tell.
I am in the habit of telling.
I used to tell.
I would, or should tell,
I would have, or should
have told. I may, might tell.
(hadi)an sh£go (hadi)an shSgeyo
(If) I tell, told, had told. (If) I were to tell, were telling. (hadi)an shegi ddno (If) I were, had been,
about to tell. (hadi)an shegi jiro (If) I were, had been,
accustomed to tell.
86. The tenses fall into three classes, (i) The Aorist, Preterite, and Potential Indicative, and the Aorist Subjunctive, are simple or radical, and the terminations are added directly to the root.
1 wa is a particle used frequently with the verb, and may take the plaoe of a personal pronoun.
44 ACCIDENCE
(ii) In the Continuative tenses the terminations are, -eya (or -aya, or -ahaya), -eyei (or -ayei, or -ahayei), -eyo (or -ayo, or -ahayo). These are suffixed, in the 1st Conjugation apparently to the root, but in the 2nd and 3rd Conjugations to the Infinitive. The syllable ey is short and is not accented.
(iii) The third class consists of Auxiliary tenses, formed by the Infinitive with an auxiliary verb.
87. In the 2nd Conjugation (verbs ending in -o), the -o is often changed to -a in the Infinitive and other moods.
In the Simple tenses of this Conjugation, d is inserted between the root and tense termination.
Examples, baro learn Infinitive baran
jdgso stop wan jbgsoda I stop
88. There are three persons in the Singular and Plural, and two genders in the 3rd person singular.
The following are the variations in the four tense terminations for the different persons.
Sing. 1. 2. |
Present Indicative -a f-ta l-sa |
Past Indicative -ei r-tei l-sei |
Potential Indicative -e r-te, -tide 1-se, -side |
Subjunctive -O r-to, -tid 1-so, -sid |
3 m. |
-a |
-ei |
-e |
-o |
3f. |
r-ta l-sa |
r-tei l-sei |
r-te 1-se |
r-to 1-so |
Plur. 1. |
-na |
-nei |
-ne |
-no |
2. |
r-tan 1-san |
r-ten 1-sen |
r-tene 1-sene |
r-tan 1-san |
3. |
-an |
-en |
-ene |
-an |
In the 2nd person singular and plural, and 3rd person fem. singular, t is used after a consonant,
s is used after i, e.g. in the 3rd Conjugation, and in Continuative tenses of all Conjugations.
89. (b) Affirmative Conjugation.
I. sheg tell. II. gurso marry. III. samei make.
Infinitive. shegi gursan samein.
AFFIRMATIVE CONJUGATION
45
Imperative. |
||||
Let me tell |
Let me many |
Let me make |
||
Sing. |
1. |
an shego |
an gursado |
an sameyo |
2. |
sheg |
gurso |
samei |
|
3 m. |
ha shego |
ha gursado |
ha sameyo |
|
3f. |
ha shegto |
ha gursato |
ha sameiso |
|
Plur. |
1. |
an shegno |
an gursano |
an sameino |
2. |
shega |
gursada |
sameya |
|
3. |
ha shegan |
ha gursadan Indicative. Aorist. |
ha sameyan |
|
I tell |
I marry |
I make |
||
Sing. |
1. |
shega |
gursada |
sameya |
2. |
shegta |
gursata |
sameisa |
|
3 m. |
shega |
gursada |
sameya |
|
3f. |
shegta |
gursata |
samdisa |
|
Plur. |
1. |
shegna |
gursana |
sameina |
2. |
shegtan |
gursatan |
sameisan |
|
3. |
shegan |
gursadan Preterite. |
samdyan |
|
I told |
I married |
I made |
||
Sing. |
1. |
shegei |
gursadei |
sameyei |
2. |
shegtei |
gursatei |
sameisei |
|
3 m. |
shegei |
gursadei |
sameyei |
|
3f. |
shegtei |
gursatei |
sameisei |
|
Plur. |
1. |
shegnei |
gursanei |
sameinei |
2. |
shegten |
gursaten |
sameisen |
|
3. |
shSgen |
gursaden |
sameyen |
|
Confirmative Present. |
||||
I am telling |
I am marrying |
I am making |
||
Sing. |
1. |
shSgeya |
gursaneya |
samdineya |
2. |
shegesa |
gursanesa |
sameinesa |
|
3 m. |
shdgeya |
gursaneya |
sameineya |
|
3f. |
shegesa |
gursanesa |
sameinesa |
|
Plur. |
1. |
shegena |
gursanena |
sameinena |
2. |
shegesan |
gursanesan |
sameinesan |
|
3. |
shegeyan |
gursaneyan |
samdineyan |
46
ACCIDENCE
Sing. 1.
2.
3 m.
3f. Plur. 1.
2.
3.
Sing. 1. 2.
Plur.
3 m.
3f.
1.
2.
3.
Confirmative Past
I
was telling I was marrying I was making hegeyei gursaneyei sameineyei
shegeyei
shegesei
shdgeyei
shegesei
shegenei
shegesen
shSgeyen
I am going to tell
shegi d6na
donta
d6na
dbnta
donna
ddntan
ddnan
gursaneyei
gursanesei
gursaneyei
gtirsanesei
gilrsanenei
gursanesen
gtirsaneyen
Future Definite.
I am going to marry
gursan dona ,, ddnta etc.
sameinesei
sameineyei
sameinesei
samdinenei
sameinesen
sameineyen
I am going to make
samein dona „ donta etc.
Habitual Present.
I am accustomed I am accustomed
to tell to marry
shegi jira gursan jira
declined like " ddna " above.
I am accustomed
to make
samein jira
Sing. 1. 2.
Plur.
3 m.
3f.
1.
2.
3.
Habitual Past. I used to tell I used to marry
shegi jirei shegi jirtei shegi jirei shegi jirtei shegi jirnei shegi jirten shegi jiren
gursan jirei
etc.
I used to make samein jirei etc.
AFFIRMATIVE CONJUGATION
47
Conditional. |
|||
I should tell |
I should marry |
I should make |
|
Sing. 1. |
shegi laha |
gursan laha |
samein laha |
2. |
shegi lahaid |
etc. |
etc. |
3 m. |
shegi laha |
||
3f. |
shegi lahaid |
||
Plur. 1. |
shegi lahain |
||
2. |
shegi lahaiden |
||
3. |
sh£gi lahaiyen |
||
Potential. |
|||
I may tell |
I may marry |
I may make |
|
Sing. 1. |
an shege |
an gursade |
an sameye |
2. |
ad shegtide |
ad gursatide |
ad sameiside |
3 m. |
ha shege |
ha gursade |
ha sameye |
3f. |
ha shegte |
ha gursate |
ha sameise |
Plur. 1. |
an shegne |
an gursane |
an sameine |
2. |
ad shegtene |
ad gursatene |
ad sameisene |
3. |
ha shegene |
ha gursadene Subjunctive. |
ha sameyene |
(Only found |
in Subordinate Clauses.) |
||
Aorist. |
|||
Sing. 1. |
shego |
gursado |
samdyo |
2. |
shegto, shegtid gursato, |
sameiso, |
|
gursatid |
sameisid |
||
3 m. |
shego |
gursado |
sameyo |
3f. |
shegto |
gdrsato |
sameiso |
Plur. 1. |
shegno |
gursano |
sameino |
2. |
shegtan |
gursatan |
sameisan |
3. |
shegan |
gursadan Continuative. |
samdyan |
Sing. 1. |
shegeyo |
gursaneyo |
samdineyo |
2. |
shSgeso, shegesid gursaneso, -id |
sameineso, -id |
|
3 m. |
shegeyo |
gursaneyo |
sameineyo |
3f. |
shegeso |
gursaneso |
samdineso |
Plur. 1. |
shegeno |
gursaneno |
sameineno |
2. |
shegesan |
gursanesan |
sameinesan |
3. |
shegeyan |
gursaneyan |
sameineyan |
48
ACCIDENCE
Sing. 1. shdgi ddno 2. shSgi ddnto etc. as " shSgo."
shegl jiro
etc.
Future.
gursan dbno
etc.
Habitual.
gursan jiro
etc.
samein d6no
etc.
samSin jiro
etc.
90. The following table gives all the types necessary for the formation of the tenses of a regular verb :
Conjugation |
Eoot |
Engl. |
Inf. |
Aorist |
Continuative Pres. |
I |
hel |
get |
heli |
hela |
heleya |
II |
so'o |
walk |
so'on |
so'oda |
so'6neya |
III |
si |
give |
sin |
slya |
sineya |
The other Indicative, and the Subjunctive, tenses are formed by changing final -a into -ei, -e, or -o.
91. (c) Negative Conjugation.
The Negative Particles are :
Imperative Mood, ha, or yan. Indicative Mood, ma. Subjunctive Mood, an.
Imperative* ha shdgin ha gursan ha samSin
Indicative : |
|||
Aorist* |
ma shego |
ma gursado |
ma samSyo |
Preterite |
maan shegin |
maan gursan |
maan samSin |
Contin. Pres.* |
shSgi mayo |
gursan mayo |
samein mayo |
Contin. Past |
ma shdginin |
ma gursaninin |
ma samdininin |
Fut. Def.* |
ma shdgi |
ma gursan |
ma samSin |
ddno |
ddno |
dono |
|
Habit. Pres.* |
ma shegi |
ma gursan |
ma samein |
jiro |
jiro |
jiro |
|
Habit. Past |
ma shegi |
ma gursan |
ma samdin |
jirin |
jirin |
jirin |
|
Conditional*! Potential J |
maan shdgen |
maan gur- |
maan samd- |
saden |
yen |
NEGATIVE CONJUGATION
49
Subjunctive |
|||
Aorist |
-anan shegin |
-anan gursan |
-anan samein |
Continuative |
-anan shdg- |
-anan gursan- |
-anan samein- |
inin |
inin |
inin |
|
Future |
-anan shegi |
-anan gursan |
-anan samein |
d6nin |
ddnin |
ddnin |
|
Habitual |
-anan shegi |
-anan gursan |
-anan samein |
jirin |
jirin |
jirin |
Notes,
(i) Only the tenses marked * are conjugated, the remainder having one form of the verb for all persons.
(ii) The Personal Pronouns are only used with the following negative tenses :
Imperative, Preterite and Conditional tenses of the Indicative Mood, and the Subjunctive tenses.
In other tenses of the Negative Conjugation no pronouns are used.
(iii) In the Present Continuative tense, mayo (am not) is con- jugated like an auxiliary verb.
(iv) In the Subjunctive tenses, the negative particle, -an, and the pronouns are added as suffixes to the conjunction, or conjunctive particle.
Imperative.
Let me not tell |
Let me not marry |
Let me not make |
||
Sing. |
1. |
yanan shegin |
yanan gursan |
yanan samein |
2. |
ha shegin |
ha gursan |
ha samein |
|
3 m. |
yanu (or yu) |
yanu (or yu) |
yanu (or yu) |
|
shdgin |
gursan |
samein |
||
3f. |
yanei (or yai) |
yanei (or yai) |
yanei (or yai) |
|
shegin |
gursan |
samein |
||
Plur. |
1. |
yanan shegin |
yanan gursan |
yanan samein |
2. |
ha shdgina |
ha gursanina |
ha sameinina |
|
3. |
yanei (or yai) |
yanei (or yai) |
yanei (of yai) |
|
shegin |
gursan |
samein |
z.
50
ACCIDENCE
Indicative.
Aorist.
{Conjugated like Aorist Subj. Affirmative.)
I do not tell |
I do not marry |
I do not make |
||
Sing. |
1. |
ma shego |
ma gursado |
ma sameyo |
2. |
ma shegto |
ma gursato |
ma sameiso |
|
3 m. |
ma shego |
ma gursado |
ma sameyo |
|
3f. |
ma shegto |
ma gursato |
ma sameiso |
|
Plur. |
1. |
ma shegno |
ma gursano |
ma sameino |
2. |
ma shegtan |
ma gursatan |
ma sameisan |
|
3. |
ma shegan |
ma gursadan |
ma sameyan |
|
Continuative Present. |
||||
I am not telling |
lam not marrying |
I am not making |
||
Sing. |
1. 2. |
shegi mayo shegi mayso (or |
gursan mayo |
samein mayo |
maysid) |
etc. |
etc. |
||
3 m. |
shegi mayo |
|||
3f. |
shegi mayso |
|||
Plur. |
1. 2. 3. |
shegi mayno shegi maysan shegi mayan |
• |
Future Definite.
(The Auxiliary verb is declined as the Negative Aorist tense of 1st Conjugation.)
I am not going to I am not going to marry ma gursan ddno
tell |
|
Sing. 1. |
ma shegi ddno |
2. |
ma shegi dbnto |
(ddntid) |
|
3 m. |
ma shegi ddno |
3f. |
ma shegi d6nto |
Plur. 1. |
ma shegi dbnno |
2. |
ma shegi ddn- |
tan |
|
3. |
ma shegi ddnan |
I am not going to make
etc.
ma samein ddno
etc.
THE CONTINUATIVE TENSES
51
Habitual Present.
I am not accus- |
I am not accus- |
I am not accus- |
||
tomed to tell |
tomed to marry |
tomed to make |
||
Sing. |
1. |
ma shegi jiro |
ma gursan jiro |
ma samein jiro |
2. |
ma shegi jirto |
ma gursan jirto |
ma samein jirto |
|
(jirtid) |
(jirtid) |
(jirtid) |
||
etc. |
etc. |
etc. |
||
Conditional. |
||||
I should not tell |
I should not marry |
I should not make |
||
Sing. |
1. |
maan shegen |
maan gursaden |
maan sameyen |
2. |
maad shegten |
maad gursaten |
maad sameisen |
|
3 m. |
mau shegen |
mau gursaden |
mau sameyen |
|
3f. |
maai shegten |
maai gursaten |
maai sameisen |
|
Plur. |
1. |
maainu sheg- |
maainu gursa- |
maainu samei- |
nen |
nen |
nen |
||
2. |
maaidin sheg- |
maaidin gursa- |
maaidin samei- |
|
ten |
ten |
sen |
||
3. |
maai shegen |
maai gursaden |
maai sameyen |
92. The Derivation of the Continuative tenses. In § 86, three alternative types were given for the Continuative tense terminations,
-eya, -aya, -ahaya.
These are added to the Infinitive of the verb, but in the 1st Con- jugation the final -i of the Infinitive is lost.
-ahaya is the form used among Dolbohanta : wa tegahaya I am going wa so'onahaya I am walking wa slnahaya I am giving
-aya is the form used by the tribes of the North Coast and Western Somaliland:
wa tegaya, wa so'onaya, wa sinaya.
-eya, which is pronounced quite short, and nearly like -ya, is used by the Central tribes, such as Habr Yunis and Western Habr Toljala :
wa tegeya, wa so'dneya, wa sineya.
The last two are contracted forms of the first, which is really a compound tense, in which the auxiliary verb, ahai be (modern aho,
4—2
52 ACCIDENCE
q.v.) is used, with the Infinitive of the principal verb, as in the case of compound tenses.
In the Negative tenses this is more clearly seen, and here the 1st Conjugation retains the -i of the Infinitive.
The negative tenses of ahai are used as a separate word with the particles ma, or an :
shSgi mahayo, or shdgi mayo I am not telling (for ma-ahayo)
In the past tenses the ma may be separated :
yeli mahain (for ma-ahain)] I was not doing, or, ma yeli aham J or, I would not do
These are contracted by Ishhak tribes into yeli main, or ma yelinin
The Subjunctive Mood is similarly formed : hadanu yeli ahain) or, hadanu yelinin J ^ he will not do.
93. (d) Interrogative Conjugation.
The Interrogative particle is ma, which, when combined with Personal Pronouns, becomes mi.
The Conjugation is otherwise the same as the Affirmative.
Indicative :
Aorist mian shSga P mian gursada P mian sameya P
Preterite mian shSgei P etc. etc.
Contin. Pres. mian shSgeya P
„ Past mian shdgeyei P
Future Def. mian sh§gi ddna P
Habit. Pres. mian shegi jira P
„ Past mian shegi jirei P
Conditional mian shSgi laha P
(e) Negative- Interrogative Conjugation.
94. Here the negative particle used is an.
No tense is declined except the Conditional, which is the same as in the simple Negative form.
FIRST CONJUGATION
53
Indicative
Aorist Preterite Contin. Pres. Contin. Past Fut. Def.
Habit. Pres. „ Past
mianan shSgin ?\ mianan shegin ?J mianan shdginin ?\ mianan sheginin ?J mianan shegi dbnin P
mianan shegi jirin P I mianan shegi jirin ? I
mianan mianan gursan ? sameln ? mianan mianan
gursaninin ? samdininin P
Conditional mianan shegen ?
mianan gursan ddnin ?
mianan gursan jirin ?
mianan
mianan samSin ddnin ?
mianan sam£in jirin P
mianan
gursaden? sameyen?
2. Peculiarities and Irregular Verbs of the Three Conjugations.
(a) 1st Conjugation.
95. These verbs have the root ending in any consonant, aspirate, guttural aspirate (gh or kh), or "aim" or 6.
The following changes take place in certain letters when they occur together :
1 followed by t become sh.
n, after 1 or r, is often assimilated to either of the latter.
t, after ', gh, kh, hh, 6, and i, becomes d.
Examples,
dil kill.
hel get, yel do, dagal fight Aorist.
Sing. 1.
„ 2. Plur. 1.
„ 2.
dir
dirir
jir
dila disha dilla dishan
hela hesha hella heshan
yela yesha yella yeshan
dagala dagasha dagalla dagashan
send... 1st Plur. Aorist
fight...
be ...
dirra, or dirna dirirra, or dirirna jirra, or jirna.
54
ACCIDENCE |
||||
ra' |
accompany. |
..2nd |
sing. Aorist |
wad ra'da |
da' |
fall |
j» >> |
„ da' da |
|
dagh |
graze |
>j >> |
„ dagh da |
|
bagh |
fear |
.. |
j> »> |
„ bagh da |
bahh |
go |
>> >> |
„ bahhda |
|
jehh |
tear |
>> >> |
„ jehhda |
|
ild |
forget |
j» >> |
„ iloda |
|
fadl |
sit (cf. § 10 |
5) |
>> >> |
„ fadida |
Verbs ending in n, change n to m when it is preceded by two short syllables and the inflexions begin with a vowel.
warran give the news dagalan fight
Infin. warrami dagalami
Aorist. Aorist.
Sing. 1. wan warrama wan dagalama
,, 2. wad warranta wad dagalanta
96. In the case of Polysyllabic verbs, of which the last syllable is short and contains the vowels a, o, u, these vowels are dropped in the Continuative Tenses, and in those persons of all Simple Tenses in which the inflexion does not begin with a consonant, i.e. in 1st and 3rd masc. sing, and 3rd plur.
g becomes k before a vowel or t.
Examples, |
||||
Boot |
Infin. |
Aorist |
Contin. Pros. |
|
arag |
see |
arki |
arka |
arkeya |
dulun |
cheat |
dulmi |
dulma |
dulmeya |
durug |
move |
durki |
durka |
durkeya |
gdgol |
make the bed |
gfcgli |
g6gla |
gbgleya |
hadal |
talk |
hadli |
hadla |
hadleya |
hurud |
sleep |
hurdi |
hurda |
hurdeya |
khatalan |
err |
khatalmi |
khatalma |
khatalmeya |
ghosol |
laugh |
ghosli |
ghosla |
ghosleya |
jSdal |
whip |
j&dli |
jddla |
jedleya |
makhal |
hear |
makhli |
makhla |
makhleya |
orod |
run |
ordi |
orda |
ordeya |
rehan |
pledge (pawn) |
rehmi |
rehma |
rehmeya |
Examples of Conjugations of the above, arag see hadal talk dulun cheat makhal hear
FIRST CONJUGATION
55
Aorist Indicative. Sing. 1. arka hadla dulma makhla
„ 2. arakta hadasha dulunta makhasha
Plur. 1. aragna hadalla dulunna makhalla 2. araktan hadashan duluntan makhashan
Present Continuative Indicative. Sing. 1. arkeya hadleya dulmeya makhleya
„ 2. arkesa hadlesa diilmesa 'makhalesa
Plur. 1. arkena hadlena diilmena makhalena ,, 2. arkesan hadlesan dulmesan makhalesan
97. The following verbs (all containing the vowel a) change a into e or i in the Infinitive and the Continuative Tenses :
Root. Infin.
tag go tegi
gal enter geli
ka' get up ke'i
da' fall, or rob di'i
na' hate ni'i
2gama' sleep gam'i
bahh go bihhi
dahh travel dihhi
nahh be astounded nihhi
tahh put in line tihhi
Exc. nahh be fat nahhi
dagh save dighi
daba' imprint dabi'i The following make Infinitives like the 3rd Conjugation :
da leave dein daya deineya
la slay lein laya leineya
98. Verbs ending in 6, require b after the root in all inflexions, except those beginning with a consonant.
d is used for t in the inflexions. Infin. 'ato be tired 'atobi
gabo be old gabobi
ghabo be cold ghabobi
hallo be lost hallabi
1 makhal retains the a in these persons.
2 Participle gama'san asleep.
8 The forms of the Contin. tenses of these verbs must be noticed. Cf . § 92.
Aorist Indie. |
Contin. PreB. Indie |
taga |
t6geya |
gala |
g61eya |
ka'a |
k6'eya |
da'a |
dl'eya |
na'a |
ni'eya |
gama'a |
gam'eya |
bahha |
3bahhaya |
dahha |
3dahhaya |
nahha |
nihheya |
tahha |
tihheya |
nahha |
nahheya |
dagha |
digheya |
daba'a |
dabi'eya |
Aorist. |
Continuative. |
'atoba |
'atobeya |
gaboba |
gabobeya |
ghaboba |
ghabobeya |
hallaba |
hallabeya |
56 |
ACCIDENCE |
||
Infin. Aorist |
Continuative |
||
haso |
converse |
J hasobi hasoba 1, hasawi hasawa |
hasobeya |
hasaweya |
|||
ilo |
forget |
ilobi iloba |
ilobeya |
karo |
defend |
karebi kareba |
kar^beya |
'olio |
be hostile |
'ollobi 'olloba |
'ollobeya |
hambarc |
> fall heavily |
hamba- hamba- |
hambaro- |
robi roba |
beya |
||
mado |
be black |
madobi madoba |
madobeya |
weido |
be lean |
weidobi weidoba |
weidobeya |
malo |
get possession malobi maloba |
malobeya |
|
of |
Aorist Indie. |
||
Sing. 1. |
wan ildba I forgel |
||
2. |
wad ildda |
||
Plur. 1. |
weinu ilona |
||
2. |
weidin ilodan |
||
99. |
tag (go), is irregular in the Preterite Indicative. |
||
Sing. 1. |
wan tegei I went |
||
2. |
wad taktei |
# |
|
3 m. wu tegei |
|||
3f |
wei taktei |
||
Plur. 1. |
weinu tagnei |
||
2. |
weidin takten |
||
3. |
wei tegen |
||
da' (fall, rob) forms either |
|||
de'ei, or da'ei, in the Preterite. |
|||
Its Aorist Subjunctive is |
|||
inan d'o. |
|||
Verbs |
in -ahh conjugate the Preterite as follows. |
||
Example, |
|||
bahh go |
|||
Sing. 1. |
wan bahhai I went |
||
2. |
wad bahhdei |
||
3 m. |
wu bahhai |
||
3f. |
wei bahhdei |
||
Plur. 1. |
weinu bahhnei |
||
2. |
weidin bahhden |
||
3. |
wei behh6n |
OLL
57
100. The verb oil (lie, be in, dwell), is irregular in the Present and Past Perfect Indicative.
Imperative oil dwell
Infinitive olli
Indicative : Aorist Preterite Contin. Pres. „ Past Fut. Def. Habit. Pres. „ Past Conditional
Subjunctive : Aorist Continuative
al I dwell (Neg. ma al)
il I dwelt (Neg. ma ollin)
611eya I am dwelling, I intend to dwell
dlleyei I was dwelling
olli ddna I am going to dwell
olli jira I am accustomed to dwell
olli jirei I used to dwell
611i lalaa I would dwell, or would have dwelt
inan olio that I may dwell
inan 611eyo that I may dwell
Aorist Indie. Preterite Indie.
Sing. 1. al il
2. tal til
3 m. yal yil
3 f. tal til
Plur. 1. nal nil
2. talin tillen
3. yalin yillen
Note that the consonants denoting the persons are prefixed to the verb, and that there are no personal endings in these tenses (except in 2nd and 3rd plur.).
The Negative form of the Present is the same as the Affirmative. ma al I do not dwell ma tal
etc. etc.
(b) 2nd Conjugation.
101. In this Conjugation the root ends in o, and the Infinitive is formed by adding n, but in a great many cases the o is changed to a.
This change may also take place in both Simple and Con- tinuative tenses.
58
ACCIDENCE
In the Simple tenses d is added to the root, before adding the tense terminations, but in the 2nd pers. and 3rd pers. fern. sing, the d is lost, being assimilated into the t of the termination, and in the 1st pers. plur. the d is dropped before the n.
Table I.
102. The o in the Simple tenses is long, or at least as accentuated as the preceding syllable.
The consonant before the o is, h, sh, k, g, j, or ', or y.
Infin. |
Aorist |
Continuative |
||
amahho |
borrow |
amahhdn |
amahhdda |
amahh6neya |
ashtako |
complain |
asktakdn |
ashtakdda |
ashtakdneya |
gajo |
be hungry |
gajdn |
gajoda |
gaj6neya |
gasho |
put on |
gashdn |
gashoda |
gashdneya |
harrago |
swagger |
harragbn |
harragdda |
harrog6neya |
riyo |
dream |
riybn |
riyo da |
riydneya |
so'o |
walk |
so'on |
so'oda |
so'6neya |
tasho |
consider |
tashdn |
tashoda |
tash6neya |
tuko |
pray |
tukdn |
tukoda |
tuk6neya |
Table II
103. These are Attributive Verbs formed by adding o to an adjective.
In conjugation o is changed to a, which is long in the Simple tenses.
Infin. |
Aori8t |
Continuative |
||
ado |
grow angry |
adan |
adada |
adaneya |
bislo |
become ripe |
bislan |
bislada |
bislarieya |
damo |
be completed |
daman |
damada |
damaneya |
dowo |
approach |
dowan |
dowada |
dowaneya |
fogo |
go far |
fogan |
fogada |
foganeya |
hhumo |
become bad |
hhuman |
hhumada |
hhumaneya |
idlo |
come to an end idlan |
idlada |
idlaneya |
|
mergo |
be entangled |
mergan |
mergada |
merganeya |
shishlo |
grow fat |
shishlan |
shishlada |
shishlaneya |
weino |
grow big |
weinan |
weinada |
weinaneya |
SECOND CONJUGATION
59
Table III.
104. Verbs ending in so, which is preceded by a consonant, or in hho, have the vowel of the Simple tenses short, but it may or may not be changed to a.
Infin. |
Aorist |
Continuative |
|
badso |
badson |
badsoda |
bads6neya |
be plentiful |
|||
bahhso |
bahhson |
bahhsoda |
bahhsdneya |
escape |
|||
buhso |
buhsan |
biihsada |
buhsameya |
be full |
|||
bukso |
buksan |
biiksada |
buksaneya |
be cured |
|||
dafso |
dafson |
dafsoda |
dafsoneya |
exchange |
|||
'ehho |
'ehhon |
'6hhoda |
'ehh6neya |
be partial |
|||
g&rso |
giirsan |
gursada |
gtirsaneya |
marry |
|||
hubso |
hubson |
hiibsoda |
hubs6neya |
ascertain |
|||
ghaibso |
ghaibson |
ghaibsoda |
ghaibs6neya |
take your share |
|||
ghallohho |
ghallohhon |
ghallohhoda |
ghallohh6neya |
be bent |
|||
ghobso |
ghobson |
ghobsoda |
ghobs6neya |
seize |
|||
Ibso |
Ibson |
Ibsoda |
lbs6neya |
buy for yourself |
|||
j6gso |
jbgson |
jogsoda |
j6gs6neya |
shop |
|||
sehho |
sehhan |
sehhada |
sehhaneya |
sleep |
|||
tirso |
tirson |
tirsoda |
tirs6neya |
count for yourself |
In the verbs of this class the Aorist and Preterite tenses are found very frequently in a contracted form, in the 1st and 3rd masc. sing, and 3rd plural, the terminations being -sha, -shan, or -sa, -san, etc.
60
ACCIDENCE
Example,
Sing. 1. 2.
3 m. 3f.
Ibso buy
A wist Indicative.
wa Ibsha ,, Ibsota „ Ibsha ., Ibsota
I buy
Plur. 1. 2. 3.
wa Ibsona ,, Ibsotan ., Ibshan
Aorist. Preterite.
Similarly, badso makes badsha, badshei
,, ghaibso „ ghaibsha, ghaibshei
„ bahhso „ bahhsa, bahhsei
„ gtirso „ gursa, gCirsei
„ bukso „ buksa, buksei
Table IV.
105. In the following verbs o is preceded by, b, d, d, f, gh, kh, 1, n, r, s. These drop the o in the Simple tenses, except in 2nd pers. and 3rd fem. sing, and 1st plur., in which the vowel usually appears as short a in 2nd and 3rd fern., and as o in 1st plur.
In all persons the d of the Simple tenses becomes t, except after gh, kh.
It, as usual, becomes sh.
Example, haiso have got
Aorist Indicative. wa ha'ista I have got wa haisona
,, haisata |
jj |
haisatan |
|
„ ha'ista |
»» |
haistan |
|
„ haisata |
|||
Infin. |
Aorist |
Continuative |
|
bagho |
baghan |
baghda |
baghaneya |
be afraid |
|||
baro |
baran |
barta |
baran6ya |
learn |
|||
dalo |
dalan |
dasha |
(dal6neya) |
be born |
|||
damlno |
daminon |
daminta |
(damln6neya) |
be surety |
|||
degeiso |
degeison |
degeista |
degeisdneya |
listen |
|||
difo |
difon |
difta |
difdneya |
strike |
SECOND CONJUGATION
61
In fin. |
Aorist |
Continuative |
|
dimo die |
diman |
dinta |
dimaneya |
diso dison build for yourself |
dista |
disdneya |
|
d6no look for |
ddnon |
d6nta |
ddndneya |
doro choose |
doron |
dorta |
dordneya |
dumo hide yourself |
duman |
dunta |
dumaneya |
dabbalo |
dabbalan |
dabbasha |
dabbalaneya |
swim |
|||
fadiso sit down |
fadlson |
fadlsta |
fadis6neya |
farahhalo farahhalan wash your hands |
farahhasha |
farahhalaneya |
|
garo understand |
gar an |
garta |
garan6ya |
haiso have got |
haison |
haista |
hais6neya |
hedo tie on yourself |
hedon |
hedta |
hed6neya |
hiro shave yourself |
hiron |
hirta |
hir6neya |
ghado ghadon take for yourself |
ghata |
ghad6neya |
|
ghobo catch |
ghobon |
ghobta |
ghob6neya |
j&so turn yourself |
j&son |
jesta |
j6s6neya |
jldo hurry on |
jldan |
jlta |
jldaneya |
maido be washed |
maidon |
maidta |
maid6neya |
naso take a rest |
nason |
nasta |
nas6neya |
nokho |
nokhon |
nokhda |
nokhoneya |
return |
|||
sameiso sameison make for yourself |
sameista |
sameisoneya |
12 |
ACCIDENCE |
||
Infin |
Aorist |
Continuative |
|
sido |
sidon |
sita |
sid6neya |
carry, wear |
|||
slso |
slson |
slsta |
sls6neya |
pay for |
|||
weidlso |
weidlson |
weidlsta |
weidls6neya |
ask for |
|||
lukho |
lukhon |
lukhda |
lukh6neya |
gulp |
The Irregular Verbs, imo, odo, ogho.
106. These verbs are declined irregularly in the Simple tenses, with the same peculiarity as the verb oil.
Note. The root from which the Simple tenses of olio are formed is related to the regular verb yefl call, and also a verb yafl, found in songs :
Examples, dabyera tehhdo yada ba.
"The little song I sing is like a shower of rain."
Yan sidi danabka yedei. "I spoke like the lightning."
Imperative |
imo come |
(odo)1 say |
ogho know |
|
Infinitive |
iman |
odan |
oghdn |
|
Adject. |
— |
— |
— |
|
Noun |
imad-ki |
— |
oghdn-ti |
|
Indie. Aorist |
imada |
idahhda or |
idahha |
aghan |
Preterite |
imi |
idi, or idahhei |
ighin |
|
Contin. Pres. |
imaneya |
odaneya |
oghaneya |
|
„ Past |
imaneyei |
odaneyei |
oghaneyei |
|
Fut. Def. |
iman dbna |
odan ddna |
oghdn dbna |
|
Habit. Pres. |
iman jira |
odan jira |
oghdn jira |
|
„ Past |
iman jirei |
odan jirei |
ogh6n jirei |
|
Conditional |
iman laha |
odan laha |
oghdn laha |
|
Potential |
imade |
idahhde or |
idahhe |
oghade |
Subjunctive : Aorist imado idahhdo oghado
Continuative imaneyo odaneyo oghaneyo
1 Instead of the Imperative oflo, the word den is used.
THIRD CONJUGATION
63
Aorist Indicative. |
|||
Sing. 1. |
imada |
idahhda, or idahha |
aghan |
2. |
timada |
tidahhda, or tidahha |
taghan |
3 m. |
yimada |
yidahhda, or yidahha |
yaghan |
3f. |
timada |
tidahhda, or tidahha |
taghan |
Plur. 1. |
nimadna |
nidahhna, or nidahha |
naghan |
2. |
timadan |
tidahhdan, or tidahhan |
taganin |
3. |
yimadan |
yidahhdan, or yidahhan |
yaghanin |
Preterite Indicative. |
|||
Sing. 1. |
imi, or imid |
idi, or idahhei |
ighin |
2. |
timi, or timid |
tidi, or tidahhdei |
tighin |
3 m. |
yimi, or ylmid |
yidi, or yidahhei |
yighin |
3f. |
timi, or timid |
tidi, or tidahhdei |
tighin |
Plur. 1. |
nimi, or nimid |
nidi, or nidahhnei |
nighin |
2. |
timaden |
tidahhden |
tighinen |
3. |
yimaden |
yidahhden, or yidahhen |
yighinen |
The Aorist Subjunctive of imo, and odo, is declined like the Indicative, with the Subjunctive terminations, o and an. inan imado hadan idahhdo
inad timado, etc. hadad tidahhdo, etc. The Aorist Subj. of ogho is regular : oghado, oghato, etc. The Negatives of the Aorist Indie, and Conditional are regularly formed, in the former by using the Aorist Subj., and in the latter by replacing the Aorist terminations by en ; but in the verb ogho the Pres. Indicative is unaltered.
I do not come ma imado I would not maan imaden I do not know ma aghan have come All other Negative forms are regular.
(c) 3rd Conjugation.
107. These verbs all end in -i or -ei, and form the Infinitive by adding -n. In the Simple tenses i becomes y for euphony before the tense terminations which do not begin with a consonant.
108. Certain Participles are irregular : ingeji dry Part. ingegan
wan&ji make good hagaji make straight ghoi make wet
dried, wanaksan good hagaksan straight. ghoiyan wetted
64
ACCIDENCE
109. Certain verbs in i are conjugated like the first Conjuga- tion, adding -yi in the Infinitive. These take -d instead of -t in the 2nd and 3rd fern, persons.
Root |
Infiri. 1st |
pers. sing. |
2nd pers. sing. Indie. |
||
<affi |
pardon |
'afflyi |
'afflya |
'affida |
'aflfiyeya |
ahdi |
swear |
ahdlyi |
ahdiya |
ahdida |
ahdlyeya |
akhri |
read |
akhrlyi |
akhriya |
akhrida |
akhriyeya |
<ai |
curse |
'aiyi |
'a'iya |
'a'ida |
'aiyeya |
'ari |
ebb |
'arlyi |
'ariya |
'arida |
'ariyeya |
awawi |
. dream |
awawlyi |
awawiya |
awawida |
awawlyeya |
bakhti die |
bakhtlyi |
bakhtiya |
bakhtida bakhtlyeya |
||
bari |
beseech |
barlyi |
bariya |
barida |
barlyeya |
bari |
be safe, well |
barlyi |
bariya |
barida |
barlyeya |
dai |
look |
dalyi |
daiya |
daida |
dalyeya |
'ei |
cry |
'elyi |
'eiya |
'eida |
'elyeya |
'eri |
drive away |
'erlyi |
'eriya |
'erida |
'erlyeya |
fadl |
sit, dwell |
fadlyi |
fadlya |
fadfda |
fadlyeya |
fori |
whistle |
fdrlyi |
foriya |
fdrida |
fdrlyeya |
gabei |
sing |
gabeyi |
gabeya |
gabeda |
gabeyeya |
haji |
make a pil- grimage |
hajlyi |
hajiya |
hajida |
hajlyeya |
oi |
cry |
oiyi |
oiya. |
oida |
oiyeya |
silei' |
be tortured |
silSi'yi |
silSi'a |
sil&'da |
sildi'yeya |
(d) The Irregular Verbs alio, laho, wah.
110. aho (be), is an Irregular Defective Verb of doubtful conjugation. It has the same peculiarity in the Present Indicative as the other Irregular Verbs, inasmuch as it places the Personal con- sonants t, n, at the beginning of the word.
Imperative Infin.
Indicative : Present Past Future
Affirmative Tenses.
aho be
ahain
wan ahai I am
wan aha I was
wan ahain ddna I am going to be
AHO
65
Habit. Pres. ,, Past Conditional Potential Subjunctive
wan ahain jira wan ahain jirei wan ahain laha an ahade inan ahado
I usually am I used to be I should be I may be that I may be
111. It is only irregular in the Infinitive and Indicative. There are no Continuative tenses.
Past.
I am wan aha I was
wad ahaid wu aha wei ahaid weinu ahain weidin ahaiden wei ahayen
112. When aho is conjugated negatively, it is only irregular in the Present Indicative.
Present |
||
Sing. |
1. |
wan ahai |
2. |
wad tahai |
|
3 m. |
wu yahai |
|
3f. |
wei tahai |
|
Plur. |
1. |
weinu nahai |
2. |
weidin tihin |
|
3. |
wei yihin |
Neg. Pres. |
Indie. |
Neg. Past. Indie. |
||
Sing. |
1. |
miihi I |
am not |
maan ahain I was not |
2. |
miihid |
etc. |
||
3 m. |
maaha |
Neg. Conditional |
||
3f. |
maaha |
maan ahaden I should not be |
||
Plur. |
1. |
miihin |
maad ahaten |
|
2. |
maihidin |
etc. |
||
3. |
maaha |
Neg. Subjunctive inanan ahain that I may not be etc. |
113. This verb is used independently as in :
na's bad tahai you are a fool
nin 'ajis bu aha he was a lazy man
askari ban ahain jirei I used to be a soldier
But it most frequently occurs combined with adjectives, especially participles.
Such adjectives are pluralised in the Plural persons.
hedan tied wein large
k. 5
66 ACCIDENCE
Present Indicative Affirmative.
Sing. 1. wa hSdnahai I am tied wa weinahai I am large
2. „ hedantahai „ weintahai
3 m. ,, hedanyahai ,, weinyahai
3 f. ,, hedantahai „ weintahai
Plur. 1. „ hedhedannahai „ waweinnahai
2. „ hedhedantihin „ waweintihin
3. „ hedhedanyihin „ waweinyihin
Present Indicative Negative.
Sing. 1. ma hedni I am not tied ma weini I am not large
2. ma hednid ma weinid
3 m. ma hedna ma weina
3 f. ma hedna ma weina
Plur. 1. ma hednin ma weinin
2. ma hednidin ma weinidin
3. ma hedna ma weina
Past Indicative Affirmative.
Sing. 1. wa hedna I was tied wa weina I was big
2. „ hednahaid „ weinahaid
3 m. „ hedna . „ weina
3 f . ,, hednahaid „ weinahaid
Plur. 1. „ hedhednahain „ waweinahain
2. ,, hedhednahaiden „ waweinahaiden
3. „ hedhednahayen „ waweinahayen
Past Indicative Negative.
Sing. 1. maan hednahain maan weinahain
I was not tied I was not big
etc. etc.
114. The adjectival roots, 6g (knowing), ja'al (liking), ogdl (agreeing), are similarly conjugated with aho, in the Present and Past tenses.
Pres. Affirm. Past Affirm.
wa dgahai I know wa dgaha I knew
„ ja'alahai I like „ ja'alaha I liked
„ ogblahai I agree „ ogdlaha I agreed
LAHO 67
Pres. Negative Past Negative
ma dgi ' I do not know maan bgahain I did not know
ma ja'alihi I do not like maan ja'alahain I did not like
ma ogdlihi I do not agree maan ogblahain I did not agTee
Other tenses are formed according to the 2nd conjugation from the verbs,
ogho know (q.v.) ja'alo like ogdlo agree
After adjectives ending in a, h, 6, the t of the Personal in- flexions is changed to d.
wa lugoladahai she is legless wa garadl§hdahai she is sensible wa dddahai it is near
115. The verb laho (possess), is conjugated like aho.
Affirm. |
Negative |
|
Imperative |
laho |
|
Infinitive |
lahafn |
|
Indicative : |
||
Present |
wa lehahai |
ma lihi |
Past |
„ laha |
ma lahain |
Habit. Pres. |
„ lahafn jira |
ma lahafn jiro |
,, Past |
„ lahafn jirei |
ma lahafn jirin |
Future |
„ lahafn ddna |
ma lahafn ddno |
Conditional Potential |
„ lahafn laha ] an laha.de J |
maan lahaden |
Subjunctive |
inan lahado Affirmative. |
inanan lahain |
Present |
Past |
|
Sing. 1. wa |
, lehahai I possess |
wa laha I |
2. |
lehdahai |
„ lahaid |
3 m. „ |
lehyahai |
,, laha |
3f. „ |
lehdahai |
„ lahaid |
Plur. 1. |
lehnahai |
„ lahain |
2. |
lehdihin |
„ lahaiden |
3. |
lehyihin |
„ lahayen |
I possessed
1 The 1st Sing. Present Negative is contracted into mOJi, or mflyl.
5—2
68 |
ACCIDENCE |
||||
Negative. |
|||||
Present |
Past |
||||
Sing. 1. |
malihi I do not possess |
ma(an) lahafn |
I did not |
||
possess |
|||||
2. |
malihid |
etc. |
|||
3 m. |
malaha |
||||
3f. |
malaha |
||||
Plur. 1. |
malihin |
||||
2. |
malihidin |
||||
3. |
malaha |
116. Uses of laho.
This verb is made up of the root leh (possessing), and aho (be).
In the Indicative the tenses of aho are conjugated in full, preceded by leh; but other tenses are contracted, as if from the root laho.
laho literally means "have possession of," "own."
gel badan ma lehdahai P have you many camels ? nag ma lehdahai ? have you a wife ?
[hai (have, hold), could not be used in these examples.]
The root alone is used in the following expressions : aniga leh, adiga leh it is mine, it is yours
etc. etc.
daktarka leh, 1 • , , * ,
or daktarki bu lehyahai ) ll hehn& to the doctor nin ba leh it belongs to someone
Other idiomatic meanings :
mahhad lehdahai P what have you to say ? what do you mean ? what is the matter with you ?
wuhhu lehyahai, ddni mayo, he means, he does not want to.
laba rubod ban ugu lehahai, I am owed two rupees by you.
The Past Indicative is used as an auxiliary with an Infinitive, to form the Conditional tense of verbs.
wa t6gi laha I should go
WAH
69
It may also govern substantival sentences, introduced by in : malihi inan ku ra'o, it is not my business to go with you. inad berrl takto bad lehdahai, you ought (have) to go to-morrow.
117.
wan.
The verb root wan is conjugated as an irregular defective verb, and is used as an auxiliary verb, meaning, "fail," "be unable," "cannot find."
It is only conjugated in the Present and Past Indicative, and in one tense of the Subjunctive.
Indicative. |
||||
Sing. 1. 2. |
Present wahya, waiya, wai weida |
I fail |
wahyei, weidei, |
Past waiyei, wai wei |
3 m. 3f. |
wahya, waiya, wai weida |
wahyei, weidei |
waiyei, wai |
|
Plur. 1. 2. |
weina weidan |
weinei weiden |
||
3. |
wahyan, waiyan, wai Subjunctive. Sing. 1. waiyo 2. weido |
wahyen |
, waiyen, wai |
|
3 m. 3f. |
waiyo weido |
|||
Plur. 1. 2. |
weino weidan |
|||
3. |
waiyan |
|||
Exampl |
^(cf. §§146, 195, 274 |
note), |
iman waiya so'on wai shakhein waiyen hadad tegi weido hadeinu gadi weino biyo mesha ka weina ghori ka wein wa wai mahhad u iman weida wa wai la wan
I, or he, cannot (or will not) come
I, he, or they cannot (fail to) walk
they would not (failed to) work
if you fail to go
if we fail to reach it
we cannot find water there
I cannot find larger wood
why don't you come ?
I, he, or they cannot find it
one cannot find it, it cannot be found
70 ACCIDENCE
118. (e) The Passive Voice.
There is no Passive Voice in the conjugation of the Somali verb.
It is translated in two ways :
(i) by the Past Participle and the verb aho, cf. § 113 ;
(ii) by the Indefinite pronoun la, with the 3rd pers. masc. sing, of the Active voice of the verb.
Here la is identical in meaning and construction with the French pronoun on, and means "they," "people," "one."
Examples,
wahha la yidi it is said
wahhba lagu ma falo nothing is done with it
lei shegei I was told
la na ghobs6neya we shall be caught
In neither case can the Instrument be expressed. If required, the Instrument must be expressed as the Subject : ninkan igu diftei I was struck by this man (this man struck me).
3. Derivative Verbs.
119. These are, Intensive, Reflexive, Attributive, Causative, and may be formed from either nouns, adjectives, or verbs.
120. (a) Intensive verbs express an emphatic, intensified or repeated action, and are formed by reduplication of the simple radical verb. These all belong to the 1st Conjugation.
Examples,
lab |
fold |
fur |
open |
goi |
cut |
ddn |
want |
gur |
pick up |
hed |
tie |
jehh |
tear |
sheg |
tell |
lablab fold up] i.e.
furfur unfold J many folds
gogoi cut up in pieces
d6nddn look around for
gurgur pick up all
hedhed tie up, pack up
jehhjehh tear up
shegsheg repeat word by word
DERIVATIVE VERBS
71
121. (b) Reflexive verbs imply doing something to or for oneself, or may be passive in meaning. They are formed by adding -o or -so to a noun or verb (words ending in i always take -so).
These are all of the 2nd Conjugation.
Examples,
fadl |
sit |
fadlso |
seat yourself, sit down |
j&g |
wait, be |
jbgso |
halt, stop |
jed |
turn |
jSso |
turn yourself |
hub |
be sure |
hubso |
ascertain, assure yourself |
bar |
teach |
baro |
learn |
gar-ti |
justice |
garo |
understand |
amahh-di |
loan |
amahho |
borrow |
d6n |
want |
ddno |
find for yourself |
bagh |
fear |
baghho |
be afraid |
dor-ki |
choice |
doro |
choose |
jld |
pull |
jldo |
hurry on |
maid |
wash |
maido |
be washed, wash yourself |
sid |
carry |
sido |
carry for yourself, wear |
ghad |
take away |
g'hado |
take for yourself |
hir |
shave |
hiro |
shave yourself |
hed |
tie |
hedo |
tie on to yourself |
ghob |
take |
ghobo |
catch, take hold of |
ghobso |
j> >> |
||
hai |
have, keep |
haiso |
have got, keep for your- self |
ghaib-ki |
share |
ghaibso |
take your share |
Ib-ki |
price |
Ibso |
buy, sell |
samei |
make |
samdiso |
make for yourself |
gur-ki |
marriage |
gurso |
marry |
kahhai |
take, lead |
kahhaiso |
take to yourself |
si |
give |
slso |
pay for |
weidl |
ask |
weidlso |
ask for yourself |
122. (c) Attributive verbs are formed by adding -o to an adjective or participle, and are conjugated according to the 2nd Conjugation, the o being changed to a in all tenses and moods. This o gives the meaning of "become," and not "be," the latter being translated by aho.
Examples, 'ad white 'ado become white
72 |
ACCIDENCE |
||
bisil |
ripe, cooked |
bislo |
become ripe, cooked |
dd |
near |
dowo |
approach |
gab |
short |
gabo |
become short |
hhun |
bad |
humo |
become bad |
fbg |
far |
fbgo |
go to a distance |
shilis |
fat |
shishlo |
become fat |
Distinguish between the following tenses : wa hhtinyahai it is bad wa hhumada it becomes bad wa hhumaneya it will become bad
fardahaiga ma shishla, my ponies are not fat. farduhu meshatan ma shishlado, ponies do not get fat here. hadi mlyi lo kahhayo wa shishlaneya, if they are taken to the
jungle, they will get fat.
123. (d) Causative verbs imply the causing of an action or production of a state or attribute in some object. They are formed (i) by adding -i, or -si (-si always to a word ending in -i) to any noun or verb, (ii) by adding -ei to an adjective. They are all transitive verbs of the 3rd ^Conjugation.
Examples, shakhei work shakheisi make to work
dambeisi put behind 'absi cause to drink
ghaibsi divide in shares gabi amtisi daldli hababi radi badi durki
Where the last letter of the radical is a guttural it is usually altered to j.
Examples,
dagh graze daji
bagh fear baji
j6g wait jdji
ingeg be dry ingeji
dambei |
be behind |
'ab |
drink |
ghaib |
share |
gab |
be short |
anr&s |
be silent |
dal61-shi |
hole |
habab |
loss |
rad-ki |
track |
bad |
be plentiful |
durug |
move |
shorten
make silent
perforate
cause to lose
follow the track
increase
remove, cause to move
cause to graze frighten
stop (transitive) cause to be dry
PARTICLES |
|||
hagag |
be straight |
hagaji |
make straight |
wanag |
goodness |
wanaji |
make good |
wereg |
go round |
wereji |
cause to go round |
also |
|||
ghabo |
be cold |
ghabdji |
make cold |
Verbs formed from adjectives : |
|||
'ad |
white |
'adei |
whiten |
bisil |
cooked |
bislei |
cook |
kulul |
hot |
kululei |
make hot |
adag |
hard |
adkei |
harden |
fbg |
far |
fbgei |
put afar off |
dan |
all, complete |
damei |
finish |
The Verbs mentioned in |
§ 97 alter a to e : |
||
gal |
enter |
geli |
insert |
ka' |
awake |
ke'i |
awaken, arouse |
73
D. The Particles.
124. Particles are used in Somali to correspond to various English parts of speech, but cannot be actually translated, except by reference to the context of the sentence in which they occur. They cannot stand by themselves, but only in conjunction with other parts of speech, nor are they subject to any inflexions of any kind.
They may either have reference to a verb (Verbal Particles), or they may correspond to conjunctions (Conjunctive Particles).
The Verbal Particles may correspond to certain adverbs or prepositions.
The Conjunctive Particles may serve to introduce a principal or subordinate sentence, or they may act as links between two co- ordinate sentences or parts of speech.
1. Verbal Particles.
125. (a) Adverbial Particles.
wada altogether, completely
kala apart, separately
si that way
so this way
These may be used with any verb.
74
ACCIDENCE
Examples,
fardihi wada kena
la wada ghadei
kala durka
kala dufo
kala goi
si so'o go on
si j&so turn that way
si gal go in
so wada kahhai
bring all the ponies they are all removed move apart, separate stretch out cut apart
so so'o
so jSso
so gal
come on turn this way come in
bring all
Other Adverbial Particles are :
ha, yan, ma, an. Negative Particles. Cf. §§91, 145.
ma. Interrogative Particle. Cf. §§ 94, 145.
wa, ba, ya. Affirmative Particles. Cf. §§ 138 — 144.
Further idiomatic meanings of si and so should be noticed
si means "continue" an action
si shakhei continue to work
si baro continue to learn
so means " begin " to do something, or " go and " do... .
so ardri hdlaha go and water the flocks
so Ibso go and 'buy for yourself
so safei go and clean
126. (6) Prepositional Particles (ku, u, ka, la).
ku at, in, by means of, for blyo galaska ku snub ged bu ku hedna 'el bu ku da'ei ga'anta ku ghobo hadig ku hed gel bannu ku dlrirra
u on account of: mahhad u taktei P to (a person) : sirkalki u tag Farah u gei
pour some water into the glass
he was tied to a tree
he fell into a well
hold with your hand
tie with a rope
we fight for camels
what did you go for?
go to the officer take to Farah
PARTICLES 75
ka from, across, concerning :
mdsha ka kali come from that place
mSsba ka taga go away from there
ka ghob pour away
ka goi cut off
debbda ka talab go across the nullah
muska ka bdd jump over the fence
wanbas wabhba ka garan I understand nothing about
mayo that
la together with : na la ra' come with us
wa ku la badleya I am talking with you
2. Conjunctive Particles.
127. (a) Introductory Particles.
s6, or sbo perhaps : so magaladu jdga perhaps he is in the town
so garan maysid P don't you understand ?
mala, malaba (lit. thought) probably : mala wa ararei he has probably run away
bal. The meaning of this is impossible to express. It is used in the following constructions,
(i) With Imperative : bal kali well, come
bal an 6go let me look, then (ii) With the particle in, introducing an indirect question : weidi bal inei fdgtabai ask if it is far
(b) Conjunctive Particles. iyo and (coupling two substantives) o and (coupling two clauses).
-na and, also, (a suffix, usually introducing a fresh sentence) -se but (a suffix). ama, mise, either, or
.„a I these usually require the Subjunctive mood, badi if J
Examples,
Farab iyo aniga, Farah and I.
6rod o s6 ghad, run and fetch it.
wa adagyahai o lagu goin kari mayo, it is hard and cannot be cut.
76 ACCIDENCE
adiguna mahhad ddnesa P and what do you want ?
isna wa t6gei, he too has gone.
dabed6dna, and afterwards.
wa jdgei, ninkuse ararei, 1 was there, but the man ran away.
am a tag am a j6g, either go or stay.
ma shegtei mise ilddei P did you tell or forget?
inad takto ban ddneya, I want you to go.
hadu yimado, i kali, if he comes, come to me.
E. Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions.
128. With the exception of the radical particles given in the last section, these parts of speech are represented in Somali by substantival expressions.
129. Adverbs of Quality and Manner : ain-ki kind, sort ainkan, ainkas like this, like that si-di manner
sida, sidas, or sas so, thus
si is also used with an adjective, forming an abstract substantive :
si wanaksan good manner
si hhun bad „
si 'ajis lazy „
Such expressions with the particle u become adverbial. Examples,
si wanaksan u samei make properly
wa si 'ajis u shakheineya he is working lazily
The following nouns are commonly used in this way with u:
ad |
force, effort |
hds downwards |
miyir |
prudence |
dib backwards |
khumati |
straightness |
hor forwards |
kor |
upwards |
ghunyar slowness |
CT J„„ |
also the verb root dakhso hurry |
|
Examples, |
ad u heji |
hold tight |
miyir u fill |
ride carefully |
|
dib u j6gso |
stand back |
|
dakhso u tag |
go quickly |
ADVERBS 77
130. Adverbs of Time and Place :
Time : gor-ti, kol-ki, mar-ki, had-di, wa-tfi. b6ri-gi, gelin-ki.
Place : mel-shi, hal-ki, hag-gi.
Time.
this time |
gortan, kolkan, |
another time mar dambe |
|
markan |
|||
now |
iminka, aminka |
often |
gor badan, mar badan |
now at once |
haddan |
sometimes |
mar mar |
now therefore |
haddaba |
again |
mar kaleh |
then |
gortas, kolkas, markas |
at no time |
kolla |
soon |
gor do |
first |
horta |
later on |
haddd, haddoto |
once |
kol, gor |
before |
kolki hbre, marki hdre |
twice |
laba gor |
afterwards |
kolki dambe, marki dambe, dabad6d |
yet, still |
wfcli |
formerly |
kol hbre, wagi hdre, |
never |
wdligi |
b6rigi hdre |
always |
gor walba |
|
Place. |
|||
here |
halkan, meshan |
above |
dusha |
this way |
haggan |
beneath |
hbsta |
there |
halk as, halka, meshas |
in front |
h6re, horti, ka hdre |
that way |
haggas |
behind |
dambe, ka dambe, ka daba |
yonder |
halkd, haggd |
inside |
gudaha |
near |
mel d6 |
outside |
dibadda |
far |
mel f 6g |
aside |
ges |
somewhere |
mel, melun |
on that side |
gesta |
everywhere |
mel walba |
around |
harero |
nowhere |
mella |
in the middle |
dehhda |
(For hours, days, months, etc., see Appendix.)
78
ACCIDENCE
131.
Interrogative Adverbs.
of what sort ? ainma P
how ? side P
how much ? inte P
why ? mahha u P (cf. § 195)
when ? gonna P
at what time ? hadma P
how often ? Imisa gor P
how long halkyo gonna P
where ? halke? hagge P melma P me P meyei P medei P
where how far ?
inte?
132.
Prepositions.
The simple prepositions (to, for, from, with, etc.) are represented by the Particles (cf. § 126).
Other prepositions are represented by Adverbial Nouns, the word governed being placed in the possessive (cf. § 201). This may be done by using the adverb alone, with the governed word following it in the possessive position, as
sidi na's like a fool
gorti dagalki at the time of battle
Or the adverb is used with the possessive adjective, as
as, like
at the time
before
after
until
since
near to
far from
over, on
under
in front of
and, except
akhalka hortlsi in front of the house jbniad gudaheda inside a bag
sidi outside dibaddlsi
of gorti, kolki, marki beside gestisi
hortlsi
dabadlsi
hadyo inti
halkyo gorti
agtlsi
fdgtlsi
dushlsi
hdstlsi
hortlsi
mahai
around harerodlsi
between, among dehhdlsi
opposite
beyond
on this side of
instead of
for the sake of
behind
within
without laan
hortlsi
ka shish6i
ka sdkei
meshlsi
awadlsi
damblsi
gudahlsi
133.
interjections |
||
Relative Conjunctions. |
||
when |
gorti, kolki, marki |
|
until |
hadyo inti, inti |
|
while |
inti |
|
since |
halkyo gorti |
|
before |
intan (= inti-an, negative) |
|
where |
meshi, halki, haggi |
|
as much as |
inti |
|
as |
sidi |
|
F. |
Interjections and Salutations. |
|
Interjections. |
||
war |
man. |
, sir |
na |
woman, miss, madam |
79
134.
Examples,
war, 'ss ka tag ! go away, man !
na, aya tahai P who art thou, woman ?
warya ! is used to draw attention.
-6 is added as a suffix to Proper Names in calling out to persons. warya, Libano ! Hi ! Liban ! ha yes maya no
hoi hoi ! a shout to attract attention jog ! an exclamation of astonishment Wallahh ! by God !
Sga, Wallahh ! lit. means " look, by God ! " dega ! lit. means " listen !"
Wallahhi, iyo Billahhi, iyo Tallahhi. An Arabic oath haurarsan all right
ha ahato so be it
watahai very well (lit. it is)
yelkis that's his business, never mind
'ss ka da let be
'ss ka eg look out
Illahhi mahaddi thank God Illahhi ba 6g God knows
ko, kodi, haiye yes, well ?
80 ACCIDENCE
135. Salutations.
Nabad Peace
Greeting Beply
1 ma nabad ba ? \ i wa nabad
or \ is it peace ? \ or it is peace
sd nabad mlya P ] I nabad weiye
ma nabad gh6botaP have you wa nabad ghobta I have
peace ? peace
amahhad sh6gta P what do you nabad ban shega I tell peace
tell?
3 ma bariden P are you safe ? ba, barinei yes, we are
safe
sid6 tahai P how are you ?
'ss ka warran give news of yourself
mesha ka warran give news of the place
ma bukta P are you sick ?
ma buksanesa P are you getting better ?
ma ladantahai P are you well ?
wa ka si dara I am worse
1 The formal salutation.
2 The colloquial, informal greeting, " How do you do ? " 8 Corresponds to "Good morning."
PART III. SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES.
A. The Structure of a Simple Sentence. 1. Order of Words.
136. The usual order of a simple sentence, such as a command or statement, is
1. Subject. 2. Object. 3. Verb. Examples,
O. V.
sor na si, give us fond.
0. V.
faraska korei, saddle the horse.
S. 0. l\
nin ba libahh dilei, a man has killed a lion.
137. Adverbs may be placed anywhere except last, Adverbs of Time are usually placed first.
«. 0. V.
haddatan aurta rera, load the camels at once.
o. a. v.
faraska dakhso u so kahhai, fetch the horse quickly.
a. s. v.
markasa ninki yidi, then the man said.
s. a. o. v.
habarti ba habenki dambe akhalki Suldanka so ag martei, the old woman on the following night passed near the Sultan's house.
a. s. o. v.
'ashodi dambe ya habarti barlyo donatei,
on the following day the old woman begged alms.
s. o. a. v.
ninka holihlsi Burao bu gSineya, the man is taking his flocks to Burao.
82 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES
138. 2. The Particles wa, ba, ya.
These particles are of such universal occurrence, and so essential to idiomatic speech, that a correct understanding of their use is necessary at the outset. No one meaning can be assigned to them, as each may represent at one time a pronoun, at another a definite or indefinite article, at another the verb "is," "are," and at yet another time an adverb.
Their meanings may be divided into two classes :
(i) All three, wa, ba, ya, are Particles of Affirmation, just as ma is a Particle of Negation or Interrogation.
wa draws attention to, and precedes, the verb, ba, and ya (especially ba), draw attention to, and follow, the subject.
(ii) ba, and ya (especially ya), may be conjunctive or ad- verbial particles, often to be translated by "and so," "and then." This usage is found in narratives.
139. (i) As Particles of Affirmation.
If used without either a personal pronoun or a particle, a verb is considered abrupt.
Compare ba and wa in the following examples :
(Note. In these cases ba and ya are synonymous, and either form may be used equally, but ba is preferred by Eastern and Central tribes.)
1. nin ba yimi a man has come
2. nin wa yimi a man has arrived
3. Farah ba yimi Farah has come
4. Farah wa yimi Farah has arrived
1, 3 mean respectively that "it is a man that has come," and that " it is Farah that has come."
2, 4 mean respectively that " a man (as expected, or ordered) has arrived," and that "Farah (as expected, or ordered) has arrived."
In the first case the information relates to the individual who has come ; in the second case it relates to the arrival of some known person.
In short, ba emphasizes the identity of the subject, while wa emphasizes the meaning of the verb.
WA, BA, YA
83
140. This explains the fact that wa may be used with a verb when no subject is expressed, and ba may be used when no verb is expressed.
Examples, wa imaneya wa wanaksanyahai sadehhdas ba wanaksan ma Arab ba ? nin ba la dilei hdlihi wa la da'ei
he is coming
it is good
those three are the best
is he an Arab ?
a man has been killed
the flocks have been looted
hdlihi rag Musa Ismail ba ka da'ei
Musa Ismail's men looted the flocks
141. ba thus distinguishes the subject from the object where otherwise it would be doubtful.
Examples, nin libahh ba ghobtei nin ba libahh ghobtei
a lion caught a man a man caught a lion
142. Special uses of wa.
(a) wa assists or emphasizes the meaning of the verb, but especially emphasizes an affirmation in reply to a question, ex- pressed or understood.
ma imaneya ? ha, wa imaneya.
Is he coming ? Yes, he is coming.
ma garanSsa ? ha, wa garanSya.
Do you understand ? Yes, I understand.
(b) wa means "is," "are," where the complement is a noun or numeral, and not an adjective.
wa nin hhun wa shabel wa afar wa kan wa ke? wa kuma ? wa inte P wa mahai P
he is a bad man it is a leopard they are four here he is which is it ? who are you ? how much is it ? what is it ?
6—2
84 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES
(c) Where the complement of "is," "are," is an adjective, wa is used, but the verb aho (be) is also used, suffixed to the adjective.
hadalkas wa hhiinyahai that arrangement is bad
la'agti wa 'ultistahai the money is heavy
sirkalka wa ogyahai the officer knows
wayahai, watahai all right, so be it
(d) When the Preterite tense is used with wa it becomes a Perfect or Completed tense.
wa yimi he has come
wa arkei I have seen
143. Special uses of ba and ya.
(a) ba, or ya, emphasizes the identity of the subject, especially in reply to a question expressed or understood.
ya ku la ra'eya ? Farah ba i la ra'eya.
who is going with you ? Farah is.
'id ma timi ? ha, Jama ba yimi.
has anyone come ? Yes, Jama has.
Suldan ba inan laha.
(there was) a Sultan (who) had a son.
(b) When the subject of a sentence is a numeral it nearly always requires ba, or ya.
soddon ba joga thirty are present
laba ba maghan two are absent
imisa ba jbga ? how many are present ?
(Note. Tn the following cases only ba is used, and not ya.)
(c) ba is used in questions where the complement of "is," "are," is a substantive.
ma aur ba P is it a camel ?
ma Arab ba ? is he an Arab ?
ma kaigi ba P is it mine ?
ma isaga ba ? is it he ?
ma laba ba ? is it two ?
\a) in affirmative sentences, where the complement is an adjective, ba may be used, but the verb aho, be, is not then employed.
WA, BA, YA 85
In this case ba may give a superlative sense to the adjective. Illahhi ba 6g God knows
nin ba maghan one man is absent
bahalaha ghar ba hhun some animals are bad
sadehhdas kan ba wanaksan this is the best of those three
(e) ba, used after the object of a sentence, has a distributive meaning.
nin ba mid si give each man one
ain ba mel goniah diga put each kind in a separate place
kol ba nin keliah ha yimado let one man come at a time
(/) ba may give an indefinite meaning to a word of time or place; or is used with a verb, meaning "at all."
mel ba ku jira it is somewhere or other
wahhba doni mayo I don't want anything at all
ha tegin ba don't go at all
walba every
labadaba both
sadehhdaba all three
wahhad doneso ba whatever you want
meshi ad takto ba wherever you go
kolba ad doneso whenever you want
144. (ii) As Adverbial or Conjunctive Particles.
ba and ya, in this sense, correspond to the English particles "now," "and then," "and so." Their position in the sentence has no relation to the subject, object, or verb, but follows the first phrase in the sentence.
("Phrase" here includes both unqualified nouns, or nouns with their attributes, whether adjective or relative clause, or adverbial expressions.)
ba is apparently not used except when the phrase is an un- qualified noun, usually one which has already been referred to in the preceding sentence.
ya is always used after an adverb, or adverbial expression.
The examples illustrating these are taken from the stories, q.v. Suldanka nag bu gursadei, suldanki ba hajki ghobtei.
(p. 145, 1. 2.)
86 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES
Kolkasei tidi, "Berka genyoda fnankaga." fnanki'ba suldanki u yedei. (p. 146, 1. 7.)
" Galabtaan ku so mermero." Galabti ba inanki genyodi fulei. (p. 146, 1. 9.)
Mas ba lei hedei, maskas ba igu imaneya, o i 'uneya.
(p. 150, 1. 21.) Dararti dambe, ya suldanku yimi. (p. 146, 1. 3.)
Duhurki kolkei ahaid, ya wlyishi timi. (p. 148, 1. 11.) t sago gedka hurda, ya shanti Inan u yimaden.
(p. 148, 1. 16.)
3. Simple Interrogative and Negative Sentences.
145. The same particle ma is used in both kinds of sentences. There are certain differences in its several uses. The Negative ma is placed as near to the verb as possible, while the Interrogative ma comes before any pronoun or particle qualifying the verb (cf. § 236). Examples,
jblyo ma ku jiran ? is there any water in ?
\blyo ku ma jiran there is no water in
fwahh ma lagu slyei ? has anything been given you ?
\wahhba lei ma sin nothing has been given me
When joined to the personal pronoun the interrogative particle becomes mi-, while the negative particle is unaltered. Jmiad araktei P did you see ?
\maad arkin you did not see
("mill ku shegei P did he tell you ?
\i mau shegin he did not tell me
In both cases the pronoun is often omitted when the person referred to is obvious from the context.
i ma shegin (he) did not tell me
maarkin, or maarag (I) did not see burta ma arkesa P do you see the hill ?
wahh ma ddnesa P do you want anything 1
Interrogative ma may be separated from the pronoun by another word. In this case ban, bad, etc. are used (see also § 229). ma halka bu t6geya P Is it there he is going ?
ma ninkan bu ku diftei P is it this man that struck you ?
QUESTIONS
87
Where the subject of an interrogative or negative sentence is a noun, it is placed first in the sentence. Generally, in interrogative sentences the personal pronoun is required as well, but need not be used.
'ollku ma ka bahhai ? has the army left ?
ninku miu arkei libahha ? did the man see the lion ?
manta sirkalku Burao ma ghob6neya P
is the officer going to Burao to-day ?
146.
sho.
Questions expressing surprise are introduced by sd or
Examples,
la'agta badan so ddni maysid ?
so garan maysid P
so ma garanesa P
don't you want all this money ? don't you understand ? surely you understand ?
Questions introduced by Interrogative Pronouns and Adverbs Examples,
ya ku sh§gei hadalkas ?
wa kiima ? aya tahai ?
ayad araktei P
ninmad u dlbtei ?
mahha ka da'ei ?
'id ma la dilei P
aderka muhhu aurkas ka
sis6neya P abbaha mahha la yidahha P idinma warakhdan Burao
gSya? farasma buka P ma ainabka P mahhan la'ag ugu siya?
mahhad ugu hedantahai
mesha ? 'ollku gormu Kirrit ka bah-
haya ? hagge hdlahaiga ka takten P
who told you that story ?
who are you ?
whom did you see ?
to whom did you give it ?
what has happened?
is anyone killed ?
what will your uncle give for
that camel ? what do you call your father ? which of you will take this
chit to Burao ? which horse is sick? the black? why should I give you any
money ? what are you tied there for ?
when does the force leave
Kirrit? where did you leave my
animals ?
ninkakan hagge bu ku diftei P where did this man hit you ?
88
SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES
where is the mare? where is
the bay? where is the officers' camp ?
how far is Bohotle from here?
how long was he absent?
how many rupees did he pay
you? how does the country lie
beyond that hill? how is it on this side ? how heavy is that bag ? how deep is the well ?
gSnyadi mSdei? hamarku
mdyei ? herodi siraklshu fadfda wa
hagge ? halkiyo Bdhotleh intdi jirta? intu maghana wa inte ? Imisa rubod bu ku bihhlyei P
hagga burta ka shishei sidu
dulyahai P burta ka sokei sidei tahai P joniada 'uleiskeda wa inte? 'elka dererklsu wa inte ? (or
intu derada?) bahalkan wa ainma P what sort of an animal is this ?
In Negative questions introduced by "why?" (mahha u P) a special idiom is used with the verb wan (§§ 117, 195). mahhad u ddni weida inad why don't you want to go ? takto P
4. The Verbs of existence, and attributive verbs.
147. These Verbs (be, live, stay, dwell, grow, exist, lie, be found, become) have an equal variety of corresponding Somali expressions, as aho, oil, j6g, jir, fadi, laho, nokho.
(i) The Auxiliary verb "be" requires a complement in the form of noun, adjective or pronoun.
(a) This may be translated simply by wa, or ba, as shewn in the examples of those particles.
(b) Or it is translated by aho, which is used independently when the complement is a noun, or is combined with an adjective when the complement is the latter, and forms an Attributive verb. In the latter case wa is required as well, but pronouns are never used.
Examples, nin wein ban ahai na's bad tahai (contracted
into bat'hai) nin fi'an miu aha ? Somali mlihid
I am a big man. thou art a fool
was he a clever man ? thou art not a Somali
VERBS OF EXISTENCE 89
askari maaha he is not a soldier
tollma tahai ? of what tribe are you ?
wa wanaksanyahai he is good
ma wanaksana he is not good
la'agti ma 'ulustahai ? is the money heavy ?
148. (ii) It may refer to the presence or existence of an object in a certain place.
(a) jdg is used when referring to animate objects.
Examples, ninki ma jdga P is the man here ?
aurti haggasei jdgta the camels are there
ragu Imisa ba jdga ? how many of the men are
present ?
(6) jir is used of inanimate objects.
Examples,
wahh kaleh ma jira ? is there anything else ?
halkan mahha kii jira P what is there here ?
wahhba ku ma jir an there is nothing
biyo wa ku jiran there is water in
oil (literally lie) is often used in this sense :
sanadukhdi halkan tal the boxes are here
akhalkaiga bu yal *it is in my house
kitabki meska dushlsi yal the book is on the table
biyo badan ba yalin there is plenty of water
(c) oil (dwell, live), also refers to people :
Examples, tollma halkan yal ? what tribe lives here ?
Burao-einu nil we lived at Burao
hagge olli jirten P where used you to live?
fadi is used with same meaning (lit. sit, abide) :
Examples,
magalodaan fadlya I stay in the town
Berberu fadlya he stays in Berbera
hagge sirakishu fadida ? where do the officers dwell ?
(d) When referring to the existence of animals or plants, laho (possess) is used.
90 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES
Examples,
meshasa ugad ma lehdahai P
is there any game in that place ? (lit. does that place possess game?).
gerenuk iyo ddro bei lehdahai,
it possesses gerenuk and dero (or g. and d. are found there).
b'e'id malaha, there is no oryx there.
mel walba aus bei lehdahai, there is grass everywhere.
dareiga Nogashu bei lehdahai, the fig grows in the Nogal.
(vi) nokho become |
||
'ss ka dig pretend |
||
Examples, |
||
suldan bu nbkhdei |
he became Sultan |
|
nag bu 'ss ka dfgeya |
he is pretending to be |
a woman |
B. The Parts of Speech.
I. The Article.
149. A noun, which in English is qualified by the indefinite pronoun, a, an, or some, any, is used in Somali in its simplest form in an indefinite sense.
Suldan ba inan laha a Sultan had a son
ei ba 'efyeya a dog is barking
kursi wein ban ddneya I want a big chair
fardo ba imaneya some horses are coming
gddo ban hai'sta I have got some grass
hdlo ma lehdahai ? have you any flocks ?
la'ag malihi I have not any money
150. The Definite article suffix (§ 28) is used to define nouns in a particular or general sense.
151. -i is always used for the definite article where -u or -a are not required by the following rules.
152. -a (i) is used primarily in defining nouns, referring to objects or persons actually present, or in front of the speaker.
sandukha ghad remove the box (which is in front of us)
bein bu shSgeya ninka the man is telling lies
Note. Where the noun in this sense is the subject of the sentence, it is more usual to use the demonstrative adjective -an this.
DEFINITE ARTICLE 91
(ii) It is also used with a noun in a general sense when in the objective case (§ 153, (vi)).
(iii) With Definite nouns which are possessive, or adjectival :
akhalki ninka the house of the man
inanki Suldanka the Sultan's son nin magaloda a man of the town
even where the Possessive adjective is used ;
sirkalka ghalabklsi the officer's luggage
(iv) With nouns used adverbially :
galabta this evening Isninta on Monday
153. u is used in the following cases : (i) With well-known persons or objects of nature. Wadadku the Mullah (i.e. Mohammed Ab-
dallah) Sirkalku the Officer (i.e. as a soldier would
say, referring to his own officer) oghashu shirka fadida the headmen sit in council
ghorahhdu wa kuliishahai the sun is hot rbbku wa gadeya the rain is stopping
(ii) With persons or things already referred to, and about which one is talking, as in the following example :
A man brings a complaint that another man has stolen his camel ; the judge may ask :
hashu ma jdgta ? is the camel here ? or the man may say :
ninku wa ararei, the man has run away.
In this way it is used when referring to a character in a story who has already been mentioned, as :
Suldanku, Inanku, habartu, etc.
(iii) It is also used with the Personal pronouns in the Emphatic forms,
anigu, adigu, adu, etc. (§ 55).
(iv) When a noun is used in a general sense, referring to all
92 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES
members of a class, it is used in English with no article, but in
Somali usually takes the article -u.
siraklshu 'ano halad ma ja'ashahai? do officers like camel's
milk? naguhu wa hadal badanyahai women are great talkers.
(v) -u cannot be used with a noun which is qualified by an epithet. In such cases -i, or -a, only are found.
oghashi Habr Yunis the H. Y. headmen sirkalki hakinkaaha the judge-officer
(vi) -u is not used with a noun in the objective case. If a noun in one of the above senses is objective, -a is used (cf. supra). gorma la ghoboneya Wadadka ? when will the Mullah be
caught ?
154. The Definite Article may be used with any noun, numeral or pronoun, and is often used together with the Demonstrative Adjective and Possessive Adjective suffixes, q.v.
Where a definite- noun is qualified by a numeral, it is the latter which takes the article, and not the noun :
labadi nin the two men
2. The Noun,
(a) Case's.
155. There are no case inflexions in Somali, and the relation of a noun to the rest of the sentence must be recognised from its position or the context.
156. A general rule for subject and object was given in the first section on syntax, but this is subject to colloquial variation, where the meaning is obvious from the context.
Generally, the subject may be distinguished from the object by
the gender and number of the verb, and pronoun, if the latter occurs,
but only in cases where both are different.
ninki nagti bu dilei the man killed the woman
nagti ninki bei dishei) . . ... , .
■ t • »-i- i. ■ j- u -f the woman killed the man
or ninki nagti bei disneij
Suldanki ba gartei nagtlsi and the Sultan recognised his wife.
berigi dambe ya inan, Suldan dalei, ya inanti arkei Afterwards
a son of a Sultan saw the girl.
CASES 93
ba, ya (§ 141) help to distinguish the subject.
dabku ya maska iyo hhaska bakhtlyei the fire destroyed the snake and the fence.
Here the subject is also denoted by the article -u.
The special forms of the pronouns, wuhhu, etc., following the subject, are used to make it clear.
'ollki Habr Toljala wuhhu dulei Ali Naldyah, the force of H. T., they attacked the Ali Naleyah.
Dative.
157. Some verbs may have two objects, one being in the dative case, or indirect object.
The usual order is to place the direct object before the indirect.
Parah warakhdi sirkalki bu slyei Farah gave the letter to the
officer gddo faraska si give the horse grass
ninba toban-an dlbei I gave each man ten
Motion to a person is expressed by the particle u, but motion to a place requires no particle, the place being translated as an indirect object.
Ali u tag go to Ali
aghilki igu yimi the headman came to me
aurti Sirkalki u g£ya take the camels to the
Officer Burao ban tegeya I am going to Burao
Ali hblihlsi rerklsi bu gSineya Ali is taking his flocks to his
family
158. Nouns may be used adverbially, as in the last two examples, with verbs of motion or rest, or expressing duration of time. But if they are abstract nouns expressing manner or quality, u is required before the verb (see § 129).
Burao ban fadlya I stay at Burao
laba 'asho beinu so'onei we marched for two days
159. The Ablative is expressed by the prepositional particle ka.
magalodan ka imi I have come from the town
94 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES
'ollku shaleito meshan ka bahhai, the army left this place
yesterday.
The Possessive Case (cf. § 45).
160. Nouns are used adjectivally, following another noun which they qualify, expressing origin, quality, value, use, space of time.
nin magaloda a man of the town
nin dagal badan a great man for fighting dagalki shalei yesterday's battle
If the noun expresses material, profession, or nationality, it may
be made into an adjective by the suffix -ah (being).
sandukh birah a box of iron
nin Tomalah a Tomal
laba nin o sirkalah, ) „
,,, • i -i f two officers
or laba nm o sirakil J
ninki askarigaaha the soldier man
If it expresses the contents, or features, the suffix -leh is used. balli blyoleh a " pan " of water
nin gadleh a bearded man
Features or clothes may be used alone descriptively. nin san wein a big nosed man
gholidi gambo 'as the party in red puggarees nagta maro 'as that woman in a red tobe
burta figh der that high peaked hill
161. The Partitive Case. " Some of," " any of," " one of."
The noun expressing the whole is either placed first in the sentence, parenthetically, or follows the noun expressing the portion, separated by the particle o.
ragu in yer ba jdgta a few of the men are here
sadehhdas ki u wanaksana wa ka of those three that is the
best one aurtaida mid ba dintei one of my camels has died
wahh badan o hdlahaiga plenty of my animals
(b) Number.
162. The plural of nouns is used as in English, wherever it is desired to express plural number, except after numerals.
CONCORD 95
naguhu wa hadal badanyahai women are great talkers
wa askarr hhunhhun they are bad soldiers
oghal bei nbkhdan they become headmen
aurti timi the camels have come
163. After numerals the plural number is only used in the case of feminine nouns, except those ending in -o (cf. § 42).
laba nin two men afar 'asho four days
lehh nagod six women sadehh halod three camels
(c) Concord of Plural Nouns.
164. In the Accidence (§§ 34, 76) it was noticed that the Guttural, and Dental, definite articles of the singular nouns are changed in the plural to Dental, and Guttural, respectively, except in the case of masculine monosyllables.
fas-ki |
axe |
plur. |
fasas-ki |
busta-hi |
blanket |
>> |
bustyal-shi |
'asho-di |
day |
>j |
'ashoin-ki |
muda'-i |
fork |
>> |
nmda'yo-di |
sirkal-ki |
officer |
!> |
sirakll-shi |
lan-ti |
branch |
>> |
lamo-hi |
This is more noticeable in irregular plurals, as :
aur-ki he camel plur. aur-ti
aghil-ki headman „ oghal-shi or aghilin-ti
Arab-ki Arab-man „ Arab-ti
11-shi eye „ indo-hi
This is comparable with, and is no doubt related to, the Arabic broken plurals, which are always feminine.
165. The plurals of the 1st class are true plurals, and adjectives and verbs always agree with them in number.
fasaska wa hhunhhunyihin those axes are bad sumanki dadera wa hallaban the long straps are lost
In all other plurals, the adjective and verb should agree with the noun according to the form of the linking consonant alone, and not in number.
96 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES
Compare the following examples :
nagti wa imanesa (3rd fem. sing.) the woman is coming
aurki wa imaneya (3rd masc. sing.) the camel is coming
nimanki wa imaneyan (3rd plur.) the men are coming
nagihi wa imaneya (3rd masc. sing.) the women are coming
aurti wa imanesa (3rd fem. sing.) the camels are coming
Sirkalki ghalabklsi (3rd masc. sing.) the officer's baggage
gabaddi bokhorkeda (3rd fem. sing.) the girl's sash
Siraklshi ghalabkeda (3rd fem. sing.) the officers' baggage
genyadi wa tan (fem.) there is the mare
aurki wa kan (masc.) here is the camel
aurti wa tan (fem.) here are the camels
sanadiikhdi weineid halkan tal the big boxes lie here
(3rd fem. sing.)
jdniadihi madana wa ku jira the empty bags are in
(3rd masc. sing.)
oghal ba fadida (3rd fem. sing.) some headmen are sitting
Note. The following case of false analogy is interesting, as shewing how in the Somali mind the article is the important factor to be considered in the concord of nouns with adjectives and verbs.
fardihi (the horses) is often contracted to fardi. In the latter case the feminine concord is most usual, as to the ear it appears that the article suffix is -di, the original masculine suffix -hi having been lost.
Example,
fardihi wa ka'dleineya (3rd masc. sing.)!
- ,. i (ji • /o j e \ f the horses are trotting
fardi wa ka dleinesa (3rd fem. sing.) J °
166. The plural nouns, biyo, 'ano, gedo, nolo, timo, are
treated as true plurals.
biyo ma yalin there is no water
'anihi wa kuan here is the milk
wahhba (nothing) is usually considered plural : wahhba ku ma jiran there is nothing there
167. Adjectives qualifying plural nouns, when used indefinitely, usually agree in number (see note to Table in § 76).
nago wawein some big women
Yibruhu wa niman hhunhhun the Yibirs are bad men
CONCORD 97
168. When the noun is qualified by a numeral special rules for concord apply.
If the subject is indefinite (the numeral having no article suffix) the verb is used in the singular.
The masculine may always be used, but if the plural is feminine, and would take a dental linking consonant if definite, the feminine form of the verb may be used.
shan aur mlyigi ku bakhtlyei, or bakhtidei, five camels died in the jungle.
laba nin ba yimi, two men came.
afar nago ba yimi, four women came.
If an adjective qualifies the noun as well, it is used in the plural.
shan aur o hhunhhun ya bakhtlyei, five bad camels died.
If however the noun is definite, the verb may be either singular or plural ; if it is singular it may agree in gender as with indefinite nouns.
shanti aur mlyigi ku bakhtidei, or bakhtiyen,
the five camels died in the jungle.
Where the noun refers to persons, the verb is usually used in the plural.
When the subject of the verb is a plural pronoun alone, or when the pronoun wahhai is used, the verb is always plural.
The following examples are taken from passages in the stories given in this book, and in Schleicher's Somali Texte.
shanti gabdod e kaleh wahhai ku diftan shan inan o hodanah,
the five other girls struck five rich young men.
shanti inan u yimaden, the five boys came to him.
labadas u sarr^yen, those two were in command.
wahha ugu yimi abahed iyo walalked, there came to her her father and brother.
lehh aur ka hadei, six camels were left.
lehhdi aur, o lehh libahh 'unesa,
the six camels which six lions were eating.
shan iyo labaton nin, o habsiga kii jirei, wahhai ghaten...
twenty-five men, who were in gaol, took... (Schl. p. 13, 1. 12.)
sirkalka wuhhu direi askaro aur ku jogta,
the officer sent soldiers on camels. (Schl. p. 13, 1. 18.)
k. 7
98 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES
markasa sagalki walalahed tashaden,
Then her nine brothers considered. (Schl. p. 22, 1. 18.)
afarti walalaaha ya tashadei,
the four brothers considered. (Schl. p. 29, 1. 21.)
labadi odei ya yidi, the two old men said. (Schl. p. 30, 1. 13.)
3. The Adjective, (a) Grder and Syntax.
169. It has been seen in the Accidence (§ 69) that adjectives follow the substantives they qualify, and are inflected to agree with them in gender and number (§ 75).
170. When a noun is qualified by more than one adjective, the second is coupled by the particle o (and).
kitab yer o mado a small black book
rag kaleh o wan&ksan other good men
dagahhanta wawein o 'ul'ulus the big heavy stones
The adjective is coupled by o, if the noun is also qualified by a numeral. .
lehh halod o hhunhhun six bad camels
afar bakhalod o wawein four big mules
laba nin o Habr Yunis two 'men of the Habr Yunis
Note. When the word kaleh (other) is one of two epithets qualifying a noun, it is coupled by e instead of o.
o kaleh has a special meaning. Cf. § 177.
Example,
lehh gabdod e kaleh six other girls, but, lehh gabdod o kaleh would mean, six similar girls
Where nouns are used adjectivally they follow the same rule.
sadehh nin o askari three soldiers todbba nin o sirakil seven officers
boghol, and kun, are treated adjectively also, and require o following them when more than one hundred or thousand is referred to.
laba boghol o askari 200 soldiers sadehh kun o adi 3,000 sheep
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES 99
171. Attributive verbs are formed from adjectives, by the particle wa, and the verb aho, which is suffixed to the adjective (see Conjugations, §114, and 142 (c)).
faraskan wa wanaksanyahai this horse is good sandukha wa fududyahai the box is light
radadkan wa gabgaboyihin these tracks are old
ba may be used with the adjective, without aho, but gives a superlative sense (§ 143 (d)).
kan ba wanaksan this is the good one
ushatan ba fudud this stick is the lightest
Adjectives in -leh, -la may be split up into their component parts, the suffix being represented by the verb laho.
garad bu lehyahai he is sensible
oghbn bu lehyahai j ...
or wa oghbn lehyahai J he 1S W18e
garad malaha, ]
or wa garad an lahain } he 1S foollsl1
(6) Comparison of Adjectives.
172. The particle ka is used before the adjective, and means "more than."
The object of comparison is treated adverbially, and is dis- tinguished from the subject by its position, relative to the latter, in the sentence.
The adjective, describing the quality in which the comparison is made, is treated as part of the verb.
If the Subject of comparison is the subject of the principal verb, it precedes the Object of comparison.
If the Subject of comparison is the object of the principal verb, it follows the Object of comparison.
Types of simple Comparative Sentences.
S. Adv. 0. V.
rninkan halkan akhal bu diseya
(this man here a house he is building
rninkas halka akhal bu diseya
(.that man there a house he is building
7—2
100
SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES
s. |
Adv. |
0. |
V. |
jakhalkan Ithis house |
akhalkas |
ka wein |
|
than that house |
(is) bigger |
||
jninkan (this man |
akhalkas |
akhal |
ka wein bu diseya |
than that house |
a house |
bigger he is building |
|
{ |
akhalkas |
akhal |
ka wein so dis |
than that house |
a house |
bigger build |
|
jakhalkan (this house |
akhalkas |
ma ka wein ? |
|
than that house |
(is it) bigger ? |
||
jma |
akhalkas |
akhal |
ka wein disesa P |
than that house |
a house |
bigger are you building? |
173. In simple statements of comparison, the verb aho may be used with the adjective, or omitted.
kas ma kan gabanyahai ? is this shorter than that ?
ragakan ragas ma ka badanyahai P are these men more numerous than those ?
ragas innagu ka badan, we are more than those men.
sanaddi h6re ragi j6gei, kana ka badan, there are more people here now than last year.
In three of these examples the usual order is inverted, owing to the subject being a pronoun, which is placed near the verb.
174. Certain words have a comparative meaning without the particle ka.
dama better.
shiikhulka shukhul dama sameya, do better work than that.
yerei make less kordi l make more( increase. badi J
u yerei, make it less.
mushaharodaida ma i kordinesa ? will you increase my pay?
175. ka may be used with certain attributive verbs, such as fogo be far.
inad A. ka fogado ddni mayo, I do not wish you to go further than A.
faraskagu faraskaiga ka ma der6yo, your horse is not faster than mine.
SIMILARITY 101
176. The superlative may be expressed by sa ( = sida) or the particle ba, or most commonly by u, or ugu.
wa sa wanaksan, it is best.
sa sa wanaksan, that is best.
sadehhdas kan sa der, | ^ ig j of thoge thrQQ
or kan ba der, J
waranka ba fudud, that spear is lightest.
fsagu wa ugu wanaksanyahai, he is the best of all.
ragakan ki u yera, the smallest of these men.
inanti ugu yereid, the youngest girl.
biladki Somalida hdlihi laga dofiya mahha u badan P of the things which are exported from Somaliland, what is the chief?
177. (c) Similarity.
sida so, in the manner, as : aurtayada sida aurti waweineid blyo badan dbni mayso,
our camels do not want so much water as the big ones. wa wanaksanyahai sidadu o kaleh, he is just as good as
you. Jama sida Abdi u wanaksanyahai, Jama is as good as Abdi. sida u ma weina, sida kagi wahh badan ghadi mayo,
it is not so big, and will not carry so much as yours.
6 kaleh the same as :
bahalka wein aur 6 kaleh weyei, that big animal is just
like a camel, dagahhas mid 6 kaleh, another stone like that.
leheg resembling : gedkasa lehh aur bu lehegyahai, that tree is as high as
six camels. bakhashi faraska bei lehegtahai, the mule is equal to
the horse, kabahan ma iss-lehega, those shoes are not a pair.
iss ku or 'ss ku the same (equal to one another) (cf. § 250) :
kala different (cf. § 239).
These qualify adjectives or abstract nouns :
wa 'ss ku ib, they are the same price.
labadatan wa 'ss ku der, these two are the same length.
102 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES
'ss ku mid, the same.
rakabyada wa kala hds, the stirrups are of different length.
sanadukhda wa kala 'uleis, the boxes are of different
weight. wa kala wanaksan, they are not as good as one another
(are separately good).
Special idioms.
doliskas 'elka ma gadeya ? will that rope reach (be long enough for) the well ?
aurkasa aurkaigi la h6g maaha, that camel is not so strong as mine (literally, that camel is not of strength with my camel).
4. The Numerals.
178. The number of nouns qualified by a numeral and the position of the latter has already been dealt with in the Accidence (§§ 42, 47), and in the Syntax (§ 163).
The concord of adjectives and verbs with numerals is dealt with in Syntax (§ 168).
179. The numeral in Somali is considered as a substantive, and may take any of the suffixes. Nouns which in English are qualified by a numeral are considered in Somali as qualifying that numeral adjectivally (§ 170).
sadehhdas aur o hhunhhun those three bad camels
afartan nef these four animals
afartanka nef the forty animals
sagalkaigi aur my nine camels
180. When a numeral qualifies a pronoun, the possessive adjective is used in Somali suffixed to the numeral.
labadlni you two
afartayada we four
lehhdddi they six
181. " One " when qualifying a noun is not translated.
one man nin
one animal nef
101 men bogh61 iyo nin
101 animals bogh61 iyo nef
PERSONAL PRONOUNS 103
k6 is only used in counting consecutively. mid is an indefinite pronoun, = "one."
182. Fractions. In describing a fraction of anything the Possessive Adjective is used.
half a bag jdniad badked
give me a quarter of the camel hashi wahhdeda i si
a third of that belongs to me inta dalolked ban lehahai
5. The Pronouns and Pronominal Adjectives. (a) Persons.
183. The 2nd persons, singular and plural, are each strictly used according to the number of persons addressed. If only one person is spoken to, the 2nd sing, must be used.
There are two forms of the 1st person plural,
-einu, innagu (possess, -en) (inclusive form) include the 1st and 2nd, or 1st, 2nd, and 3rd persons ;
-annu, annagu (possess, -aya) (exclusive form) refer only to 1st and 3rd persons, and are not used when the 2nd person is included.
Iliahhlna, annagunalllahhayaga, innagu Illahhenabu nokhda, your God and our God is the God of both of us.
184. The pronoun of the 3rd person singular has masculine and feminine forms. As the 3rd pers. fern. sing, and 3rd pers. plur. are the same, there is no question as to which pronoun is to be used in reference to a feminine plural. Where reference is made to a plural noun with the masculine article, when the pronoun is used in the presence of the noun, either singular or plural form may be used (see § 164 sqq.).
(b) Simple Personal Pronouns.
185. The Subjective Personal Pronouns (§ 53) are usually expressed with the verb, in addition to a nominal subject. They may be in their simplest form -an, -ad, etc., suffixed to any word in the sentence, or may be combined with the particles, wa, ba, ya, in the forms wan, ban, yan, etc.
yan, yad, etc., and ya ? are often lengthened into ay an, ayad, etc., and aya P or ayo P, but these seem to have no special meaning or use.
104 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES
186. When the simple form is attached to a word ending in a vowel, this final vowel is usually dropped in speaking, especially in the conjunctions gorti, halki, hadi, etc.
gortasu yidi then he said
inankuse gSnyu (genyo-u) lehyahai but the boy has a mare
gorm'u (gorma-u) yimada P when does he come ?
kolk'annu (kolki-annu) 'ollki aragnei when we saw the army
nagti Suldank'u (Suldanka-u) la he made friends with sahhebei the Sultan's wife
187. As stated in Accidence (§ 54), wan, etc., is only used at the beginning of a sentence, while ban, yan, etc., are never used at the beginning but only in the middle, and usually as close to the verb as possible.
wan, ban, yan, are not used in Dependent or Relative clauses, the simple suffixed form only being found, attached to the con- junction, or, in Relative Adjectival clauses, where there is no relative pronoun, to the antecedent.
ninkad u yedei yimi the man you called has come
188. The objective pronouns (§ 60) are placed between the subjective and the verb.
la'ag ban ku slneya I will give you money
gormu idin no (na-u) direi ? when did he send you to us ?
"it," "him," are usually omitted in Somali.
i si give it to me u gei faraska take%him the horse
(here u is the particle and not the pronoun, cf. § 125).
189. When there is more than one verb in a sentence whose subjects are the same person, the pronoun is omitted with the second verb as in English. But if the subjects of the two verbs are different, the forms anna, adna, isna, etc., or aniguna, etc., are used (§ 56).
gortasan ka daba so'odei o so ghobtei, then I followed after him and caught him.
kolkasan so marei, isna halkasu si so'odei, then I came this way, and he went on there.
190. The Emphatic forms (§ 55) may be used followed by the simple pronouns or not.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS 105
anigu wa shakheineya I am working
anigu ddlada ban ka sha- as for me, I am working for khelneya the Government
/ myself, etc., are translated by certain words meaning "self," with the Possessive adjective. naf-ti life (ghud-di sole, single mhb-hi spirit)
anigu naftaida ku arkei I saw you myself
naftaidan ka shakheista I work for myself
annagu ruhhayaga magaloda we have seen the town our- yannu so aragnei selves
191. To do a thing for oneself is expressed by the derivative verbs in so (cf. § 121).
samei make sameiso make for yourself
Ibi buy Ibso buy for yourself
192. The compound forms wahhan, wahhad, etc., and mahhan, mahhad, etc., are important (§§ 57, 58).
The Somali likes to be very careful that he has the listener's attention, before he says what he has to say, and the forms wahhan, etc., serve to introduce a quotation or statement of an event, preparing the listener for the nature of the statement to follow. Thus in quoting a remark, after several interjections, as warya ! i degeiso ! kddi, he will proceed with, ninkasu yidi, wuhhu yidi, . . . that man said, this is what he said, . . . and then will follow what he really did say.
These forms may be used with any kind of verb.
gortasannu tagnei, wahhannu tagnei, Olesan, then we went, this is where we went to, Olesan.
They are nearly always used with verbs such as ddn, malei. wahhan ddneya, inan manta tago I want to go to-day wahhan u maleineya, inu arari I think he is going to ddno run away
193. The 2nd person of this compound form is used to introduce instructions as to what a mau is to do, followed by the Aorist indicative of the verb, as in the common expression to an interpreter (cf. § 217).
wahhad tidahhda this is what you are to say
wahhad yesha this is what you are to do
106 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES
194. mahhan, etc., are interrogative forms.
mahhad ddnesa P what do you want ?
mahhan y£la P what am I to do ?
195. Followed by u, ku, these pronouns mean, 'Why V 'This is why.'
wahhas mahhad u tidi ? why did you say that ?
wahhan ku idi this is why I said it
mahhad u ddnesa hadig P what do you want rope for ? I
wahhan ku doneya, inan want it to tie up the things
ghalabka ku hedhedo with
If the verb after wahhan u, or mahhan u, etc., is negative, the verb wah is used (see Conjugation, § 117).
mahhad igu sheg weida ? why do you not tell me ?
not, mahhad igu shegi maysid ?
wahhan kugu shSgi wai this is why I do not tell you
196. The pronoun iss is both Reflexive and Reciprocal, wu iss dilei he killed himself
wa iss leineyan they are fighting together
iss is used with ku and ka in special idioms (§ 248).
(c) The Suffixes.
197. The Definite Article suffix has already been dealt with in the Accidence and Syntax (§§ 29, 151 — 154).
The Linking Consonant, which is necessary to all, has also been described in the Accidence (§§ 24 — 27).
198. The three suffixes, Definite Article, Demonstrative and Possessive Adjectives, may each be used alone, or any two or all three may be attached to one noun.
The following are the possible combinations. (a) Demonstrative and Definite Article (§31 (ii)). The latter is attached without a linking consonant, ninkanu, gSdkasa, kolkasi.
(6) Definite Article and Demonstrative (§31 (i)).
The Demonstrative when following the article takes a linking
IMPERSONAL PRONOUNS 107
consonant, which however is always k for masculine words, and t for feminine words. Only the a form of article is used, ninkakan, ghorigakan, gabaddatan.
(c) Possessive and Definite Article (§ 32).
The Possessive adjective always requires a definite article suffix, except with names of relationship. The 1st and 2nd sing, and 1st (exclusive) plur. are the only persons which take the linking consonant.
ghalabkaiga, holahagu, ninkai, inantlsi, etc.
(d) Possessive and Definite Article and Demonstrative. The Demonstrative may be added to the above.
aurkaigakan this camel of mine
shukhulklsakan this work of his
(d) Impersonal Pronouns.
199. All the suffixes may be used independently as pronouns with the linking consonant k or t (§§ 62, 63). The Definite Article may be attached to the Demonstrative or Possessive Pronoun.
ki weina the big one
kan ma aurkaigi ba P is this my camel ?
tan kaleh this other one
tasu wa mid that is one
kayaga ba wawein ours are the biggest
tlsi wa ta his is there " There it is " is translated by wa ta, or wa ka.
200. All the suffixes have the same form whether attafthed to a singular or a plural noun, but the Demonstrative and Possessive Pronouns have special forms in the plural :
kuan, tuan ; kuer, tuer ; kuas, tuas ; kuaigi, kuagi, etc.
The plural form of the Def. Article pronoun is kuer, or kua, kui.
The latter may take the Demonstrative suffix, as kuakan, kuakas.
(e) The Possessive Adjective.
201. The Possessive Adjective has certain special functions, (i) It translates the Possessive case (§ 45).
ninki akhalklsi the man's house
habarta ninked the old woman's husband
108
SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES
(ii) It is used with adverbial nouns to form Prepositions (§ 132).
sandukhi dushlsi on the top of the box
meska hostlsi underneath the table
joniada gudaheda inside the bag
Such possessives, used with adverbs alone, translate a personal pronoun governed by a preposition.
hortlna in front of you
dehhddda between them
sidada like you
(iii) Where in English a personal pronoun is qualified by a numeral, in Somali the numeral takes the possessive adjective, labadayada we two
afartini you four
In the same way the possessive adjective is used with indefinite pronouns (§§ 67 and 206).
intina k&leh the rest of you
The difference must be noticed between the examples, labadaidi aur, or labadi aurtaidi my two camels aurtaidi laba two of my camels
(iv) It is used with the following words :
run right bein lie
wa run it is right wa bein it is a lie
wa runtai I am right wa beintai I am lying
wa runta thou art right wa beinta thou art lying
wa runtls he is right wa beintis he is lying
wa runted she is right wa beintdd she is lying
wa runtSn we are right wa beint&n we are lying
wa runtaya we are right wa beintaya we are lying
wa runtin ye are right wa beintin ye are lying
wa runtbd they are right wa beintdd they are lying
(/) The Interrogative Pronoun and Adjective.
202. -e may be used either as a suffix (Interrog. Adj.) or as an Interrogative Pronoun, with the consonants k and t.
akhalke P what house ?
ke ? which one ?
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS 109
•ma is only used as a suffix (cf. § 65). ninma ? what man ?
ninma ku shdgei ? what man told you ?
ya ? ay a ? ayo ? what ? who ? whom ? (cf. § 185). ya ku slyei ? who gave it to you ?
ayad araktei P whom did you see ?
mahha ? what ? (objective).
mahhad donesa ? what do you want ?
mahhad ku falesa P what are you doing it for ?
-ma suffixed to a pronoun, means " which of ? " idinma ? which of you ?
annama ? which of us ?
kuma ? who ? (impersonally)
203. The Possessive Pronoun and Possessive Interrogative Pronoun may be formed with the verb root leh having (cf. § 116).
aniga leh it is mine (or ana leh)
isaga leh it is his
etc.
These are more idiomatic than wa kaigi, wa klsa. yaleh ? kumaleh ? whose ? faraskan yaleh P whose is this horse ?
(g) Indefinite Pronouns and Adjectives.
204. (i) la is a pure pronoun, and is used to translate the passive voice of the verb (see § 118).
205. (ii) Substantival words, "some," "any," "all," "alone" (§§ 67, 68).
nin ba yimi someone has come
'id ma ku taghan P does anyone know you ?
wahh ma donesa P do you want anything ?
sadehh ghof ba dintei three persons have died
'idla unaccompanied, alone
halkan ghar ba yal some lie here
daur ba hadei some are left
daur iyo labaton twenty odd
110
SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES
in rSg ba jdgta inti saka timi nin hebel war, hebel O P
some men are here
those that came this morning
a certain man
you, what's your name ?
206. When used with a Personal Pronoun in a descriptive sense, the Possessive adjective is suffixed (cf. § 201 (iii)).
intlna kaleh
gharkdda
ninki keligi tegei
annagu keligayaga sameinei
gidigdd, damantod
kulligeni
isagu goniglsi si so'odei
the rest of you
those few
the man went alone
we did it by ourselves
all of them
all of us
he went on separately
207. weli-gi never, is used in the same way with possessives. weligai maan arag I have never seen it weligln arki maysan you will never see it weliga hau nokhon never do it again
208. "Some," "a few," etc., in a partitive sense are trans- lated as follows.
intlna ghar ba hhun some of you are bad
inta barlska ba hadei, or thus much of rice is left inta barlskaah
(iii) Indefinite Adjectives.
209. " Many," " little," " few," " other," " every," " all." These are usually used qualifying an indefinite pronoun (only
badan and yer agree with the Definite Article).
wahh badan o barls la kali bring us plenty of rice
wahh ka yer i si give me less
rag badan raga badan
ragi badna
fardo yer
nin un, mid un
inta kaleh aur gdniah u sara
fardu o dan
many men
all those men (i.e. those many
men) the many men a few horses
any man, anything at all put the rest on a separate camel all the horses
MOODS AND TENSES 111
wahh hoga o ragas a few of those men
in yer o sanadukhda a few of those boxes
nefka gonigaah that animal apart
210. The Indefinite Pronouns are made negative by the suffix -na, but the verb is also used in the negative form.
ninna ma iman no one has come
'idna i ma arkin no one saw me
midna maan tabin I did not touch one
wahh is used with ba :
wahhba doni mayo I do not want anything
wahhba heli mayso you will get nothing
6. The Verb.
(a) The Moods and Tenses.
211. The Imperative Mood has only one tense, and expresses a command, wish, or permission.
The 2nd pers. sing, is the Verb Root, from which are formed all other parts of the verb.
The 2nd pers. plur. is formed by adding -a (2nd conjugation -da) tag, taga; jogso, jogsoda; shakhei, shakheya.
For the other persons the Aorist Subjunctive tense is used, with particles an (1st pers.) and ha (3rd pers.) in the Affirmative. an tagno let us go
ha yimado let him come
212. The particle bal is very commonly used with the Im- perative, but is hardly translatable.
bal en ego let me look then
bal kali come then
It is not used with the 3rd person.
213. The Negative Imperative may be emphasized by the particle ba :
ha t6gin ba see that you don't go at all
or by weliga never
w£liga wahhas ha tabin never you touch that
112 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES
214. The Infinitive is only used with auxiliary verbs,
ddn will jir be accustomed to laha would kar be able
wa ku shegi ddna I am going to tell you
halkas an fadlyl jirei that is where I used to live
{Note that the accent is placed on the last syllable of the Infinitive before jir, and, in the 2nd and 3rd Conjugations, before laha.)
ainkas ma ghob6n lahaid P would you have done like that ? ma so'on karta P can you walk ?
The auxiliary and principal verbs are treated as one, and are not separated by any particles at any time.
ku ma arki karo I cannot see you
Somalidu ainkas ma ghobon Somalis cannot do like that karto
In the Future Definite, the auxiliary is often dropped, wa yeli I am going to do it
u shSgi I will tell him
The Infinitive is the basis from which all Imperfect tenses and most Negative tenses are formed.
215. The Verb-Adjective and Verb-Noun have been described in Accidence (§§ 15 (b), 72).
216. Aorist Indicative.
This tense ordinarily expresses a habitual or customary act, without the emphasis on the habit implied in the Present Habitual.
Siraklshu timir ma 'unta P do officers eat dates ?
Tomalidu iyo Midgu wa iss Tomals and Midgans intermarry
gursada
rSrkayaga gu walba 'elasha- my family is accustomed to draw
tan ka so damin jira from these wells every summer
217. It also indicates what is to be done, or can be done :
hagge 16 mara Burao P how (by what way) does one go
to Burao ? hilibmagalodamalagalbsoda? is meat to be bought in the town? haggeinu tagna ? wahhaidin where are we to go ? you are to taktan, Bohotleh. go to Bohotleh (cf. §§ 192, 193).
MOODS AND TENSES 113
wahhad tidahhda you are to say this, or, do you say
this? ma tura P am I to throw it away ? or, shall
I throw it away? ma ku kena ? shall I bring it to you ?
218. The 3rd person of this tense is used to translate the Present Participle, or relative clause.
nin af yaghan a man knowing the language
shimbir forida a singing bird
isago gddka hurda while he was asleep by the tree
219. The Preterite expresses a completed act in past time, shalei bu yimi he came yesterday
Farah i shdgei intanad iman Farah had told me before you
came
220. Or an act just completed at the present time (usually found with wa) (§ 142 <I).
sirkalku wa tegei manta the officer has gone to-day
shalei sirkalku tegei the officer went yesterday
221. The Present Continuative expresses either a continuous action in present time, or an intention or willingness, as in English.
hagge t6gesa P where are you going ?
akhal ban dfseya I am building a house
nag ban gursaneya I am going to marry a wife
la'ag ban ku slneya I will give you money
mahhad iga slsonesa ? what will you give me for it ?
ma garanesa ? do you understand (what I am
saying) ?
but, af Somali ma garata ? do you understand Somali ? (Aorist)
222. The Past Continuative expresses a continuous, or incompleted action, in past time.
faras ban fuleyei I was riding a horse
223. The Future Definite is a deliberate statement of what is about to happen.
wa tegi ddna I am going to go
mahhad y&li dbnta ? what are you going to do ?
k. 8
114 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES
224. The Present and Past Habitual express a usual occur- rence or habit.
subahh walba Farah ba auski Farah usually fetches the grass
so ghadi jira every morning
bSrigi hdre Somalidu fardo formerly the Somalis used to
badan lahain jirtei possess many ponies
225. The Conditional is used whenever a condition exists, whether expressed or understood. It refers to all times, and cannot be used except in the Principal sentence.
wa ku sin laha I should, or should have given you
hadan arko wa garan laha if I saw him I should recognise
him
226. The Potential expresses suggestion, possibility, or proba- bility, and is often used euphemistically for the Future Definite. It is very common in songs.
mala iman ddne he may probably come
insha Allahh wa la hele please God, we may find it
an walalka dilne we might kill your brother
iman ddne iyo iman mayo, he may come or not, I don't know
war ma hayo
wahha kasta ad araktide, ha whatever you may see, do not stop
jogson
in kasta ha jirte, wa gadeya however far it may be, I will
reach it
227. The Subjunctive tenses are only used in Subordinate or Relative clauses, and will be dealt with in the sections referring to them.
(b) The Persons.
228. The 2nd pers. and 3rd fern. sing, are denoted by t, or s, in the tense termination.
The 1st pers. plur. is denoted by n.
The 1st pers. plur. of the verb has only one form for both the inclusive and exclusive pronouns.
The 2nd pers. plur. must always be used in addressing more than one person.
NEGATIVE TENSES 115
Concord of verbs with nouns has been described already under Syntax of Nouns (§ 165).
229. The Emphatic pronouns anigu, aniga, etc. (§ 55) have different constructions.
After the -u form ;
the verb is regularly inflected to agree with the various
persons, the particle wa is usually employed in Affirmative Sentences, the particle ma, in Interrogative sentences, follows the pronoun. anigu wa tegeya I am going
adigu wa t6gesa thou art going
Idinku ma t6gesan ? are you going ?
iyagu t6gi mayan they are not going
After the -a form ;
the 3rd pers. sing, is used for all persons except the 1st pers.
plur. the particle ba is used in Affirmations, the Interrogative particle ma precedes the pronoun, aniga ba shakhdineya it is I who am working
adiga ba shakhSineya it is thou who art working
annaga keligaya ba hadnei we alone were left ma adiga arkei P was it thou who sawest ?
ma iyaga t§geya ? is it they who are going ?
(c) Formation of Negative Tenses.
230. The Negative particles are,
ha used in 2nd pers. Imperative, yan „ 1st and 3rd pers. Imperative, ma „ Indicative mood, in Statements, an ,, Subjunctive mood, Dependent or Relative clauses, and
Questions.
Forms of the Verb.
231. (i) The Aorist Indicative (statements) is conjugated like the Definite Subjunctive Affirmative, with the particle ma, and no Personal Pronouns.
ma j6go he is not here
8—2
116 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES
232. (ii) Conditional 1 n is added to the Affirmative Poten- and Potential. J tial. This is conjugated with ma
and the Personal Pronouns.
maan garten I should not understand
233. (iii) Imperative, Preterite and Aorist Subjunctive (state- ments), n is added to the Infinitive (in the 2nd and 3rd Conjuga- tions the Infinitive already ends in n, and is therefore unaltered).
This is not conjugated in the persons, except in the Imperative, in which the 2nd pers. plur. takes -a in the 1st conjugation, -ina in the 2nd and 3rd conjugations.
ha shSgin (2nd sing.) do not tell
ha dilina (2nd plur.) do not kill
ha jdgsonina (2nd plur.) do not stop
yanu (contracted to yu) dilin let him not kill
yanai ( „ yai) gursan let them not marry
maan tegin I did not go
inanad t6gin ban ddneya I want you not to go
maainu so'on karin we were unable to walk
234. (iv) The Continuative tenses of the Indicative and Subjunctive have already been described in § 92.
235. (v) In all Negative Interfogative tenses (except the Conditional), the particle an is used.
Simple tenses (Aorist, Preterite, Aorist Subj.) have the simple, Infinitive, form as in (iii).
Continuative tenses have the form used in Past Continuative (statements) and Continuative Subjunctive.
mianan ku sh£gin ? do, or, did I not tell you ?
mianad Sirkal la jogin P are, or, were you not with an
officer ? mianu imaninin P is, or, was he not coming ?
Imisa nin an teginin P how many men are not coming ?
Imisa nin busta an lahain P how many men have no blanket ?
PARTICLES
117
7. The Particles.
(a) Order.
236. The Verbal Particles and the Personal Pronouns are all placed in front of the verb. Where more than one are found to the same verb, they follow a strict rule as to their relative positions, having, so to speak, separate values, or affinities with the verb, so that the particle or pronoun having the greatest affinity with the verb is placed immediately before the verb, the others preceding it in the order of their affinities, as in the following table.
(A has the greatest affinity, H the least.)
H |
G |
F |
E |
D |
C |
B |
A |
|
ma? (§ 145) wa |
an (Neg.) |
Pers. Pron. (subj.) |
Pers. Pron. (obj.) |
U ku |
ma (Neg.) (§ 145) |
SO si |
kala wada |
VERB |
ba |
ka |
|||||||
ya |
la |
Examples, H G F E D B A
mi-an-ad na la so wada kahain ?
B A so kala diga
F E C B
lei (la i) ma so dlbin
H D
ma kii jira P D c ku ma jiro
FED
mahhad igu sheg-weidei P
did you not bring all with us ?
put down here separately
it has not been handed me
is it there ?
it is not there
why did you not tell me ?
(6) Uses.
237. Particles have been divided (§§ 124—127) into Verbal and Conjunctive.
The Syntax of Conjunctive Particles will be found in the section on Coordinate and Subordinate sentences (Part iv).
118 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES
The Verbal Particles may be Adverbial or Prepositional. Ad- verbial particles, as the name implies, qualify the verb. (i) They indicate Affirmation, Interrogation or Negation (ha, ma, an, yan, wa, ba, ya). These have all their special uses and constructions, (ii) They may correspond to certain simple adverbs or prepositions.
The latter are used in close relation with a verb, and are an essential feature of the language. By suitable combinations a number of changes may be rung, a variety of meanings given to one verb, and expressions which would otherwise require paraphrasing put more concisely.
(c) Adverbial Particles (wada, kala, si, so).
238. wada (all, whole) may be used with the verb alone, or in addition to the indefinite parts of speech, kulli, gidi, 6 dan, etc.
sanadiikhdi 6 dan wada k6na bring all the .boxes to-
gether Somalidu 6 dan wa ku wada taghan all the Somalis know you
239. kala apart, in different ways
siraklshi iyo aurti wa kala the officers are travelling apart
dahhaisa from the camels
side la kala garta P how does one distinguish them ?
ninki hhuma iyo ninki wanak- do you know the difference be-
sana ma kala taghan P tween a good and a bad man ?
wa kala jerebeya fardaha I am trying the ponies (for
comparison)
It may be used with verbs, adjectives, or nouns (cf. § 177). kala bihhi unfold, expand
kala ddro take your choice
wa kala dereyan they are not as fast as each
other wa kala der they are different lengths
240. si, so (§ 125) are used with the Verb Nouns as well as with other parts of the verb.
si so'odki the march out
so nokhodki the return
PARTICLES 119
(d) Prepositional particles (ku, u, ka, la).
241. These cannot be treated as true prepositions, as they do not govern a noun, but only qualify the meaning of a verb in such a way as to render a preposition unnecessary.
tag go Farah u tag go to (approach) Farah
mesha ka taga go from (leave) that place u tag go to (him), and ka tag depart, may be used alone, without any object being expressed.
These particles are not attached to the noun governed by the English preposition to which they correspond, while on the other hand they cannot be separated from the verb by any part of speech except other particles or a personal pronoun.
Examples,
ka taga mesha leave that place
sandukha (the box) ghalabka take out the things from the
ka bihhi box
mahhad ku falesa hadiga what are you doing with that
(rope) P rope ?
wahhba lagu ma falo nothing is done with (it)
These particles are so much a part of the verb with which they are used that in many cases new meanings may be derived.
Example,
ka tag (leave, depart from) is used in the sense of leaving an object at a place.
lehh nin ba mesha laga tegei, literally, one went from six men there, i.e. six men were left there.
haggu ka tegei gela ? where did he go from the camels ? i.e. where did he leave the camels ?
Other similar cases will be quoted under each particle.
242. ku (i) at, upon, in, into.
magaloda agt&da bu ku arkei near the town he saw six girls
lehh gabdod o 'el ku maid6neya washing at a well gdd bu ku hedna he was tied to a tree
nin faras ku jdga a man on a horse
120
SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES
'anihi yu sibrar ku lissei (ii) with, by means of. ha mindi ku tabin wahhba laugu ma falo banadukhdi bei ugu dishei
the milk he milked into a skin
do not touch it with a knife nothing is done with it they shot them with the rifles
243. ku, or u for, on account of, for the sake of.
244.
he is gone for water
then they died of thirst
I am going to kill the mare for
your stepmother I am owed two rupees by you why did you go ?
u is used with certain nouns in an adverbial sense.
blyo bu ku maghanyahai kolkasei harad u bakhtlyen genyoda yan u ghaleya ayoda
laba rubod ban ugu lehahai mahhad u taktei P
speak up sit back go quickly
go to the officer teach
where have you come from ? take the thing out of the box my flocks have been looted from me
wherever I looked, I could not find it kolkei mesha ka dgen, wa ka when they looked there, they
waiyen could not find her
mahhad ka baghatei P what are you afraid of?
ka tag go from, i.e. leave, is also used in the sense of leaving a
thing at a place. lehh nin ba m£sha laga t6gei six men were left there fnanki ba Inanti uga t6gei wan the boy left the girl a ram
across, over, through. ka talab step across
ka bdd jump over
ad u hadal dib u fadlso dakhso u tag
u to (a person). sirkalka u tag udig
245. ka from, out of, off hagge ka timi P
ghalabki sandukha ka so ghad hdlahaigi leiga hadei
Idiomatic uses of ka. mel walba an ka ddneyo, ka wai
PARTICLES 121
hdggi darta bei ka so dustei she came through the hole in
the wall about, concerning, as to.
war ma ka haisa ninka P have you news of the man ?
war ka ma hayo I have no news (of him),
dolada ban ka shakhdineya I am working for the Govern- ment
lug ban ka jabei I have broken my leg
mahhad uga hadlesa ? what are you grumbling at ?
manhad iga sls6nesa P what will you give me for it ?
246. kaga upon, against
kolkasu madaha kaga diftei then he struck it upon the head
wahhai rlyotei lyadu laba shim- she dreamed that two birds sat
birod labada lugod kaga jbgta upon her two legs
kaga rid shoot
nin sirkal rasas ba ku da'dei, a bullet struck an officer, and
b6dodi kaga da'dei hit him on the thigh
247. la together with
In addition to having the simple meaning of the preposition, la is used in certain euphemistic and other phrases, la tag }
la so'o I steal, loot (literally, go off with) la bdb J
la kali bring (a thing)
la sorod (so 6rod) bring (a person)
la jbg halt, cause to halt
la bahso escape with, save
la jbg, la fadiso live with (as a servant)
248. The reflexive pronoun iss is used with the particles ka, ku, u. It is usually contracted to 'ss ka, 'ss ku (pronounced ska, sku).
249. iss ka, 'ss ka,
used in abrupt commands.
'ss ka tag go away !
'ss ka bahha get away with you !
'ss ka eg look out !
'ss ka da never mind !
122
SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES
With other tenses it may be translated by "just," " simply." wa 'ss ka fadlya I am just sitting down
wa 'ss ka dintei he simply died (i.e. a natural
death)
250. iss ku, 'ss ku, iss u
iss ku dowada !
'ss ku lablab
'ss ku tbl
iss u gei
iss u dar, or 'ss ku dar
tollollki wa iss u jiran
It is the opposite of kala (cf. sidei iss ku yihin P 'ss ku mid 'ss ku toll 'ss ku aba 'ss ku lb
with one another, together.
close together ! fold up together sew together bring together mix together
the tribes are all together (mixed up) §§177 and 239).
how do they compare ?
the same
of the same tribe
(children) of the same father
of the same price
PART IV. SYNTAX OF COMPOUND SENTENCES.
251. Compound Sentences consist of more than one simple sentence, and may be Coordinate or Subordinate.
A. Coordinate Sentences.
252. Coordinate sentences are principal sentences, not de- pendent on one another, but connected by simple copulative or conjunctive particles, as "and," "or," "but," and having their verbs in the same mood.
Conjunctive Particles.
253. iyo and (used only between two substantives). Farah iyo aniga Farah and I
or, in the following cases : laba iyo sadehh two or three, i.e. a few
hadad takto iyo hadi kaleh if you go or otherwise
inei fdgtahai iyo in k&leh so find out if it is far or other- hubso wise
254. o and (not used to connect substantives).
kolkas askarrti dibadda u bahh- then the soldiers turned out dei o '6ridei and drove them away
It is also used, (i) between two epithets governing one noun. niman badan o wawein many big men
laba faras o wan&ksan two good horses
laba askari o faras ku jdgta two soldiers on horseback
124 SYNTAX OF COMPOUND SENTENCES
(ii) with the Indicative tenses of the verb to translate the English participles.
wahhai arken inanti o dlrti they saw the girl sitting in the
fadida trees
rerkbdi o la da'ei bu arkei he found his family looted
hblihlsi an ka ghadno, isago let us loot his flocks while he
(isaga o) shirka ku maghan- is away at the council
yahai
(iii) as meaning because, wa lo takhslrei o iyagu shiik- they were punished because hulki ghobon waiyen they would not do the work
(iv) in the idiom o mahai without (Conditional). ha s6 nokhon o bandukhi heli do not come back without
mahai finding the rifle
aniga o fasahhi mahai ha ka do not leave the enclosure
t6gina heroda without my leave
255. -na and, usually introduces a new subject. adiguna mahhad donesa P and you, what do you want ? dabadedna and afterwards
midna wa wanaksanyahai, one is good and one is bad midna wa hhunyahai
-na followed by a negative verb means " no."
ninna ma jbgo no one is here
midna ma tegin not one went
256. For other particles, see § 127, and Syntax of Compound Sentences, Final and Conditional.
B. Subordinate Sentences.
257. A Subordinate sentence is one which depends on, or represents some part of speech in, the principal sentence, and is connected with it by a conjunction or relative pronoun. It may represent
Substantive, Adjective, or Adverb.
ADJECTIVAL SENTENCES
125
1. General Rules.
258. In all Subordinate sentences, if the verb is in Past time, the Indicative mood is used, except in Conditional sentences. In Present or Future time the Indicative or Subjunctive may be used.
The Subjunctive is used to express uncertainty, or what is in the mind of the speaker, while the Indicative is confined to definite facts.
The negative particle in all Subordinate clauses is an (cf. § 274, note).
2. Adjectival Sentences.
259. In English these sentences are usually introduced by a relative pronoun, "who," "whom," "which," etc., but the Somali has no such pronoun.
The clause therefore follows directly after the Antecedent, as in many cases in English.
Where the English relative pronoun would be the subject of the relative clause, no personal pronoun is used in Somali as subject to the verb in the clause.
nimanka, halkb fadlyan, u yed
askarrti, hujuddas samelsei, takhslr 'ulus bei lehdahai
ninki, aminkan1 arkeyei, haggu2 ka'ei ?
fardihi, shalei ni^jorku Ibshei3, wa la'ag badna4
hdlihi, saka la kenei, ma la so wada arbriyei ?
dadka, gellsi la da'ei, wa yimi
ninki, ai5 akhalklsa fadidei, yu ku yidi
call those men, who are sitting
over there the soldiers, who committed
that crime, deserve a heavy
punishment
where has the man gone, whom
I saw just now ? the ponies the major bought
yesterday cost a lot of money
have the animals, which were
brought this morning, been
all watered? the people, whose camels were
looted, have come he said to the man, whose
house she was in
1 foajafa an. 2 hagge u.
3 Cf. note to Table III. § 105. * Cf. § 114.
6 Pronounced as one word ninkyai. ai=she.
126
SYNTAX OF COMPOUND SENTENCES
wilki, an waranki ka ghadei,
wa adaneya ninki, an hbla lahain, wahhba
ma taro faraski, an blyo badan ddnin,
biladkan ku wanaksanyahai1
the boy I took the spear from
is angry the man, who has no property,
is of no use the horse, which does not want
much water, is good for this
country
260. The particle e, followed by the Indicative mood, is used apparently as a relative pronoun, where the latter is the subject of the verb in the clause, usually when the antecedent is also qualified by another epithet, such as an adjective or numeral.
shanti fnan, e gabdihi gursadei, the five boys, who married the
u yimaden Inanka H. B., e gabaddaidi ye-
reid gursadei, yan u dlbei
hukumka
girls, came I have given authority to the boy H. B., who married my young daughter
261. The Conjunction o is used with the Indicative mood to translate the English participles, or an adjectival clause, when it is literally only a coordinate sentence.
wahhan arkei lehh gabdod o 'el
ku maid6neya wahhai arakta labadi shim-
birod, o labadi lugod kaga
joga rerkddi o la da'ei bu arkei, o
'oil da'ei wahha ugu yimi afar nin, intas
o midna an u garanin
I saw six girls washing at a
well s"he sees the two birds sitting
upon her two legs
he found his family looted,
looted by an enemy there came to her four men,
none of whom recognised her
262. The Subjunctive mood is used in Present or Future tenses, where the relative clause refers to a group, clasSj sort, or purpose.
ninki shukhul dbneyo ha yi- the man that wants work let
mado him come
geli la ibfneyo mid ka kahhaiso take for yourself one of the
camels that are for sale
1 Pronounced wan&ks6nyahal.
ADVERBIAL SENTENCES 127
mindi la kali an kibisti ku bring a knife for me to cut
gogoiyo the bread with
blyo an 'abo i ken bring me water to drink
263. "He who," "they who," etc., are translated by the definite pronouns, ki, kuer, etc.
ki shalei la Ibsotei wa h6g the one that was bought yester- weinyahai day is strong
kuer saka yfmaden wa jdgan those who came this morning
are here
kuer an busta lahain, iyo kuer those who have no blanket, lehyihin and those who have
264. "That which," "something which," "what," are translated by wahh, wihhi.
wahhan ku idi yel do what I told you
wahhad kento i tus shew me what you bring
wahh lagu fadlsto i ken bring me something to sit on
wihhi ad heshei i si give me what you found
3. Adverbial Sentences.
265. (a) Temporal and Locative sentences.
These are essentially adjectival clauses qualifying an adverb of Time or Place,
meshi akhalki la diseya bu he is sitting where the house
fadlya is being built
mahhad iss tidi markad wahhas what were you thinking of when
sameinesei P you did that ?
kolkan imaneyei libahh ban while I was coming I saw a
arkei lion
meshian 'ashodi doweida jdgei unload the kit where I stopped
ghalabka diga the other day
266. The Subjunctive is required when referring to any future time, or when the sense is general or indefinite.
kolki hukumka leidin1 shego when you are given an order, wahhba weidina* don't ask questions
i la ldin.
2 Negative particle ha may be omitted after negative words, as wahhba, wellga, etc.
128
SYNTAX OF COMPOUND SENTENCES
kolku yimado i so sheg when he comes, tell me
mel wanaksan-einu degno so go and find a good place for ddn us to camp
267. " while " is translated by inti or o.
intei habasha ghodeyen, yei ka
gurgiiratei fsago hajki ku maghana, ya
nagtlsi dadabtei
while they were digging the grave, she crawled away
while he was away on the pilgrimage, his wife had a dream
268. until, as far as, inti.
intan so nokhdo mesha jdgsoda wait there until I come back fadi inti shekada damaneso wait until the story is finished
intad so'on karto so'o go as far as you can
269. before that, intan (inti-an).
(Here an is the neg. part., and the Verb is used in the negative.)
intanan so nokhon ha ka t6gina don't go away before I come
back inteidinan deginin, ana wa idin I will catch you up before you gadeya halt
270. after, kolki...dabaded. kolkan Badwein ka tegei, da- baded mahha ka da'ei P
kolkad BSrberah timid, daba-
d£dto wa la helei kolkad sida yesho, dabad6d
akhalka gal
after I left Badwein, what happened ? (When I left B., afterwards what happened ?)
it was found after you came to Berberah
after you have done that, enter the house
271. (b) Final sentences : " in order that," in.
Always used with the Subjunctive. magalodan' ghobdneya inan I am going to Berberah to barls iyo timir so dbnto fetch rice and dates
magiloda an.
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 129
nimanka igu yeda, inan la call those men that I may
hadlo talk to them
mesha 'ss ka dumo, inan lagu hide there that you may not
arkin be seen
272. (c) Conditional Sentences. If, hadi.
A Conditional sentence consists of two parts,
the Protasis, or Condition or Assumption, and the Apodosis, or Conclusion.
273. (i) Assumptions. Indicative mood in both.
hadad moskhln tahai, mahhad if you are a pauper (as you
u shakheison weida ? say), why do you not work ?
hadanad moskhln ahain, mahh- if you are not a pauper, why
ad u shakhefsata ? do you work ?
hadad magaloda tegesa, Sul- if you are (really) going to the
danka u tag town, go to the Sultan
hadanu imaninin, sugi mayo if he is not coming, I will not
wait hadad jdgtei, mahhad ark- if you were there, what did
esei P you see ?
hadanad jdgin, sidad dgtahai ? if you were not there, how do
you know ?
274. (ii) Future Definite Condition, or Promise. Protasis — Aorist Subjunctive.
Apodosis — Future Indicative or Imperative, hadu yimado, u shegi ddna if he comes, I am going to tell
him hadad tegi weido1 (or hadanad if you do not go, you will be tegin), wa lagu ghoboneya caught
275. (iii) Present or Past Unfulfilled condition {Imaginary). Protasis — Aorist Subjunctive.
Apodosis — Conditional. hadeinu Berberah jdgno, la'agti- if we were in Berberah, I should an ku sin laha give you the money
1 The verb wan (§ 117) is often used in Conditional sentences to translate the negative verb, in place of the particle an with a negative tense.
130 SYNTAX OF COMPOUND SENTENCES
hadaneinu BSrberah jbgin, if we were not in Berberah,
wahha badan maan ku I should not give you so
slyen much
hadad shalei takto, wa u if you had gone yesterday,
ghobon lahaid you would have caught him
hadanad Adan olli jirin, wah- if you had not been living in
has maad garaten Aden, you would not have
understood that
276. (iv) Future Indefinite Condition, or Suggestion.
Protasis — Continuative Subjunctive. Apodosis — Conditional, or Neg. Pres. Continuative. hadannu berrl t§geno, ninki- if we were to go to-morrow,
annu ghob6n lahain we should catch the man
hadanannu teginin, ghobon if we were not to go, we mayno should not catch him
Note. In a long sentence the Conjunction, Neg. Part., and Pronoun, may be split up.
hadiad shukhulka an ddneya if you do not do the work I anad gh6bonin, shukhul- wish, you are no good to kaiga ku ma wanaksanid me
277. Whether... or... is translated by hadi...iyo hadi.... hadad doneso iyo hadanad whether you want to or not, go
ddninin, iss ka tag
or by ama...ama, followed by the Imperative. ama ha samado ama ha hhu- whether it is good or bad, do it mado, yel
278. "unless," "without," may be translated by o...mahai. ha s6 nokhon, bandukhi o heli do not return, without finding
mahai the rifle
279. (d) Causal sentences.
There is no conjunction meaning "because," but o is used in the following way. wa lagu takhslrei o adigu shuk- you were punished because you
hulki ghobon wai would not do the work
wahhan ku adadei, o lyagu laba I was angry, because they were
aa'adod ka ragen two hours late
SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES 131
280. (e) Concessive sentences (although).
There is no conjunction, but they may be translated as the last, or paraphrased.
halkanad tillen, haddana daugi you do not know the road, ma taghanin although you have lived here
281. The conjunctions ending in -soever are Concessive. They may be used with Subjunctive or Potential or Imperative, wihhi kasta ad sameineso, whatever you may be doing,
mesha ka kali come away from there
o is usually added to the Imperative,
wahh kasta makhla-o, ha so whatever you hear, do not
nokhonina come back
dal kasta ghobo-o, si so'o however tired you are, go on
wahh kasta ha ku shego, ha whatever he tells you, do not
makhlin listen
'id kasta ha gursado, wahhba whomsoever he marries, I will
u sin mayo give him nothing
In the following the Potential Tense is used, wahh kasta an arke, jdgson whatever I may see, I will not
mayo stop
in kasta ha ahaden, wa 'eriyena however many they may be,
we will defeat them in kasta ha jirte, wa gadeya however far it may be, I am
going to reach it wahh kasta ad araktide, ha whatever you may see, do not jdgson stop
4. Substantival Sentences.
282. These sentences stand in relation to a Principal sentence, as Substantives, and may be either the subject or object of the principal verb (or an Indefinite Pronoun or Adverbial Noun). They are introduced by in (that), followed by the Subjunctive in Present or Future time, by the Indicative in Past time.
283. (a) As Subject.
in la jedlo ma wanaksana it is not good to be whipped
inad hilibkas 'unto wa haran it is unlawful for you to eat
that meat
9—2
132
SYNTAX OF COMPOUND SENTENCES
284. (b) As Object.
(i) Indirect statement, thought, wish, etc. wahhannu ddnena inad sor we want you to give us food
na slso wahhan ddneya inan Adan
tago, or inan Adan tago ban
ddneya wa u maleineya in rdbku di'i
ddno kolkasu oghadei in rag u yimi
inanti kolkasa wadadki dama'ei inu
araro
I want to go to Aden
I think the rain is going to fall
then he learned that men came
to the girl then the priest tried to run
away
285. (ii) Simple indirect questions.
inu yimi so hubso
bal inei fdgtahai so weidi
inu tSgeyo iyo in kaleh war '
ma hayo moyi inanu fulan oghbn iyo
inarm ddnin
find out if he came
go and ask if it is far
I do not know if he is coming
or not I do not know if he does not
know how to ride or if he
does not want to
286. (iii) Indirect questions, introduced by interrogative pronouns.
'id u yahai so ddn
hadanad oghbn 'iddi goi'sei,
mahhan ku sameyaP wuhhu ddneyo weidi weidi bal wahhai ka bagha-
neyan i sheg wahhai u shakhein
wayen
287. (iv) Indirect questions, introduced by interrogative adverbs.
hdluhu intei yihin ma ku did he tell you how many shegei ? animals there are ?
1 =1 have no news.
find out who he is
if you do not know who cut
them, what am I to do? ask what he wants ask what they are frightened of
tell me why they would not work
ORATIO OBLIQUA 133
so eg inti tambukhi leheg- go and look how big the tent is yahai
meshas int6i jirto war ma how far that place is I do not
hayo know
mel u jiro garan wai I do not know where it is.
gor u si so'6neyo war ma do you know when he is going
haisa P on ?
5. Oratio Obliqua.
288. In narrative there is no oratio obliqua in Somali, but after the verbs, ' say ' ' tell ' (odo, sheg), the oratio recta is re- peated.
The pronouns, wahhan, etc., are generally used.
wuhhu yidi, " libahh ban he said he had seen a lion
arkei "
wuhhu yidi, "wa idin ka he said he would follow on
daba so so'oneya " after you
wahhad na tidi, " gel badan you told us we should get many
beidin h§lesan " camels
wahhad tidahhda, " sor ban tell him I want food
ddneya " wahhad tidahhda, " 'ss ka tell them to go away
taga"
289. In place of wahha, wa ti is often used with the pronouns.
watan ku idi, " s6 nokho " I told you to come back
watad tidi, " 'ss ka j6g " you told me to stay
warakhdi me ? wa ti la gubei where is the letter ? that was
burned
APPENDIX I.
Seasons in Somaliland.
Jilal January — March
(Kalil) April
Gil May— June (S.W. Monsoon)
Hagar July — October (Karif on the coast)
Dair November — December (N.E. Monsoon)
Names of months (corresponding to the Arabic).
Arabic. Somali.
Moharram Dago
Safar Durahh hore
Rabia al Awal Durahh dambe
Rabia al Akhir Rajal hore
Jumad al Awal Rajal dehhe
Jumad al Akhir Rajal dambe
Rajab Sa buha
Shaaban Wa barls
Ramadhan S6n (or Soukad)
Shawal S6n fur
Dhul Kada Sidatal
Dhul Hijjah Arafo
Days of the week are the same as Arabic.
Monday Isnin-ti Friday Jima'-i
Tuesday Salasa-di Saturday Sabti-di
Wednesday Rabuhh-i Sunday Ahad-di
Thursday Khamis-ki
APPENDIX I
135
Times of the day and night. The Arabic times of prayer are freely used.
a.m. 6 |
wa beri ) arorti ' |
sunrise |
> |
||
6—8 |
subahh-di barghaddi hore barisaddi hore |
early grazing early rice |
| |
||
8—9 |
barghad-di barisad-di |
grazing time rice time |
^gelinkahore |
||
9—10 |
barghaddi kululeid |
hot grazing |
|||
10—12 |
marki hadki so |
koreisa |
|||
p.m. 12—2 |
had-ki / gadid-ki ) |
noon |
■ 'asho- |
||
2—3.30 |
duhur-ki |
\ galab-ti, |
|||
3.30—6 |
asar-ki |
- gdlinka |
|||
6 |
makhrib-ki |
sunset j dambe |
|||
6—7 |
fldki |
||||
7—10 |
aweisin-ki |
1 |
|||
10—12 |
sakhdi hore |
||||
a.m. 12—2 2—4 |
sakhdi (dehh) sakhdi dambe |
► haben-ki |
|||
4—6 |
arorti hore ) saladdi > |
||||
J |
|||||
The |
time of day, etc. |
||||
arorta |
in the early morning |
||||
sa ka |
this morning |
||||
galabta |
this evening |
||||
manta |
to-day |
||||
awa |
to-night |
||||
shalei-to |
yesterday |
||||
halei-to |
last night |
||||
haben hore |
the night before last |
||||
shalei galab |
yesterday evening |
||||
dorrad-to |
the day before yesterday |
||||
'ashodi hore | 'ashodi doweidj |
the other day |
||||
berrl-to |
to-morrow |
||||
berri arorta |
to-morrow morning |
||||
sa dambe |
the day after to-morrow |
||||
sa kub |
the day after the day after to-morro1 |
||||
haben dambe |
to-morrow ni |
ght |
APPENDIX II.
la'ag-ti
mushaharo-di
hisab-ti
sarrif-ki
dahab-ki
rubiad-di
rubi-gi
b61ad-di
antln-ti
gambo-di
beisad-di
ardi-di
Money.
money, silver
wages
account
small change
gold
rupee (pi. rubod)
\ rupee, 8 annas
4 annas
2 annas
anna
2 pies
1 pie
Weight.
misan-ki |
weight, scales |
rodol-ki |
pound |
nus rodol |
\ pound |
waghed-dj |
4 oz. |
Measure.
ba'-i "fathom" (roughly 5 ft. 10 in.) used in
measuring rope gedi-gi a camel's march (about 9 miles)
laba gedi a day's march
nus gedi a half march (4 or b miles)
138
APPENDIX III.
A knowledge of the chief tribes of Somalis is important, in order to identify individuals, as, in any official description of a man, the native custom of describing him by name and sub-tribe is adhered to. The relationships of the tribes are also most important in any dealings with the people. These are very confusing at first, as, for instance, three brothers may correctly describe themselves respectively as Abdallah Ismail, Hersi Bareh, and Rer Sugulli, at first sight three different tribes.
The following are only the better known tribes ; for further details, Cox's Genealogies may be consulted.
The inhabitants of the country are divided into
ASHA, or GOB ISHHAK
(Noble birth)
DARUD DIR ESA
GADABURSI SAB (outcast) HAWIYA
TOMAL
MIDGAN
YIBIR
None of these eight tribes have any known relationship with one another, within the history of Somalis as a race, except perhaps the TOMAL, who are said by some to be a branch of the DARUD ; and the DIR, who may be a branch of the ISHHAK.
The ISHHAK are divided into four, or usually five, great divisions, called
HABR AWAL
HABR GERHAJIS (EIDEGALLA
lHABR YUNIS ARAB HABR TOLJALA
140
APPENDIX III
The ARAB are a small tribe, and, though genealogically distinct, are more or less adopted into the HABR GERHAJIS.
HABR means "old woman," or "wife of."
ARAB, and EIDEGALLA are nicknames, the other are proper names, of the sons and grandsons of Sheikh ISHHAK.
The HABR AWAL are divided into / Makahil
( Saad Musa -
Hussein Abokr Jibril Abokr Abdarahhman V Abdallah Saad
Mohammed Esa
, Esa Musa { Abokr Esa
\ Adan Esa
f Musa Jibril I Abokr Jibril
Damwadaga Abdurabbman Rer Idleb Rer Farab Rer Odowa
Ba Abdarahhman Rer Wais
The EIDEGALLA are divided into
( Abokr Musa Rer Yunis Abdurabbman Ba Delo Gasbanbur Damal Yera Rer Esa
The HABR YUNIS are divided into Isbhak
( Arreh Said J Musa Arreb
k Ali Said
L Ismail Arreh
Abdillab Ishbak Kassim Ishhak Jibril Adan Musa Adan Mohammed Adan Ali Adan V Hassan Musa Saad Yunis Musa Ismail
j Idris Abdallah Ismail - Musa Abdallah
[ Omar Abdallah
APPENDIX III
141
The Omar Abdallah are important as the Sultan's tribe, or Royal House, and are divided into a number of important sub- tribes.
Omar Abdallah
Ugad Omar— Rer Hussein Gambur
Adan Omar
Ba Dolbohanta
Said Hersi
Hersi
Barreh ] Abdi Hersi
Ainanshe
Rer Warsama (RerWaraba) Rer Weid Rer Abdi
Rer Ainanshe Rer Sugulli
The ARAB are divided into
■ Rer Othman Abdallah
k Rer Ali
I Ahmed Abdallah
- Rer Ali
i Adan Waraba
The HABR TOLJALA are divided into
( Omar Abokr
I Musa Abokr { Jibril Abokr Mohammed [ A*a* Madoba
I Abokr J Yessel
Nuh
| Ahmed Farah Dahir Farah
etc.
The chief divisions of the D ARUD are
OGADEN
BARTIRI
ABSGUL
HARTI MIJJERTEIN
WARSANGELI DOLBOHANTA
142
APPENDIX III
The DOLBOHANTA are divided into
(Jama Siad Ogarien Siad
( Rer Jibril r Naleyah Ahmed -J Ali Naleyah
[ (incl. Ba Idris) ( Nur Ahmed r Aligheri Ahmed Garad I Ararsama (incl. Rer Wais Adan [ and Rer Hagar)
Garad Farah i Mohammed Garad — Rer Naleyah or Ba Ararsama Barkad Garad v Abdi Garad — Rer Khair
Note. Ba Idris, Rer Wais Adan, Rer Hagar, are three small sub-tribes which have intermarried with HABR TUNIS, and live with them in the district of Burao. They are included among the tribes friendly to the British Government, the other Dolbohanta having largely sided with the Mullah.
EXAMPLES OF PROSE AND VERSE.
The following stories and songs were dictated to ine by Somalis of the Habr Toljala and Habr Yunis tribes1, living at Burao.
The language used in the Prose Stories is exactly in the style of modern colloquial speech.
The sentences are very short and simple, and in ordinary conversation, especially in narrative, the speaker would hesitate after each one, in order that the listener might reply with some ejaculation expressing his attention or surprise. Such ejaculations are Kod, Kodi or Haiye, Weiye, meaning "Yes," "I see," "Go on" ; or Dega, Wallahh, meaning "Really," "By God." Wallahh is usually replied to again by Ega wallahh.
Example,
A. B.
A complainant I am. Well ?
Mashtaki ban ahai. Weiye.
A camel someone from me has stolen. Yes.
Hal ba leiga hadei. Kod.
Yesterday it was lost. Yes.
Shalei bei ka halladei. Kod.
There beyond, the flocks were grazing. Yes.
Hagga ka shishei, hdlaha wa dajeyei. K6d.
When we were returning it was stolen. Yes.
Gorteinu ka so nokh6nenei leiga hadei. Kod.
1 I — IV were told by an educated Somali, Mohammed Jibril, of the Habr Toljala, Mnsa Abokr, then serving as an office clerk.
V — IX were told me by a professional poet and story-teller of Burao, Ismail of the Habr Toljala, Her Ahmed Farah.
X was told me by an interpreter called AH, of the Habr Yunis, Musa Arreh.
144 EXAMPLES OF PROSE AND VERSE
A. There with it went two men, on Wahha la tegei laba nin, c j6ga. |
horseback- > faras ku |
B. -By God ! Wallahh ! |
and rifle carrying. o bandukh sita. |
By God ! Wallahh ! |
|
See by God ! Ega Wallahh ! |
Well? Haiye. |
|
There it is. (That is all.) Wa inta. |
What do you want ? Mahhad donesa P |
|
I want, Wahhan ddneya, |
Yes. K6d. |
|
that one may catch those men. in la ghobsoto nimanka. |
Where they went ? Haggei u ka'en ? |
|
They are here, in the town they Wajdgan, magalodai |
stay. fadiyan. |
Really ! Dega! |
By God etc this morning I saw (them) Wallahhi iyo Billahhi iyo Tallahhi ! saka-an arkei. |
||
B. Very well. A man soldier accompany, and shew him. Wayahai. Nin sibaihh la ra', o u tus. |
||
A. |
B. |
A. |
All right. Go away Haurarsan. 'ss ka ta |
now. g, haddaba |
Very well. Watahai. |
In the fables and narrative which follow, these exclamations are omitted, but no Somali could tell a story, nor could another listen, without introducing them.
In a native court, or banjad, it is not uncommon for the counsel on one side to repeat the speech of his opponent sentence for sentence, or bit by bit, in order apparently to gain sufficient time to digest the full meaning properly. Repetitions are frequent and tedious, owing to this necessity for short, clipped sentences, and the absence of relative pronouns.
A speech or story is usually concluded by the expression Wa sida, or Wa inta There it is, That is all.
An excellent collection of some forty-five Somali tales, with German translations, is to be found in Schleicher's Somali-Texte.
PROSE 145
I. HABIYO BUTIYA1. LAME HABIYO.
Suldan hi jirei, fnan bu laha2. Inanka hoyodlsi ya dimatei. A Sultan there was, a son he had. The son his mother died.
KolkasaSuldanku3 nag bu gursadei. Suldanki ba hajki4 ghobtei Then the Sultan a wife he married. The Sultan the pilgrimage made.
Nagti Suldanka5 ya Yuh6di la sahhebei, fnanki Suldanka ya The wife of the Sultan a Jew with was friendly, the son of the Sultan
Yuh6digi la 'oll6bei6. Nagti ya Yuh6digi kuyidi7, "fnanka the Jew with was at enmity. The woman the Jew to said, "The boy
an dilno." Kolkasei sorti sun ugu dartei. Inankuse let us kill." Then she the food poison with it mixed. But the boy
genyu8 lehyahai, wahh walba taghan9, kolkasa genyodi fnanki a mare he possesses, which everything knows, then the mare the boy
ku tidi, "Ha 'unin sorta." Kolki sorti lo10s6 digei, ya fnanki to said, " Do not eat the food." When the food was placed, the boy
sorti dldei. Malinti dambe ya Yuh6digi u yimi11 nagti the food refused. The day following the Jew came to the wife
Suldanka, wuhhu yidi, "Kolka Suldanki yimado, wahhad
of the Sultan, he said, "When the Sultan comes, do you
1 This is a good example of ordinary narrative style with its broken short sentences. It is also an excellent exercise in the uses of ba, ya, the adjectival clause, and the concord of plural nouns, upon which special notes are not given in many cases.
2 laho means "have in possession," or "own," and is different from hai, have in the hand, hold.
3 Note article u, for " the above-mentioned Sultan."
4 i.e. the Mecca pilgrimage.
5 Article a for possessive case.
6 §99.
7 address, ku is the particle. Cf. wahhad ku tldahhda below, ylttl is masc, and therefore the subject is Yuhddigl, and not nagti.
8 genyo u.
9 From ogho. The Aorist is here used for Present Participle.
10 la u.
11 u to (a person).
K. 10
146 PROSE
tidahhda, ' Wa buka.' Kolku ku yidahhdo, ' Mahha ku dawaa1 ? ' say, 'I am sick.' When he to you says, 'What you will cure?'
wahhad tidahhda, 'Genyoda berkeda.' " Dararti dambe ya do you say, ' The mare her liver.' " The day following
Suldanku yimi, kolkasei san gogoshei, o wahhai hosta ka the Sultan came, then she a skin laid on the bed, and she underneath
gelisei2 'alen beirda. Kolkei ku sehhotei, ya 'alenti
inserted a leaf of a fig-tree. When she on it slept the leaf
jababa' tidi, kolkasa Suldanki yidi, " Mahha ku haya3 ? " Kolkasei crackled, then the Sultan said, "What you has?" Then she
tidi, "Fedaha han6neya." "Mahha ku dawaa?" Kolkasei tidi, said, " My ribs are hurting." " What you will cure ? " Then she said,
"Berka genyoda fnankaga." Inanki ba Suldanki u yedei, "The liver of the mare of your son." The boy the Sultan called,
wuhhuyidi, "Genyodadayan ughaleya ayoda." Kolkasu
he said, " Your mare I will slay for your stepmother." Then he
yidi, "Haurarsan. E galabta-an ku so mermero4." Galabti
said, " All right. This evening let me on it take a walk." In the evening
ba inanki genyodi fulei, .kolkasu abihi ku yidi, "Abo, the boy the mare mounted, then he to his father said, " Father,
nabad," o genyodi la tegei. Wuhhu tegei, magalo-u tegei.
goodbye," and with the mare went. He went, to a town he went.
Magaloda agtedi bu ku5 arkei lehh gabdod o6 'el ku maidtfneya7. The town near he saw six girls a well at washing.
Inanti ugu yereid ya araktei, kolkei ninki araktei, bei 'elki The girl youngest saw, when she the man saw she the well
ka so bahhdei, ninki bei ka hish<5tei. Kolkasu genyoda
from came, the man she concerning was ashamed. Then he the mare
saintdda gubei, kolkasa genyodi 'erka taktei. Inanki ba wuhhu her tail burned, then the mare to the sky went. The boy he
'ss ka diga nin adinla, magaloda bu galei. Wuhhu la pretended to be a man crippled, the town he entered. He lived
1 dawa, 1st conjugation. The Aorist here means, "is to,'' or "can."
2 geli. Causative verb derived from gal enter, § 123. 8 i.e. what is the matter with you?
* go and take a walk. B at.
6 gabdod is qualified by a numeral and therefore the relative clause is coupled by o.
7 3rd singular after Indef. plur., § 168.
PROSE 147
fadistei1 nin. Berigi dambe ya gabdihi Suldanka ya
as servant to a man. The time after the daughters of the Sultan
yidi, "Wa gursonena." Suldanki ba durban ku diftei2, wuhhu yidi, said, " We will marry." The Sultan drum beat, he said,
"Gabdahaiga ya gurs6neya." Kolkasa inamodi h6dna ya " My daughters will marry." Then the young men rich
iss u yimi, kolkas gabdihi ba la kenei, meidanki ragu together came, then the girls were brought, in the plain the men
j6gei. Kolkasa gabdihi la yidi, "Raga dbnesan3 ma wada stood. Then the girls were told, "The men you wish are they all
j6gan ? " Kolkas inanti yereid ba tidi, " Ninkan doneyei ma here?" Then the girl young said, "The man I wanted is not
jogo." Ad6nihi raga u yedeyei ya la yidi, " Raga
here." The slaves (who) the men were calling were told, "The men
magaloda wada j6ga u yeda." Kolkasa fnanki adinkalaa4, (that) in the town all are call." Then the boy cripple,
e Habiyo Butiya, yu5 u yedei. Kolkasa Suldanki gabdihi weidiyei, Habiyo Butiya, they called. Then the Sultan the girls asked,
"Ragi ma wada j6ga?" Kolkasei yidahhden, "Ha." Gabdihi " The men are they all here ? " Then they said, "Yes." The girls
ya lo dibei lehh habadod6 o linah. "Wahha la yidi, "Inan were handed six oranges. It was said, "Girl
walba ninkei doneso ha ku dffato." Shanti gabdod e kaleh7 every the man she wants let her strike." The five girls other
wahhai ku diftan, shan inan o hodanah, inanti yereid ya ku difatei they struck, five young men rich, the girl young struck
Habiyo Butiya. Kolkasa nahhdinti-ai ka nahhen ya abahed Habiyo Butiya. Then with horror they were astonished her father
iyo hoyoded indo belen. Inanki ba inanti yereid giirsadei. and her mother eyes lost. The boy the girl young married.
1 lit. sit with. An idiom meaning u be servant to.'- la jog has the same meaning.
2 difo is used with ku, meaning "strike."
3 The pronoun is omitted.
4 adinla is inflected to agree with article -W.
5 ref. to addnihl.
6 " articles," often used in this way with numerals.
7 kaleh is the second epithet, but o is not used as o kaleh has a special meaning, § 177.
10—2
148 PROSE
Dararti dambe ya la yidi, " Suldanka iyo nagtlsa wahha u The day following it was said, " The Sultan and his wife there
dawaa 'ano wlyiled." Inamodi shanti gabdod gtirsadei,
cures milk of rhinoceros." The young men the five girls married,
shan faras o wanaksan ba la slyei, fnankina Habiyo Butiya dabeir five ponies good were given, and the boy Habiyo Butiya a donkey
ba la slyei. Kolkasa inagaloda-ai ka behhen1. was given. Then the town they from departed.
fnanki Habiyo Butiya, ya genyodlsi sainti u gubei, genyodi The boy Habiyo Butiya, his mare the tail he burnt, the mare
ba u timi,. kolkasu darklsi dahabkaaha iyo sefti intas u to came, then he his clothes of gold and the sword that he
gashodei2. put on.
Kolkasu genyodi fulei. Kolkasa genyodi dtishei, 'erkas yei Then he the mare mounted Then the mare flew, that sky she
gh<5botei. Kolkas wuhhu taga mel wiyili ku dashei,
reached. Then he goes to where rhinoceros was born,
wlyishi yereid bu dohhei, santi bu kala bahhai, 'o'ob bu
the rhinoceros young he skinned, the skin he stretched out, a figure he
ka sameyei. Duhurki kolkei ahaid ya wlyishi timi, from it made. The afternoon when it . was the rhinoceros came,
fnanki Habiyo Butiya ya 'ss ka digei dalkeda, 'anihi yu the boy Habiyo Butiya pretended to be her young, the milk he
hohhdi3 sibrar ku lissei, gudulkina sibrar ku lissei.
the first part a skin in milked, and the second a skin in (he) milked.
Wiyishi ya gedo donatei, kolkasa fnanki 'o'obki 'ss ka
The rhinoceros grass sought, then the boy the figure threw
turei, 'anihi bu ghadei, ged bu tegei, genyodi bu ku hedtei. away, the milk he took, a tree he went to, the mare he to it tied.
Isago 4 gedka hurda, ya shanti fnan e gabdaha While he at the tree was sleeping, the five young men who the girls
1 from hahh.
3 reflexive verb from gal. Verbs in 1 usually change 1 to sh in forming these derivatives.
3 the first part that is milked, and not so rich as the second, or gudul.
4 Iuaga o, § 218.
PROSE 149
gursadei u ylmaden, kolkasei yidahhden, " Salam aleikum." Habiyo married to him came, then they said, "Salam aleikum." Habiyo
Butiya ku yidi, "Aleikum salam." Kolkasu yidi, "Haggad ku Butiya said, "Aleikum salam." Then he said, "Where do
so'otan?" Wahhai yidahhden, " 'Ano wiyiled bannu donena." you go to ? " They said, " Milk of rhinoceros we want'
Kolkasu yidi, " 'Ano wiyiled ana haya, mahha iga sis6-
Then he said, " Milk of rhinoceros I have, what to me for it will you
nesan?" Kolkasei yidahhden, "Wahhad donesid." Kolkasu yidi, give?" Then they said, "What you wish." Then he said,
"H6lo d6ni mayo, ninkinba1 maga'aiga yan futada kaga "Goods I do not want, each of you my name I the buttock upon
dijmeya." Kolkasei yidahhden, "Haurarsan." Maga'isi yu futadi will print" Then they said, "All right" His name he the buttock
kaga wada2 dijiyei shanti nin ba. Kolkasa 'anihi hohhdaaha3 upon all printed the five men. Then the milk the first
u siyei, gudulkina Habiyo Butiya ghatei". he gave, and the second Habiyo Butiya took for himself.
Magalodi Suldanki jogei yei tegen o 'anihi geyen. The town the Sultan dwelt in they went to, and the milk took.
'Anihi, shanta nin sfdatei, ya Suldanki indihisi logu shubei, The milk, the five men carried, the Sultan his eyes was upon poured,
wahhba tari waiyen5. Darar dambe ya Habiyo Butiya
nothing to be of use it failed. A day following Habiyo Butiya
'anihisi nagtisi u si dibei, wuhhu yidi, " Abaha iyo hoyoda his milk to his wife he gave, he said, " Your father and your mother
yanei ku arkin, kolkad ku shubesid.'' Kolkasei 'anihi
let them not you see, when you in pour." Then she the milk
geisei, kolkasei ku shubtei. Indihi Suldanka iyo indihi hoyoded took, then she in poured. The eyes of the Sultan and the eyes of her mother
ya u8 dila'ei. Kolkasei fnanti so arartei, akhalkedi bei timi. opened. Then she the girl ran away, to her house she came.
1 you men, cf. §§ 200 (iii) and 206.
2 Note order of particles, § 236.
a ah may be added to any noun used adjectivally or descriptively.
4 from ghado take to yourself.
5 plural agreeing with 'ano, which is a plural noun.
6 i.e. by reason of it.
150 PROSE
Kolkasa Suldanki oghadei in Habiyo Butiya indihi u dila'ei. Then the Sultan learned that Habiyo Butiya the eyes opened.
Suldanki ba u yedei inamodi kaleh e gabdihlsi gursadei, The Sultan called the young men other who his daughters married,
wuhhu yidi, " fnanki Habiyo Butiya e gabaddaidi yereid gursadei he said, "The boy Habiyo Butiya who my girl young married
yan u dlbei magalodaida hukumkeda. fdinkuna eidan u I have given my town its government. And ye servants to
n6khda." Habiyo Butiya dabad^d Suldan nbkhdei. him be." Habiyo Butiya afterwards Sultan became.
II. INANKI MASKA DILEI.
fnan iyo fnan wa walalaaha. Lo' bai jiren, mel 'idlaah bai her ku ahayen. Inankuna lo'du ra'l jirei, Inantuna akhalka yei fadiyf jirtei, habenki bei heroda iss ugu iman jiren. lnanti ba ghorohh badatei, rag ba weidistei, fnanki ba u dldei in la gursado Inanta. Malin dambe ya niman akhalki lnanti ugu ylmaden. Kolkasei la hassawen, fnanki e walalaahayen Inanta, ya galabti so hoidei. Kol- kasu oghkdei in rag u yimi lnanti, o iss ka am us. Mklinti dambe ya nimanki lnanti u so n6khden, wahhai yidahhden, " An walalka dilne, gormu daganyahai ? " Kolkasei lnanti tidi, " Kolku lo'di lisseyo." Habenki bei ylmaden, kolku lo'da lisseyei, muski bei ka so b6den. Kolku arkei 'ollki, yu sefti .labahhai, kolkasa walashi timaha gh6botei, kolkasu timihi u goiyei, muski bu ka bddei. Odi bai ghorihisi ka goisei. Kolkasu bahhsodei, wuhhu taga magalo agted, wahha1 ku hednaged Inan. Wuhhu yidi, "Nayktahai?" Kolkasei tidi, " Suldknki magkloda ya i dalei." Wuhhu yidi, "Mahhkd ugu2 hedantahai mesha ? " Wahhai tidi, " Mas ba lei hedei, maskas ba i imaneya o i 'uneya." Kolkasu yidi, "Gormu yimada?" Kolkasei tidi, " Asarka." " Kolku yimkdo muhhu sameineya masku ? " Wahhai tidi, "Biyuhu8 'abeya marka hore, dabad^dto-na anigu4 i 'uneya." Kolkasu yidi, "Watahai." Kolki maski yimi yu blyihi ku da'ei, kolkas Inanki sefti labahhai o madaha kaga diftei, kolkasa maski dintei. lnanti bu kahaistei, magalodi bu geyei. Dadki
1 Note this use of wahha — There was tied to a tree, a girl.
2 mahhad u mesha ku hedantahai ?
8 blyaha u. * anlga u.
PROSE 151
magklodi j6gei ya ku so ararei, isago inanti wada. Wahha la yidi, "War, wk side?" Kolkasu yidi, "Maski ban dilei." Kolkasa Suldanka lo geyei, o lei yidi, " Ninkasa maski dilei." Kolkasa Suldanka yidi, "Inantaida giirso." Halkasa inanki inanti ku gursadei.
III. fNANTI LUGAHA1AEID.
Suldkn ba inan laha, fnanta ghorknka lo digi ' jirei. B^rigi dambe ya Suldknki hajki ghobtei, inanti bu amkneyei nin wadkdah, o yidi, " fnantas ghorknka u si dig3." Wadkdki ba inanti iss ka dama'ei inu ka simeisto, inanti ba didei. Darkrti dambe yei tidi, " Berri i kkli." Darkrti-ai mudeisten yei sallknki kkhalki ka ghadei, halki wadkdki ka so full jirei. Abahed yu warkhad u direi, wuhhu ku ghorei, " Inantkdi dilo' ei nokhotei." Suldknki ba hajki ka yimi. Inanti bu u adkdei, wuhhu u dibei niman adomaah, wuhhu yidi, "fnantas ghorta ka so goiya." Adbmihi ya inanti kahhayei, wahhai geyen mel dirleh. Inanti bei lugaha ka goiyen, kolkasei habashedi ghoden. Intei habkshi ghodeyen, yei ka gurguratei, mel dirleh yei gashei, o kaga dumatei. Adomihi kolkei habkshi ghoden yei meshiei fadidei ka egen3, wa ka waiyen, Kolkasei dero dilen, digi deroda ghar6rad ku shuben. Suldknki bei u geyen digi, o yidahhden " Inanti dilnei." Mklin dambe ya skfar meshi so marei, meshi inanti fadidei yu degei. Duhurki kolki safarku aurti rertei, yei inanti o dirti fadida arken. Inanti ya nin so ghadei, aur bu so skrei. Magklodi-ai yimaden yu kenei. Inanti ya ninki so ghadei akhal fadisiyei. Beri dambe ya inan Suldan dalei ya inanti weijigedi arkei, weijigedi o wankksan4 ya inanki arkei. Ninki-ai akhalkisa fadidei yu ku yidi, ''An inanta ka giirsado." Ninki ba yidi, " Inanta wa lugolkdahai." Kolkasa inanki Suldknkaii yidi, " Ana gurskneya, i si." Kolkasu yidi, " Haurkrsan." Inanti ba inanki Suldknka gursadei. Laba inan yei u dashei. Iyadu urleh ya inanki yidi, " Hajki ban ghobdneya." Inanki ba inanti uga tegei
1 teach.
2 continue to teach.
3 ka fcgen. Note the use of ka in these expressions, meaning, to look for in a place, or being unable to find in a place.
* The Possessive adjective suffix -gedi is treated as an epithet, and therefore the particle o is required for the second adjective wanaksan.
152 PROSE
wan1, o hajki ghobtei. Isago hajki ku maghan, ya nagtlsi dadabtei, wahhai riyotei lyadu labada lugod laba shimbirod kaga j6gta, o lugihi u behhen, o hajki ghtfbotei. Arorti kolki wagu berlyei, ya wahhai arakta labadi shimbirod o labadi lugod kaga j6ga, o lugihi u behhen. Arorti kolkei ahaid, yei labadedi fnan iyo wanki iyo labadi shimbirod kahhaisatei, hajki bei gh<5botei. Dar dauga dehhdeda yei taktai, wahha ugu yimi abahed iyo walalked iyo wadadki iyo ninkedi intas o midna an u garanin. Inamodedi yei u shekeisei, dawodi iyada heshei yei ugu shekeisei, abahed ba makhlei iyo wadadki, kolkasa wadadki dama'ei inu araro, kolkasa Suldanki yidi, "Fadi inta sheltado damaneso." Suldanki, fnanta abahed, ya wadadki ghorti ka goiyei, fnanti iyo abahed iyo ninkedi inti wa leiss wada ra'ei. Hajki ba la tegei. fnanti iyo abahed halki yei iss ku girten.
IV. HdGGI DlRTA.
Suldan ba fnan laha, fnanki ba yidi, "Wa gursaneya." Suldanki ba h6la badan slyei, markabna wa siyei. Inanki Suldanka ya d6fei magaloii tegei. Magalodi kolku tegei, yu nin Suldan la sahhebei Suldanki ba dar siyei, darti u ku jirei fnanku iyo darti Suldanka ya iss u daldliyei. Nagti Suldanki2 la sahhebei. Malinti dambe yu nagti Suldanka Inanki ku yidi, " Sorti ninkaga adu sam^in jirta o kaleh i samei." Suldanki ba fnanki u tegei, wuhhu yidi, "Awa anad wahh i la 'unese." Suldanki wuhhu yidi, " Haurkrsan." Inanki ba nagti Suldanka ku yidi, " Awa kolka anigu iyo Suldanku annu sorta 'uneno, wahhan d6neya inad sorta na sisid." Nagti ba tidi, " Suldanki ya i garaneya." Kolkasu yidi, " Ku garan mayo, ana ku odan wa nagtaidi." Nagti ba tidi, " Hadu i garan waiyo, adiga yan ku ra'i d6na, o nag ku nokhon." Habenki ba Suldknki akhalki yimi, darkisi bu ghatei, fnanka akhalkisi bu yimi. Nkgti ba h6ggi akhalka ka so dustei3, Inanka akhalkisi bei timi. Kolkasei Suldanki iyo fuanki sorti sisei. Suldanki ba gartef nagtisi, kursigi bu ka ka'ei, akhalkisi bu u ka'ei. Intanu akhalki gadin yei nkgti h6ggi ka dustei, gogoshedi yei ku fadisatei, Suldanki ba arkei. Kolku arkei yu haddana akhalki fnanka ku so nokhdei, h6ggi bei ka
1 lit. went from a ram for her, i.e. left a ram for her. « Suldanka u. 3 come through.
PROSE 153
so dustei nkgti, nkgti bu haddana arkei. Inanki, u 'untoda la 'uneyei, ya Suldanki ku yidi, " Ma nagtatan sorta inna slnesa miad nagtadi modei ? " Inanki ba yidi, " Nkgtu wa nagtaidi." Suldanki ba '8S ka fadlstei. Ar6ryodi dambe ya fnanki Suldanka ku yidi, " Wa d6feya." " Haurkrsan," bu yidi. Nkgti Suldanka ya fnanki la ballamei, o yidi, " Arorta halkas ka so dus, wa d6feya." Nkgti ba halki ka so dustei, fnanki yei u timi, markabki bu geyei, wa la d6fei, fnanki ba nkgti Suldanka gursadei, kolku la bahsodei.
V. MAGALODI HOLAHA DADKA KU 'UNA.
Wahh lei yidi, nin ba faras fulei, wuhhu1 yimi habkr, wabhai tidi, " Haggad ku so'ota?" Wuhu yidi, " Magklodas an ku so'- oda." Wabhai tidi, "Magkloda dadka lagu3 ghasha, yan lagu ghalonine, ha gelin." Wuhhu yidi, " Kulli wa geleya." Wahhai tidi, " Magkloda nin Suldknah bei lehdahai, ninka Suldknka fnan bu lehyahai, fnanta bokhorkeda wa mas, masku dadka 'una. Aurna isagu dadka 'una, kkhalka hortisa yu fadista, halko golgol ku fadista." Wahhai tidi, " War, nino, hadad magkloda tegesa3, fnanta Suldanka dalei akhalkeda <5rod o gal." Wuhhu yidi, " Ninki bei yidi4, Eiga dadka 'una, iyo aurka dadka 'una, iyo maska dadka 'una, haggan ka dan d6na? " Iyadi bk tidi, " Gedaha ghado o5, aurki yu ku 'unine, kolkad dafiso kkhalkiad ku so'oto, gedaha afka u geli, yu ku 'unine. Ei'gana 'adka ghado o, eiga agtisi dig o, ha 'uno, yu adiga 'unine. Maskana wa kan fnanta dehhdeda ku duban, ghoriga ghado o, maska madahisi sar, dabad^d maska u diman d6na. Kolkad sida yesho dabaddd kkhalka gal o fnanta u tag, dabad^d fnanta ghrso." Kol- kasu isagu fnanta gursadei.
1 wuhhu here represents wahha u, in which u is the particle = to. It means literally therefore, There came to (him) an old woman.
2 la ku. ku in, and refers to the town, ghalonine. The usual form is ghalon for the negative Imperative. This must be some Continuative form, but I have not met it elsewhere.
3 Indicative mood, i.e. If you are (as you say) going.
4 bei = ba i. Who is the man referred to is not clear. There must be some omission in the rendering of the story.
5 The conjunction o is frequently used like this with the first coordinate sentence, instead of introducing the second.
154 PROSE
VI. NASIB.
Wahh lei yidi, nin ba dan rerei, danki bu kahhayei, 'elki bu geyei, wa ka so danshei1. Kolku so danshei yu aurti 'ss ku so hedishei. Kolkiu dehhdi j6gei ya lehh aur ka hadei, lehhdi kaleh so kahhayei. Kolku mel f6g jogei yu lehhdi ka hadei wai. Kolkasu dib u so 6rdei. Lehhdi aur o2 lehh libahh 'unesa ayu gu yimi, kolkasu iss kaga yimi. Lehhdi aur 6 kaleh o8 lehh libahh 6 kaleh 'unesa ugu yimi. Kolkasu sibrar bu ka ghatei aurti, gurig6di yu yimi, rerk6di o2 la da'ei bu arkei, o 'oil da'ei.
VII. NAGTI WANAKSANEID.
Nin ba fnau laha. fnanki ba yidi, abihi ku yidi, "Abo, wahhan dbneya, nag an gursada." Kolkasu yidi, " Wahhad so kahhaisata nag armali." Kolkasa armalidi so kahhaistei, kolkasu yidi, "Gurso." Kolkasu gursadei. Kolkasu yidi, ;< Hadig ku hed, kolkei ku la hadasho hadiga ka fur." Kolkasu hadiga ku hedei. Nagti ba tidi, "Wahhan3 maan arkf jirin, mahhad nogu4 sameinesa ? " Kolkasu hadigi ka furei. Arorti yu abihi bu yimi, kolkasu yidi, " Mahhai ku tidi ? " Kolkasu yidi, " Wahhai i tidi, ' Wahhan maan arkf jirin, wahhas mahhad nogu sameinesa ? ' " Kolkasu yidi, " 'ss ka 'eri." Tasu wa mid.
Inanki ya abihi bu yidi, "Nag kaleh so kahhaiso, fnan wein so kahhaiso." Kolkasu yidi, "Awa hadig ku hed. Kolkei ku la hadasho ka fur." Kolkasu hedei, kolkasei tidi, " Wahhan maan u makhli jirin, mahhad wahha nogu hddesa?" Kolkasu ka furei. Arorti abihi u yimi, kolkasu yidi, " WTahhai tidi, ' Wahhan maan makhli jirin, mahhad hadiga nogu sameinesa ? ' ' Kolkasu yidi, " Tanna 'ss ka 'eri." Tasna wa mid.
Kolkasu yidi, " Wahhad so kahhaisata fnan yer o wanaksan." Kolkasu so kahhaistei. Kolkasu yidi, " Awa hadig ku hed, kolkei ku la hddasho hadiga ka fur." Kolkasa fnanki 'ss ka sehhodei, habenki 6 dan yu 'ss ka hurdei. Kolki arorti ahaid manti yei inanki ke'isei, kolkasei tidi, " Hadigi-ad igu hedtei wa iga da'ei, o igu ma hedna, hadiga igu hed." Arortina abihi yu u shegei, " Abo, wahhai tidi, ' Hadiga iga da'ei, o igu ma hedna, hadiga igu hed.' " Kolkasu yidi abihi ba yidi, " Tas haiso, tasa ba wanaksan." Ti dabad^d yu 'ss ka gursadei.
1 from Uinao, of. § 104. 2 Adjectival sentences with o, cf. § 261.
8 This thing. 4 na u ku.
PROSE 155
VIII. DADKU IYO WARABUHU.
Wahha lei yidi, Warabuhu h6lah£ laha, Dadku wahhba ma lahain. Bengi dambe ya Dadku h61aha Warabaha u ilaliyei, Warabahana wa shirei. Be>igi dambe aya Dadku tashadei, wuhhu yidi, "An Warabaha h61aha ka ghadno, fyaga o shirki Warabihi ku maghanyahai." Ya Dadki holihi 6dei. Habenki u yimi, kolki-u yimi ya laga 'eriyei. Warabihi ya ghailo tegei, bahalihi kaleh ugu tegei, wuhhu yidi, " War, lei da'ei." Kolkasei yidahhen, " An dulno." Mel bei so maren, balli biyo ku jiran yei yimaden. Sakaro lab aya yidi "Balli hadeidinan i dein, ka 'abi maysan." "War, wa ka 'abena, naga tag," yei yidahhen. Biyihi yu 'idi ku shubei, kolkas biyihi idladen, kolkas harad u bakhtiyen, kolkei biyo waiyen.
IX. HASHU IYO H6LAHEDA.
Wahha lei yidi, Hal wahh wada laha, mas iyo hhas, iyo dab, iyo dad, iyo libahh, iyo ghaiyano, iyo amin, wa toddbodas ya hashi ka dahhaisei. 'Ashodi dambe ya ghaiyanodi tidi, " Libahha hasho wein inna ka ghadne, an libahha dillo." Kui kaleh ya yidi, " Side u dilla ? " Kolkasei tidi, "Maska libahha ha ghanino. Kolkad ghaninto, hhaska gal." Kolkasa yo1 ghaninei, kolkasu hhaski galei. Kolkasei tidi, " Dabka 0, hhaski iyo maska gublabadaba." Kolkas hhaski iyo maski dabki ya gubei. Kolkasei tidi, " Dabku iya maska iyo hhaska bakhtiyei, dadkuna dabka ha bakhtiyo." Kolkasei kminta tidi, " Dadku biirta ma maro, dehhda un bu mara, an innagu hasha burta la marro." Kolkasei burti la maren. Kolkasei tidi ghaiyanodi, "An hasha ghalono." Kolkasei ghashen, kolkasei 'adka bisleisaten, 'adki bei lukhoten. 'Adki mahai wahh kaleh ka ma 'unin, 'adki ya ku mergadei, 'ad wein bu aha, afkina u mari wai. Kolkasei bakhtiyen.
X. NINKI INDAHALAA.
Mesha rag badan ya wada hadleyei. Laba nin, midna wa indalayahai midna ma indalaa. Ninki indahalaha2 aya yidi, "Mahhad nin indala kala hadlesan ? Wahhba arki mayo." Ki indahalaa3 ba yidi, " Ya nin indala u4 taghanin ? " Inti kalehto ya
1 ya u.
2 Note inflexion of adjective, nin indaleh a man with eyes, but ninki indahalaha the man with eyes.
3 nin indala, ninki indahalaa.
* By what do you know a blind man ?
156 PROSE
tidi, " Wahhannu ninki indahalaa u naghan, ninki an wahhba arkenin." Markasu ki indahalaa yidi, " Wahha indala, ninki an ogh6n lahain, ya indala."
XL
The following is an example of the pure narrative style, being an account of Col. Swayne's expeditions against the Mullah, from the raising of the levy in November 1900 to the battle of Erigo in October 1902. It was taken down by me from the mouth of a Somali native officer with the force, Nur Jama, Habr Awal.
Note the use of iyanna, iyu, etc. for the pronouns yannu, yu, etc. The Present tense is freely used for the Past.
The raising of the Levies.
Kolkas " Swayne " ba im^neya, askarr badan bu ghorfneya (enlist). Kolkas " Swayne " so bahhai, Harrar bu nogu yimid. Kolkasu yidi, "Askarr ban d6neya." Markas Oskar Garad, "Imisad d6nesa?" bu yidi. Markasu yidi, "Boghol fardoleh ban d6neya." Markasu yidi, " Bogholki lagu sineya." Bogholki aya la siyei. Kolki la siyei, iyannu so so'ona. Adadleh iyannu nimid. Sided kumbaui (company) iyannu nokhonei. Kolkas iyannu ayarsina (drill), bil keliah iyannu fadinei. Kolkasu 'ollki "Swayne" no yimi, Burao-na ka so so'onei, Ber bannu tagnei.
"Col. Swayne" iyo "Col. Phillips" labadas u sarreyen (were in command). Wadadku wuhhu yal Olesan. Kolkas iyannu nimid Uduwein. Halo la direi, wadadki, so ego1 la yidi. Dabaded wahha lei yidi, wadadki bahhsei2. Uduwein iyannu ka gurrei (started). Dabaded wahhannu tagnei Olesan. Wadadki wuhhu jirei Nogal. Olesan bannu ka gurrei, dabadddto Wad&mag6 ilalo iyannu ka dirrei. Ilalodi iyei rero so araktei, hal iyo aur iyei so heshei. Faraski iyo Rakubki iyannu ka dulinei (sent to attack), dabaded 'ollki kolku dulei iyannu ka daba gurrei. Kolkas laba dararod iyannu so'onei, kolkas Haridig (Sanala) bannu degnei. Rakubki iyo Faraski sided kun o gelah3 iyei kenei. Kolkas " Swayne " iyu yidi ; " Laba kumbani iyei halkan fadiyesa, gelina halkas iyei laga ka tegi" (will be left). Kolkas kurabanaydga u so hadei, iyo geli. Kolkasa 'ollki "Swayne" u tegei.
1 in la so ego. 2 cf. § 104, note.
3 After sided kun o, gel is made adjectival by the termination ah.
PROSE 157
MacNeUVs zariba (Sanala).
"Capt. MacNeill" iyo "Murray" iyei heroda laga ka tegei. Kolkas ilalodi wadadka iyannu aragnei. Malinti labada sa'adod (2 o'clock) 'ollkisu no yimid. Kolkannu 'ollki aragnei, iya sirkalku, " Zaribada so gala," bu yidi, dabadddna iyannu wererrei (fought), kolkas iyannu iss lei'nei (slew each other), dabad^dna afar sa'adod (for 4 hours) iyannu dagalla (fought). Lehhdi sa'adod (6 o'clock) iyannu ka 'ennei (chased) kolka dabaddd zaribada gudahi iyannu iss ku fadisona. Kolkasu dabad^dto todobadi sa'adod habenki iyannu wererrei, laba sa'adod bannu dagalla, kolkasa sagalki sa'adod iyannu 'ennei. Haddana k6di bei so nokhden, haddana sa'ad keliah iyannu dagalla. Kolkas iyaga iyannu leina, dabad^dna wa araren (they ran away). Kolkas waga iyo beri (in the early morning) tod6badi sa'adod iyei so nokhden, kolkasannu iss leina, kolkasannu derewishti iyannu wada leina.
Intanei so dowanin (Before they came close) gidliganki (the Maxim gun) iyu lei. Kolkei so dowaden askarrti banadtikhdi iyei ku dishei. (Gidliganki wa wanaksanyahai, wa bahal, wa shaitan). Kolki nimanki fogeyen iya gidliganki lagu si dayei, kolkas rag badan ka lai (died), kolkas dabaddd haggi zaribada iyei ku so ya'ei (fled). Afar nin o askari wadad1 w&ranki iyu ku dilei. Kolkas iyannu 'ennei, afa'rton nin iyannu gh6bonei.
"Capt. MacNeill" iyu aniga u yedei, wuhhu yidi, " Inti wadadka laga dilei so tiri." Wahhan kahhaistei t6ban askari, wahhannu ka dignei afar bdghol iyo lehhdon inti diinatei. Annaga labadi kumbani sagal nin iyei ka dilen. Kolkas "MacNeill" ba yidi, wuhhu yidi, " Ragi derewishki dintei mel iss u gei." Kolkas iyannu mel keliah so kennei. Kolkasa 'ollki " Swayne " iyu no yimid, wad^dki wahhba isagu ka ma helin.
Ferdiddin. 'Ollki o dan iyu Bohotle iss ugu yimid. Dabad^dna ilalo iyannu ka dinei. Kurmis iyei gel badan ku so araktei. Ilalodi ba so nokhotei, gel badan iyannu aragnei, 'ollki o dan iya gurei, dabadedna Kurmis iyannu tagnei. Allegheri gel badan laga so ghadei. Shan iyo t6ban 'asho iyannu fadinei. Dadki hdlahalaha ba no yimid. Dadki iyu " Colonel "-ki u yimaden. Wuhhu yidahhei, " Edinkannu idin ra'ena, adigi iya lo 'elin " (will be recovered). Kolkasu yidi, " Hadeidin ra'esdn adigi iyan idin ku 'elfneya. Reraha o dan so rera o agteda kena." Kolkasi Allegheri na ra'ei. Kolkasu yidi, 1 waddd here used for a Mullah's man.
158 PROSE
" Wadadki bannu idin la d6nena." Dabad^d iyannu gurrei. B6hotle iyannu nimid. Ragi buka o askarrtaaha iya B6hotle lagu rebei (were left behind), dabadddna Bohotle iyannu ka gurrei. Wahhannu degnei Wudwud, dabaddd ilalo Wudwud iyannu ka dirrei. Wahhai yidahhen, "Wadadku wa f6gyahai." Kolkasannu ka gurrei, shan haben iyo shan dararod so so'onei. Dararti dambe iyannu 'ollki wadadka iss hellei (met). DabadM iyannu dirirrei. Wahhai kaga dilen shan iyo t6ban askari iyo sirkdlki af-Arabed (i.e. Capt. Friedrichs). " Dickinson " sahib rasas ba ku da'dei, b6dodi kaga da'dei. Shan iyo labaton askari iyei rasasti ku da'dei, an dimanin (without being killed). Kolkas iyannu biyo wehna (could not find) o so nokhonei. Wahhannu ka so baghanei, askarrti hadanei biyo haison, wa bakhtiyesa. Shan iyo t6ban 'asho iyannu Berberah u so dahhnei. Kolkannu halkan nimid, askarrti gel badan la siyei, hawildarki sadehh halod iya la siyei, ninki jemadarkaaha afar ba la siyei. Askarrti fasahh, nin ba bil fasahh iyu helei. " Force "-kan halkas iyu ku damadei.
Las Idleh raids.
'Ollki labad iyu Burao wa so yimi. Burao-na dabaded afar bflod fadfna, kolkas ilalo laga direi. Ilalodi Ali Naleyah iyei u taktei, wahhai tidi, " H6lo badan iyannu so aragnei." Afar kumbani iyo "Col. Cobbe " iyo "Col. Swayne " iyannu ku so'onei, wahhannu tagnei Las Idleh. Las Idlehna faras badan nogu yimid. Kolkas iyannu ilalo dirrei. Ilalodi iyei tidi, " Holo badan iyannu so aragnei." Kolkasannu Las Idleh ka gurrei, kobyo-thban haben u si so'onei. Jid Ali iyannu Ali Naleyah u tagnei, kolkasu kumbani waliba mel marei. "Col. Swayne" iyo kumbani badki iyannu mel kaga tagnei. Kolkas iyannu Ali Naleyah we>errei, habenki iyo dararti wa h6lihi ka da'nei. Kolkas holihi iyannu zaribadi i so kennei, wihhi-annu rag aragnei iyannu leinei. Kolkasannu ka so gurrei. Wahhannu tagnei, Las Idleh shan iyo toban haben iyannu u so dahhnei. Kolkas askarrti ba adi la siyei, ninki askari aha labyo-toban adi la siyei, ninki hawildarka iyo naikka labaton la siyei, jemadarki iyo " color-havildar "-ki soddon ba la siyei. "Col. Cobbe " iyo " Col. Swayne " Berberah ku nokhden. " Maj. Petrie " iyo afar kumbani Burao-annu so nokhonei, kolka bil fadmei Burao. Kolkasa "Col. Swayne" iya no yimid. Wuhhu yidi, " Force "-ku wa bahhaya, wadadka iyannu d6nena. Reidka Somalida gel maawinah i kena," bu yidi. Kolkasi Habr Awal iyo Habr Yunis gholi walba
PROSE 159
sided boghol o halod iya lo kena, Habr Toljala lehh boghol o halod lo kena.
The Nogal Campaign.
Kolkas 'ollki iyu dakhkghei. Kumbanaykga sided dararod naga dambeyei. Kolkasu Rakhbki iyo Faraski Berberah ka yfmaden, o Burao nogu yimaden. Wahha u sarreyei " Capt. Osborne." Kolkas annu 'ollki ka daba tagnei. Shan dararod dabad^d Bohotle iyannu ghobonei. Kolkannu Bohotle ghobonei, "Col. Swayne" iyo 'ollki iyannu u tagnei. Kolkasa ilalo laga direi, ilklodi iya toban haben iyei naga maghana. Ilklodi wa so nokhotei, wahhai yidahhen, "Wadadki maannu arag." Kolkasa " Colonel "-ku ba yidi, "Wa dulena." Nogal iyannu ku dullei. Kolkas iyannu tagnei Gerowei. H6lo badan iyannu Mohammed Garad ka ghadnei. Gerowei labaton haben bannu fadinei. Ilklo iya la direi. Ilklodi wadadki iyei Mudug ugu taktei (went to Mudug for the Mullah). Ilklodi ba no timid, ilklodi ba tidi, " Wa omaniaha, o biyo heli mayno." Kolkas iyannu Bari gh6bonei. Halin bannu gh6bonei. Naleyah Ahhmed holo badan iyannu ka so ghadnei. Kolkasa sirkklku yidi, "Wa nokhonena." Labyo-t6ban 'asho bannu so so'onei, kolkasannu Gaulo nimid, kolkas " Colonel "-ku yidi, " Laba nin o sirakil, iyo waranlaha iyo h6laha ha nokhdan." Kolkasa h61ihi iyo waranlihi iyo laba sirkal iyei nokhden. Skdehh kun o geli iyu " Colonel "-ku so rebei.
Erigo (Oct. 6, 1902).
Kolkas ilklo la direi, wahhai taktei, wadkdki iyei u taktei. Kolkasei tidi, " Wadkdku Mudug bu fadiya." Kolkasannu ku gurrei, kolkasu shan haben bannu dahhnei, 'ashodi lehhad arorti Erigo derewishti iyannu iss ku hellei. Kolkasu mel bannu fadisona, kolkasa dabade"dto derewishti iyei nagu so dakhaghdei. " Mile " kolki no &6 jirei, sirkklku yidi, " Inna la dfriri mayan, aurta rera, inna dakhkghna." Kolkasannu ku dakhkghnei. Mesha wa mel ainah. Kolkas kumbani walba " extend " ba lo dakhkjiyei, sida- annu so'onei o kol keliah l'yagu " fire " nogu ridei. Kolkasa berka iyannu dulka digna, kolkas iyannu dirirrei. Afar kumbani wa teg, iyei haggk ka bkghatei, o krarei. Sadehh kumbani iyannu dagkllei, inti kkleh wa bkghatei. Kumbanaykga iyo lkba kkleh skdehhda kumbani ba dagklen.
Zaribadi iyannu so gallei, kolkas derewishti iyei timid. Sadehh kumbani iyei dibadda u bahhdei o '^ridei. Dabade"d Bohotle iyannu nimid.
TRANSLATIONS OF THE STORIES. I-XI.
I. HABIYO BUTIYA (LAME HABIYO).
There once was a Sultan who had a son, whose mother was dead. But the Sultan married another wife, and went on a pilgrimage. Now a certain Jew was a friend of the Sultan's wife, but the Sultan's son and the Jew were enemies. The Jew said to the woman, " Let us kill the boy." So she mixed some poison in his food. But the boy had a mare, who knew every- thing, and the mare said to the boy, "Don't eat the food" ; and when the food was put before him, the boy refused it. The next day the Jew came to the Sultan's wife and said, " When the Sultan comes back, say you are sick, and when he asks what will cure you, tell him the liver of the mare." The next day the Sultan came. Then she laid a skin on the bed and placed under it some fig leaves, and when she lay down the leaves crackled. Then the Sultan said, " What is the matter with you ? " and she said, "I have a pain in my ribs." " What will cure you ? " he said ; and she answered, " The liver of your son's mare." The Sultan called the boy and said, " I intend to kill your mare for your stepmother." And the boy said, " Very well but let me take a ride on her this evening." In the evening the boy rode the mare, and said to his father, "Good-bye, Father," and departed with the mare. He went to a town, and near the town he saw six girls washing at a welL The youngest of the girls saw him ; and when she saw the man, she ran away from the well, being ashamed before the man. Then he singed the tail of the mare, who went up into the sky. The young man then pretended to be a cripple, and went into the town, and there became a servant.
Later the daughters of the Sultan said, "We wish to marry." The Sultan beat his drum, and announced, "My daughters wish to marry." Then the rich young men came together, and the girls were brought, and the people stood in the plain. Then the girls were asked, " Are the men you want all here ? " And the young girl said, " The man I wanted is not here." The slave girls who were summoning the men were told to call all the men in the town, so they called the young cripple, Lame Habiyo. Then the Sultan asked the girls, " Are the men all here ? " and they said, " Yes."
TRANSLATIONS OF THE STORIES 161
The girls were given six oranges, and they were told, " Let each girl hit the man she wants." The five other girls hit five rich young men, the young girl hit Lame Habiyo. Then her father and mother were so struck with hoiTor, that they lost their sight ; and the young man married the girl. On the next day they were told, " That which will cure the Sultan and his wife is rhinoceros' milk." And the young men who married the five girls were given five good horses, and Lame Habiyo was given a donkey, and they left the town. There came to Lame Habiyo the mare, whose tail he had burned, and he put on his gold dress and sword and mounted the mare. The mare flew up and reached the sky. Then he went to a place where rhinoceroses are born. A young rhinoceros he cut open, and opened out the skin and made a figure from it. In the afternoon the mother rhinoceros came, and Lame Habiyo pretended to be the young one. The first portion of milk he milked into one skin and the second portion he milked into another skin. Then the rhinoceros went to graze. Then the young man threw away the figure, and took the milk. He went to a tree and tied his mare to it. While he slept under the tree the five young men who married the other girls came to him, and said, " Salam Aleikum " ; and Lame Habiyo said, " Aleikum Salam." Then he said, " "Where are you going ? " And they said, " We are looking for rhinoceros' milk." Then he said, " I have some rhinoceros' milk. What will you give for it ? " And they said, " Whatever you wish." Then he said, "Wealth do I not want, but I will brand my name on the buttocks of each of you." Then they said, "Agreed." So he branded his name on the buttocks of all five. Then he gave them the first milk, and the second milk Lame Habiyo took for himself. They went to the town where the Sultan lived, and took the milk. The five young men carried the milk, and it was poured on the eyes of the Sultan, but was of no use. Another day Lame Habiyo gave his milk to his wife and said, " Let not your father and mother see you, when you pour it in." Then she took the milk and she poured it in. And the eyes of the Sultan and her mother were opened. Then the girl came running away and came to her house. Then the Sultan learned that Lame Habiyo had opened his eyes, and the Sultan called the other young men that married his daughters, and he said, " To the young man Lame Habiyo, who married my young daughter, have I given authority over my town, and you, be his servants." Afterwards Lame Habiyo became Sultan.
II. "THE DRAGON-KILLER."
(A variant of the story of Perseus and Andromeda.)
There were a brother and sister who kept a cow. They dwelt in a deserted place, and the brother used to go with the cow, while the sister used to sit in the house, and at night they met in the zariba. The sister was of great beauty, and men asked for her, but her brother refused to let the girl be married. One day some men came into the house for the girl,
K. 11
162 TRANSLATIONS OF THE STORIES
and they conversed ; and the brother came in in the evening and found that men had come for his sister, but he said nothing. The next day the men returned to the girl and said, " We think of killing your brother ; when is he engaged ? " And the girl said, " When he is milking the cow." In the evening they came as he was milking the cow and leaped in over the fence. When he saw the enemy, he drew his sword. His sister seized his hair, but he cut it off, and jumped over the fence, which cut off his genitals ; and he escaped. He went near a town where there was a girl tied to a tree, and he said, " Who are you, girl ? " And she said, " My father is the Sultan of the town." And he said, " Why are you tied up here ? " And she said, " I am tied up for a dragon, which will come and eat me." Then he said, " When does it come ? " And she said, " In the evening." And he said, " When the dragon comes, what will it do ? " And she said, " First it will drink the water, and afterwards eat me." And he replied, "Very well." When the dragon came, it went down to the water, but the young man drew his sword and struck it on the head, and it died. Then he led away the girl, and brought her to the town, and the people of the town came running to him, as he led the girl, and they said, " What is this ? " And he said, " I have killed the dragon." Then he was brought to the Sultan, and they said, " This man has killed the dragon." And the Sultan bade him marry his daughter. So thereupon the man married her.
III. THE GIRL WITHOUT LEGS.
A Sultan had a daughter, and the daughter used to be taught the Koran. One day the Sultan went on a pilgrimage, and entrusted his daughter to a priest, and said, "Continue to teach that girl the Koran." The priest coveted the girl, wishing to lie with her, but the girl refused. One day she said, " Come to me to-morrow." On the day arranged she removed from the house the ladder by which the priest used to ascend. He then sent a letter to her father, and he wrote, " Your daughter has become a harlot." The Sultan returned from the pilgrimage, and he was angry with the girl, and he handed her over to some slaves, and he said, " Cut that girl's throat." Then the slaves took the girl, and they brought her to a wooded place, and they cut off her legs, while they dug her grave. While they were digging the grave she crawled away, and went into some trees and hid. When the slaves had dug the grave they looked in the place where she had lain and could not find her. Then they slew a gazelle, and the gazelle's blood they poured into a bottle, and brought the blood to the Sultan, and said, " We have slain the girl." One day later a caravan passed by the place, and camped where the girl lay. In the afternoon as the party were loading up the camels, they saw the girl sitting under a tree. A man took the girl, and put her on a camel, and brought her to the town they came to. The man who took the girl put her to live in a house. Later on the son of the Sultan saw the girl's face, and the young man saw that her face was
TRANSLATIONS OF THE STORIES 163
beautiful, and he said to the man whose house she dwelt in, " Let me marry that girl from you." And the man said, "The girl has no legs." Then the Sultan's son said, " I will marry her, give her to me." And so the man said, " Well and good." And the Sultan's son married her. She bore two children, and while she was with child the young man said, " I am going on a pilgrimage," and he left her a ram, and went on the pilgrimage. While he was away on the pilgrimage his wife had a dream, and she dreamed that two birds sat upon her two legs, and her legs had grown out, and that she made the pilgrimage. In the morning at break of day she saw the two birds sitting upon her two legs, and the legs had grown out. After daylight she took her two children and the ram and the two birds, and went on the pilgrimage. She came to a building at the half-way, and there came to her her father and her brother and the priest and her husband, none of whom knew her. She told stories to her children, and she related all that had happened to her, and her father heard, and the priest. Then the priest tried to run away, but the Sultan said, " Sit down until the story is finished." Then the Sultan, the girl's father, cut the priest's throat, and the girl with her father and husband went on and made the pilgrimage. And so the girl and her father were reconciled.
IV. THE HOLE IN THE WALL.
There was a Sultan who had a son, and his son said, " I want to marry." So the Sultan gave him many presents, and also a ship. The Sultan's son set sail and came to a town, and when he arrived at the town he became friendly with a Sultan, and the Sultan gave him a house. The young man made a hole between the house he was in and the Sultan's house, and he became friendly with the Sultan's wife. One day the young man said to the Sultan's wife, " Make some food for me just as you are accustomed to make it for your husband" And he went to the Sultan, and said, " To-night will you take food with me 1 " And the Sultan said, " Well and good." And the young man said to the Sultan's wife, " To-night when I and the Sultan are having our food, I want you to serve us with the food." And the woman said, " The Sultan will know me." Then he said, " He will not know you, I will say you are my wife." And she said, " If he does not know me, I will go with you and be your wife." At night the Sultan came home and dressed himself, and came to the young man's house. And his wife passed through the hole in the wall, and came to the young man's house. Then she served the food to the Sultan and the young man. The Sultan recognised his wife, and got off his chair, and went to his house. Before he reached his house, the woman passed through the hole and sat upon her bed, and the Sultan saw her. When he saw her he straightway came back to the house of the young man, while the woman came through the hole, and still
11—2
164 TRANSLATIONS OF THE STORIES
he saw her. The young man, who was dining with him, said to the Sultan, " Did you think this woman who is serving our food was your wife ? The woman is my wife," he said, and the Sultan sat down. The next morning the young man said, " I am sailing." " Very good," he answered. And the young man arranged with the Sultan's wife and said, " In the morning come through that place, I am sailing." So the woman passed through and came to the young man, and he took her to the ship, and sailed. And the young man having run away with the Sultan's wife married her.
V. THE TOWN OF MAN-EATERS.
There is a story that a man was riding a horse, and there came to him an old woman, who said, " Where are you going ? " And he said, " I am going to that town." And she said, " In that town people are slain and eaten ; do not go in, lest they slay you." And he answered, " Still I am going in." Then she said, " The town has a Sultan, and the Sultan has a daughter, and the daughter's sash is a snake, and the snake eats the people. And there is a camel who eats the people, he sits in front of the house, over there upon a bed." And she said, " See, my man, if you are going to the house, run and enter the house of the Sultan's daughter." And he said, " The man told me, The dog eats the people, and the camel eats the people, and the snake eats the people. How am I going to pass them ? " And the woman said, " Take this grass, and let not the camel eat you, but when you pass the house you are going to, put the grass in at the door, lest it eat you. And for the dog, take this piece of meat, and put it near the dog, and let him eat it and not you. And for the snake, which is tied round the girl's waist, take this stick, and place it on the snake's head, and then the snake will die. After you have done this enter the house and go to the girl, and then marry her." So he married the girl.
VI. MISFORTUNES.
There is a story that a man once loaded his water-camels and took them to the well, and went to draw water. When he went to draw water he tied his camels together. When he was in the nullah he left six camels behind while he led the other six. When he was some distance off, the six camels that were left behind were not to be seen. So he ran back, and came up to find six lions eating the six camels. Then he left them, and returned to the other six camels, and found six other lions eating these. Then he took a waterskin from the camels, and came to his home, to find his family looted by an enemy.
TRANSLATIONS OF THE STORIES 165
VII. HOW TO CHOOSE A WIFE.
A man had a son, and the son said to his father, " Father, I want to marry a wife." Then his father said, " Do you take a widow." So he took a widow, and his father said, " Marry her." So he married her. Then his father said, " Tie her with a rope, and when she speaks to you, untie the rope." So he tied her with a rope, and the woman said, " This is not what I have been accustomed to see. What are you doing with me ? " Thereupon he untied the rope. In the morning his father came and said, " What did she say?" And he answered, "She said to me, This is not what I have been accustomed to see. Why are you doing that to me ? " Then his father said, "Send her away." That was one.
The father said to his son, " Take another wife, take a grown girl." Then he said, " To-night tie her with a rope, and when she speaks to you, untie it" So he tied her, and she said, "This is not what I have been accustomed to hear, why are you tying me with that ? " So he untied her. In the morning he came to his father, and he said, " She said, This is not what I have been accustomed to hear, what are you doing to me with the rope ? " Then his father said, " Send her away too." And that was another.
Then his father said, " Do you go and take a nice, young girL" So he took one, and he said, " To-night tie her with a rope, and when she speaks to you untie it." So the young man did so, and went to sleep, and was asleep all night. In the early morning the girl woke him up, and said, " The rope with which you tied me is fallen off and is not tied to me, tie it upon me." And in the morning he told his father, " Father, she said, The rope has fallen off, and is not tied to me, tie it upon me." Then his father said, " Keep that one, she is the right one." So she was the one he after- wards married.
VIII. MAN AND HYAENA.
It is said that the Hyaena owned flocks and Man had none. One day Man was looking after the Hyaena's flocks, and the Hyaena went to the Council After this Man thought, and he said, " Let us steal the Hyaena's flocks, while he is away at the council." So Man put the flocks in a zariba, and night came, and when it was night, they were driven off. The Hyaena howled, and went to the other animals, and he said, "See, I have been looted." Then they said, " Let us attack." They came along, and arrived at a pool of water, and the male Dikdik said, " If you do not let me come to the pool you shall not drink." " Sir, we will drink, leave us," they said. Then he scratched sand into it, until the water was gone, and they died of thirst, when they found no water.
166 TRANSLATIONS OF THE STORIES
IX. CAMEL AND HER FOLLOWERS.
It is said that a Camel possessed altogether a Snake, a Zariba, a Fire, a Flood, and a Lion, and Deceit, and Honesty. Those seven the Camel owned. One day Deceit said, "We might steal the Lion from that big Camel, let us kill the Lion." The others said, " How are we to kill him ?" Then she said, " Let the Snake bite the Lion, and when you have bitten him, go into the Zariba." So he bit him and went into the Zariba. Then she said, " 0 Fire, burn up both the Zariba and Snake." So the Fire burned both Zariba and Snake. Then she said, " The Fire has killed the Snake and the Fence, let the Flood too put out the Fire." After this Honesty said, " The Flood does not travel on the mountain, but only in the nullah, let us travel on the mountain with the Camel." So they travelled on the mountain, and then Deceit said, " Let us slay the Camel." So they slew her, and cooked the steak, and gulped down the steak, and except the steak nothing else of the Camel did they eat. And the meat stuck in their throats, for it was a big piece, and could not pass through their mouths. So they died.
X. THE BLIND MAN.
In a certain place many men were talking, and there were two men, one of whom was blind and the other was not blind. The man with sight said, " Why do you talk with a blind man ? He can see nothing." And the blind man said, " How do you know a blind man ? " The other one said, " We know a blind man, he is a man who sees nothing." Then the blind man said, " He that is blind is the man who knows nothing, he is blind."
XL
Then Swayne came and began to enlist many askaris. Then Swayne left and came to us at Harrar. Then he said, " I want askaris." Then Oscar Gerard said, " How many do you want ? " Then he said, " I want a hundred horsemen." Then he said, "The hundred shall be given you." The hundred were given. When they were given we marched and came to Adadleh. We made eight companies. Then we drilled, and we stayed for one month only. Then Swayne's force came to us, and we left Burao and went to Ber.
Col. Swayne and Col. Phillips were in command. The Mullah lived at Olesan. Then we came to Uduwein. An illalo was sent and told to look for the Mullah. Afterwards it was said to me, the Mullah had fled. We left Uduwein. Afterwards we went to Olesan. The Mullah was in the Nogal. We left Olesan, and afterwards at Wadamago we sent out illalos.
TRANSLATIONS OF THE STORIES 167
The illalos found some karias, and captured camels, female and male. We sent the horsemen and camel corps to attack. Afterwards when the force attacked we loaded up and followed. Then we marched for two days, and then halted at Haridig. The Camel Corps and horsemen brought in 8000 camels. Then Swayne said, "Two companies will stay here, and the camels will be left there." Then my company was left with the camels. Then Swayne's force went.
Capt. MacNeill and Murray were left at the zariba. Then we saw the Mullah's illalos. At 2 o'clock in the day his force came to us. When we saw the enemy the Sirkal said, " Come inside the zariba," and afterwards we attacked and then we slew each other and fought for four hours afterwards. At 6 o'clock we chased them away. After that we sat down together inside the zariba Then later on, at 7 o'clock at night, we attacked and fought for two hours, and at 9 o'clock drove them away. Now at 1 o'clock they returned and this time we fought for one hour only. Then we slew those men, and afterwards they ran away. Then the next day at 7 o'clock they came back, and then we fired at each other, and then during the day we shot all the dervishes.
Until they came close the maxim shot them, when they came close the askaris shot them with their rifles. (The maxim is a fine thing, a wild beast or devil.)
When the people went further off and the maxim was let off at them, then many people perished. After that they fled up to the zariba A Mullah man killed four askaris with his spear. Then we chased them and caught 40 men.
Capt. MacNeill sent for me and said, " Count for me all the Mullah men that are hit." I collected 10 askaris, and we counted 460 dead. Of our two companies they killed 9 men. Then MacNeill said, " Put the dervish dead men together somewhere." Then we brought them to one place. Then Swayne's force came to us, it had got nothing from the Mullah.
The whole force came together to Bohotle. And afterwards we sent out illalos, and they found many camels at Kurmis. The illalos came back and we saw many camels ; the whole force loaded up, and we went to Kurmis. The Allegheri were looted of many camels. We stayed fifteen days. The owners of the animals came to us. The people went to the Colonel and said, " We will follow you, and the sheep will be brought back." Then he said, "If you follow I will get you back your sheep, load up all your karias and bring them close in." Then the Allegheri followed us. Then they said, " We will look for the Mullah with you. Afterwards we loaded up and came to Bohotle. The askaris who were sick were left behind at Bohotle, and then we left Bohotle. We halted at Wudwud and afterwards sent out illalos from Wudwud They said, " The Mullah is far off." Then we started and marched for five nights and five days. On the next day we met the Mullah's force. Then we fought, 15 askaris were killed, and the Sirkal who talks Arabic. Dickinson sahib was struck with a bullet, he was struck in the thigh. Twenty-five askaris were struck with bullets, but not
168 TRANSLATIONS OF THE STORIES
killed. Then we found no water and came back. We were afraid, if the askaris have no water they will die. We spent fifteen days marching to Berbera. When we came here the askaris were given many camels. Every havildar was given 3, every jemadar 4, milk camels. The askaris received a month's leave.
There was the end of this force.
The second force came to Burao, and we stayed at Burao for four months afterwards. Then illalos were sent out and they went to the Ali Naleyah. They said, " We have found many animals." We marched there, four com- panies under Col. Cobbe and Col. Swayne. We went to Las Idleh, and at Las Idleh many horses came to us. Then we sent illalos, and the illalos said, " We have seen many animals." Then we left Las Idleh and marched on for eleven nights. We went to Jid Ali, to the Ali Naleyah. Then each company went its own way. We left Col. Swayne and half a company. Then we attacked the Ali Naleyah, and during the night and day looted the flocks. Then we brought the animals into the zariba Any men we saw we slew. Then we left. We reached Las Idleh in fifteen nights. Then the askaris were given sheep, each askari was given 12, a havildar or naik 20, jemadar or colour-havildar 30. Col. Cobbe and Col. Swayne went back to Berbera. Maj. Petrie and our four companies came back to Burao. Then we halted for a month at Burao. Then Col. Swayne joined us. He said, "The Force will go out; we will look for the Mullah. Let the Somali people bring camels to help," he said. Then the Habr Awal and Habr Yunis each brought with them 800 head of cattle, the Habr Toljala 600. Then the force moved My company remained behind for eight days. Then the Camel Corps and horsemen came from Berbera to Burao under the command of Capt. Osborne. Then we followed after the force. In five days we reached Bohotle. Then we joined Col. Swayne and the force at Bohotle. Then illalos were sent out. The illalos were away for ten nights. The illalos came back, and they said, "We have not seen the Mullah." Then the Colonel said, "We will advance." We advanced into the Nogal. Then we went to Gerowei. We looted many animals from the Mohd. Gerad. We stayed at Gerowei twenty nights. Illalos were sent out, they went to the Mullah at Mudug. The illalos came back to us and said, "It is a dry place, and we shall get no water." Then we made east and reached Halin. We looted many animals from the Naleyah Ahmed. Then the Sirkal said, " We will go back." For twelve days we marched and then came to Gaulo. Then the Colonel said, " Let two officers with the spearmen and animals go back." Then the animals and spearmen and two British officers went back. The Colonel left 3000 camels behind. Then illalos were sent. They went to the Mullah, and then said, "The Mullah is staying at Mudug." Then we loaded up and marched for five nights. On the sixth day in the early morning we met the dervishes at Brigo. Then we halted somewhere. After that the dervishes made a move towards us. When there was a mile between us, the Colonel said, "They will not fight with us, load up the camels and move." Then we
TRANSLATIONS OF THE STORIES 169
moved. The country was thick with trees. Then every company was extended ; thus we moved, and all at once they sent a volley into us. Then we lay our bellies on the ground, and we fought. Four companies departed. They were frightened and ran away. We three companies fought, the rest ran away. The three companies that fought were mine and two others. We came into the zariba, then the dervishes came. Three companies went out and drove them away. Afterwards we came to Bohotle.
SONGS.
In the songs a distinctly poetical style is noticeable, also a number of words, not found in colloquial Somali, many of which are absolutely unintelligible by themselves to an unpoetical native. Many of these words are coined by the author, but many are pro- bably old words handed down from generation to generation. It is necessary therefore in many passages for the author himself, or a fellow poet (of whom there are many, both professional and amateur), to explain the real meaning. Several of those which I collected I have not published here, as I could get no satisfactory rendering or explanation even from interpreters.
Those translations which I have given are necessarily free in many places and by no means literal. They are interesting as examples of style, rather than of grammar.
Songs are divided into three classes, known as Gerar, Gabei, and Hes1.
The Gerar is sung on horseback, and usually relates to raiding and fighting.
The Gabei is a chant of a more peaceful nature, and is often a love song. It is usually sung round the fire in the evening.
The Hes is the Dancing-song, and always accompanies a dance. It is often in parts for men and women, and is usually of an amorous nature.
1 Paulitschke (n. Cap. 2) describes six kinds of songs, and gives numerous examples.
SONGS 171
All three seem to have a somewhat similar rhythm, which runs as follows :
Halna wa | iga sa|lan, Halna wa | iga sa('abghad, Halna wa | Iga su|al.
Hal wa | I sa'ab|ghad,
wa | I sul|danka ajmanti,
siradlki Berber | ad,
lyti | wa hal|da subahh | joga,
The length of the whole line may vary considerably. An essential point is the alliteration of one letter throughout the song, each line of which must contain a word which contains that letter. Thus one song may have g, another d, and so on ; in a "g" song this letter occurs in some word in every line. The songs usually consist of solo and chorus, often sung in parts. Besides these, there are certain well-known chants which are sung while watering or grazing animals, marching, loading or unloading. Many of these are very old indeed. The watering chants vary for the different animals ; camels, horses, and sheep have each their special chants sung to them, which again vary in different tribes, and are adapted to the nature of the well in order to suit the action of drawing the water.
I. Gerar, in s.
Greeting to Sultan Nur on his visit to the Habr Toljala. ? 1885.
Somali. English.
Halna1 wa iga2 salan3, First we salute thee,
Halna wa iga sa'abghad, then we shake thy hands,
Halna wa iga sual. then we ask a question.
Hal wa i sa'abghad, First is our handshake,
wa i Suldanka amanti, is praise to our Sultan,
siradki Berberad, the light of Berberah,
iyo wa halda" subahh j6ga, who is as an ostrich standing in the
morning,
1 A poetical word meaning "one thing," " item," similar to kodl in prose.
2 from me. The sing, pronoun is used for the plural.
3 salaam.
172
SONGS
balashi kala saide', wahh la sisto la wah2.
Halna wa iga salan. Gela, Senyo3 iyo Lan3, sangayasha ghar&stei, gabdaha surta la m6da4,
iyo seyahhainu ku jifna. Sadada nabad ba leh.
Halna wa iga sual. Suldanki bokhronado, hor mahhau so'oten, sedka ainu 'uneno5 ? Rabi ya inna slyei, sadehhdeni Ishhak6, hadanan ku salughin, adiga 0 Suldano, salo yanna ka ye din7.
shaking out his wings, beyond compare.
Again we salute thee. The camels, Senyo and Lan, (and) the stallions have become fat, the young girls are like straight
sticks, and we lie in the dew. The tribute is one of peace.
And again we have a question. The Sultan who reigns, why hast thou come forth, that we should eat the sinews ? God granted to us, us three (sons of) Ishhak, if we do not make trouble with thee, thee, 0 Sultan,
that thou shouldst not bring com- plaint against us.
II. Gerar, in g.
The singer's tribe has been severely looted, and he demands justice.
Somali. Ma8 sidi gel6ga, o guluf mel ku daremei, yan gam'i wai haben. Sidi arka iyo g5sha,
English. Like the bustard,
who has seen an enemy somewhere, I cannot sleep at night. Like the lion and lioness,
1 The Potential tense is often used in songs for the Indicative.
2 This literally means, "nothing can be found to be given for it," i.e. no price.
3 names for camels.
4 lit. " is thought," an idiom meaning " is like." Cf. la bida in Yibir, q.v. 8 i.e. have the poor parts of the animal to eat.
6 i.e. Habr Gerhajis, Habr Awal, Habr Toljala, the three Ishhak tribes.
7 for lnanad salo naga yeain.
8 appears to be frequently used in songs without necessarily asking a question, especially in introducing similes.
SONGS
173
o gabnihi laga layei, gurhan ma igu bdte.
Sidi G6dir irman, o elmihi ka ghalen, garti mau ulule.
Sidi ganleh shisheyei, tollkei ma iss ugu gdftei.
Ma sidi nin gabobei, o nagu, gunyo ka dibei,
ku geshiyeya hhumatei, yan ugu hantameya.
Web her gerida jdga, ma gel annu lahain, e gudub nogu maghana, 0 haghi so gudbiya1.
Nabsi2 wa ma ghabdbei, herna3 wa ma gtidan, Guli wa wahh ma mogi, g6bina4 wa warranta.
Gelan manta haino, henya godonkbda, iyo wag^rki wadana, hadano gudfdin labadiba an gdine, mia no garaten* ?
whose young have been slain, I would make much clamour.
Like Godir, when with milk, whose young have been slaughtered, I would groan for justice.
Like enemies apart,
my tribe is divided among itself.
Like an old man,
whose wives, for whom he paid
much, have grown bad and lazy, I am angry at it.
For the lives that were taken, camels that were ours, whose fine has not been paid us, 0 bring out the "diya."
Fortune has not grown old,
and law is everlasting,
God is all-knowing,
and the high-born have the news.
Let us have the camels to-day, their genitals, and heart,
?
let us cut both,
do you decide for us ?
1 The price of a man's life is 100 camels, whether it takes place in a tribal fight, or raid, or in a private affair : this is the Arabic " diya," or Somali " hagh."
2 Nasib. 3 Somali custom.
4 gentry, or well born, opposed to tribes of doubtful origin, Esa, Gadabursi, Hawiya, and outcasts.
5 The general meaning of this stanza is clear, but 1. 27 I cannot translate.
174
SONGS
III. Gerar, in gh and g. To my Somali. Hamar 0, ghorohhdado ! Hamar 0, garadado ! Hamar 0, guwidado ! Hamar 0, ghofalkago ! Hamar 0, gadankago !
Hamar 0, ghorohhdado ! ghaili ' dof laga k^nei, iyo ghanfirka Hfndi, gh labkan ku arkei, g^suhugu dfnta2.
Hamar 0, guwidado ! gharidi Milmilad3 rati4 ghaib ugu nahhai ghorigi Berberad markab, ghaid u sugaya, ghun u j6ga, miya5.
Hamar 0, garadado ! ghalimali libahh, iyo saryen ghortu u ba'dei, iyo wlyil ghorah, miya.
Hamar 0, ghofalkago ! suryadan kaga rabto, ghalbigu ka garta, gelafdidka hawen, iyo wayel haj u gh6btei, an iss ku gh6nsan, miya.
Hamar 0, gadankagu !
Bay Pony.
English. 0 Hamar, your beauty ! 0 Hamar, your strength ! 0 Hamar, your size ! 0 Hamar, your obedience ! 0 Hamar, your price !
0 Hamar, your beauty !
a cloth brought from over the sea,
and Indian raiment,
things which I look at,
(and) die of astonishment.
0 Hamar, your size !
}as a camel which has grown very fat on the sand of Milmil, \ as a ship at the pier of Berberah, J waiting for orders, stands fast.
0 Hamar, your strength !
as a black-maned lion,
and a bull oryx with broad neck,
and a bull rhinoceros.
0 Hamar, your obedience !
the path which I desire
your heart understands,
as a dutiful wife,
and an elder gone on a pilgrimage,
without grumbling.
0 Hamar, your price !
1 a bright tartan cloth, most worn by Dolbohantas.
2 for gesana ugn flinta, lit. I die of astonishment at the thing I look at.
3 Milmil, in S. W. Somaliland.
4 Dolbohanta for "camel."
8 This word like ma is often used in similes. Perhaps it is only " eh ? "
SONGS
175
gholidan la halelo mama gas ka ma h6io'. Ma gasanad Sirkalku * ghaib u $6 ballagha ?
(from) the tribe I fight with, never can enemy take (you) away. Can the Sirkal ! who scatters his money so lavishly?
IV. Gerar, in d.
The singer tries to persuade two tribes to make peace.
English.
Somali. Wa innagi dan wadagta3, iyo iss ku dolad ahain, jini yu idin diifsan. War, tollo, inna4 daya!
Mel e ghailo daluntei, ma nago urleh la d6hhai5, o guriihi dab la rubei, an dunyo so dakhdaghaghin, bal dugeda hissaba6, wahh ku daida halkasa. War, tollo, inna daya !
Wayelka ya dad aslahha,
dalintase ka dida. Bal da'danahai, dai, bal ddrkan talinayo, iyo dawodeda hissabo, wahh ku daida halkana. 0 war, tollo, inna daya !
We are all of one salt, and under one government, a spirit entices you to evil. Ye tribes, desist !
The place you raised your shout, like women with child ripped up, whose homes are burned with fire, who have no property to move, 0 think how old it is, consider somewhat there. Ye tribes, desist !
The elders settle the affairs of a
people, but the young men disobey. See then, how old am I, how fairly I will decide, and weigh the case, consider somewhat here too. 0 ye tribes, desist !
1 Among the Somalia, a mare, a well and a woman belong to the tribe, and cannot be parted with without the consent of the tribe. Hence the singer here says " No one can take you from our tribe."
2 refers to British Officer.
3 la wadago take meat together. The 3rd sing, is used, just as the 3rd sing, of a verb is used after a pronoun with ba, e.g. idinka ba shakheineya.
4 or naga, is often used in such expressions, without necessarily referring to " us."
6 A custom fairly common among the Somalis until recently. The Mullah has often practised" it on his raids against the Ishhak. 6 i.e. it is so long since it occurred.
176
SONGS
Matani la dagughei1, iyo fardi ghad ku dulbelei, iyo debilihi la kahhayei, gashan kun2 la dareyei, ma dim6ne wahhas, o tollimdno ka ddrne. o samir bannu3 dedallei, wahh ku daida halkasna. 0 war, tollo, naga daya !
Hadi tana la dido, o laga d6rto 'olladda, annana3 wa dfrirra, 'olio, ha inna dulin !
V. Gerar, in g.
Somali. Nefka gadada weinleh amantis garan mayo Ma Haud4 gedaleh ba? 'Erku o galab hore gabdankisa, miya ? Libahh mel f6g ka guhha gabnihisi, miya? Gela,GedosiyoLan5 ganihisu, miya ? Ana, Ged6 iyo Hohhad7, gerarkeigu, miya? Afartlsi gundod dulka ugu gara'a, ma sidi gabad wein, o geyaukeda8 la slyei,
The wells are shut down,
and the horses are sore-backed,
and the camels are driven off,
milk is drawn on to shields,
we must not forget that,
and must choose to be of one tribe,
and wish for peace,
consider somewhat there too.
0 ye tribes, desist !
If this is refused,
and enmity preferred,
we too must fight,
ye armies, do not attack us !
To my Pony.
English.
My broad-chested beast,
how to praise him I know not.
Like grass-covered Haud ? "I Like the pattering J rain from last evening's sky ? \ Like«the cubs of a /lion roaring afar ? ) Like the foals of the /camels, Gedo and Lan ? 'I Like my own song /of Ged and Hohhad ?
His four hoofs
clatter over the ground,
like a grown girl,
who has been given her husband,
1 lit. covered with stones. Wells out of use are shut up by their owners, by covering them with wood and stones.
2 upon. This means that there is only enough to fill the hollow of a shield.
3 refers to "we, the singer's people," and not to the others. The pronoun innagl in line 1 includes the people addressed.
* The district S.W. of the Nogal Valley.
8 Names of camels. 6 The spring winds. (Hagar.)
7 The summer wind. (Karif.) 8 means the " betrothed."
SONGS
177
o guyo1 wein lagu dibei, darka ti gana'leh, iyo garbasarka haridah, iyo gashali huwatei, o gor ga lidka hadkeda, ninkiyo gama'san, gasinka u sita o kabihi gadda lo'ada', gara'^sa miya ?
VI. Gerar, in s.
Somali. Faraskeigu soyan, midabkagu ma s6 kan 'ad Sifahagu guy^dna ma sagal gu jir ba ? Ma sidi nin sirkalah ? Intan ku salahho, sankarkaga tura, golahan salebeya, o saharka ka idleya, an gedo kugu saya. Halki senyo ku s6fto, adigo wahh ku sema3, o sfema iga rid mahai, sunka ka de'b'in mayo. Wahhba ha i la sula'an, o salogiga ghunyar4.
and has received great flocks,
who, with most costly robe,
and silken raiment,
and dress, has clothed herself,
and at the time of mid-day shadows,
to her sleeping husband,
brings his food,
as with the shoes of cow's hide
she clatters ?
To my Pony.
English.
My fine horse, ba? your colour, is it not white ? Your manners and age are they not nine years ? Are you not like a gentleman ? As I groom you, I throw away the dirt, I clean the stable, and remove the dung, while I put down grass for you. Where camels graze, with you I must attack, and until I get my share, I will not loosen girths. Do not prance with me, and neigh softly.
VII. Gerar, in h.
A Raiding Song.
English. Have ye, over plains and plains, over (countless) plains,
Somali. Idinku baneyal5, banan idinku baneyal,
1 i.e. the dowry.
2 The women's shoes are not fastened by a strap at the heel, and, being just as heavy as the men's, make a great clatter in walking. The best shoes are of cow's hide.
3 touch, but here the meaning is "loot."
4 This is the meaning given me by the author, but I cannot explain it.
5 An intensive form of the plural.
K. 12
178
SONGS
Illahh beididi hai'sta, dtilan mau btilaten ? Barbar ma iss ka gurten ? Bad 6 ' mau ghdbsoten ? Bustihi2 iyo shalka3 ma Bad6
huwisen ? Rakabka birtaah sulka mau
barkisen4 ? Yassin6 maugu bahhden ? Butlyihi 'ollku jehhai, iyo budulki ma h^shen ? Isago ka balawaya, banan maugu takten ? Wllal, Ebba badbadshei, dabka mau bilbfshen ? Sibrar 'anaha bokha6, iyo habenkana barurta, ma barura 'unten ?
whose richness belongs to God,
gone out to war ?
Have ye assembled the young men ?
Have ye caught Bado ?
Have ye put on Bado the blanket
and trappings ? Have ye put the toe in the stirrup
iron ? Have ye made your prayers ? Where the enemy cut the ground, have ye found the tracks ? While he is talking, have ye taken to the plain ? Boys, enriched by God, have ye prepared the fire ? A skin of curdled milk, and fat for to-night, have ye eaten fat ?
VIII. Gerar, in b.
Cn the Raising of the Tribal Horse, 19037.
Somali. Gerar wa bogholal, wa badwein iyo m6jad, wa baburki sidisa. Ninki an badinahain berka wa ka ghalaha. Bablr mai makhashen ? Hadi gaso lo bilabo, o Burao lagu tont6mo8,
English. Songs are in hundreds, like the great sea and waves, like the ships.
The man who is not full of them, his bowels are cut out. Do ye hear my song ? If companies are collected, and hailed to Burao,
1 Name of a horse.
2 is the hairy skin placed over the saddle.
8 is the woollen trappings on headstall and breast-plate (sita').
4 With the Somalis, as with other African horsemen, the stirrup iron is small, and only the big toe is inserted.
5 The Prophet.
8 Curdled milk and melted sheep's tail fat are the usual supplies taken by a Somali on a raid.
7 This and the next two were made by my sais, or groom, on the occasion of the raising of mounted native levies for the operations against the Mullah, 1902-4.
8 from " tomtom " drum.
SONGS
179
wilal berka Ishhakah, adunk6da badna, an ku berkadsadahain1, ayan Sirkal Basha ka ra'i.
IX. Gerar, in b.
Leaving Somali. Innagu Burao jogna, ma jawabta illalo2 ? War, bulali3 jader, 0, so'od beinnaga4 j6ga. Jiryal affeyei, iyo sun b'e'id laga jehhai5, aya iss ku jidei bilawa. Wa jehhad6 tegeya, aya jld ar6ryo, ilia7 jidaneya. Anna 'ss ku jad8 ndkhona.
sons of Ishhak's loins,
of great wealth,
who are not weak-hearted,
I will follow the Sirkal Pasha.
Burao before Jidballi. English. We wait at Burao, has the scout brought answer ? Lo, wiry dun,
the time to march is upon us. I have sharpened spears, and cut a thong from an oryx, I have tied on a dagger. I go on a crusade, and start in the early morning, in order to hasten. We are of the same mettle.
X. Gerar, in b.
The Object of Fighting is Loot9.
Somali. In kastada bareiso, o ghasiradi bokhosho, la'agteidi bakshishleh, iyo hadan bur10 na la sinin, ama gela Badwein bada leigu 'eriyin,
English. However many you kill, and cut their pay, my bakshish money, if it is not given us in heaps, or the camels at Badwein if they are not looted for me,
1 I do not know the derivation or correct form of the word in this line, but the meaning was explained as I have given it.
2 scout, spy. 3 dun-coloured pony. 4 foa innaga. B Oryx hide is the strongest in Somaliland.
6 Being an ignorant man, he did not realise the meaning of this word, or he would not have used it in referring to a campaign against fellow Mohammedans.
7 in la. 8 is the Hindustani word.
9 The Somalis, even our so-called friendly and protected tribes, have no compunction in saying that they will not join our army unless we promise them loot, in the shape of camels. It is also implied here that money is of little consequence compared to camels — an important fact to remember in dealing with these people.
10 mountain. Here equals " piles of money."
12—2
180 SONGS
inan forska1 u b6do, that I join the force,
wa hal an bihhihainin, is a thing of no value,
Sirkal berka u sheg. let the Sirkal remember in his heart.
XL Gabei2, in d.
Lament on the Invasion and Raids of the Mullah, Mohammed Abdallah, 1900—1904.
Da'da3 gabeiga watan4 beriaha daba'ei digdya, Forget the holy song I formerly laid down,
Hadba anigu o dayei ya dari tidahhai, Now I myself too have ceased from what people sang,
An dubeyo wa ki beriaha igu dahhsonei. And from what came to me to sing before.
An ku d'odo, Somali yan hadalka dei'nahain, Let me speak out, and if Somalis cease not their chatter,
Dab61ki an ku rido, hedoda an daboka gud saro. Let me put on the lid, and cover up the dish.
Digti halei dahhdiga ka ma gam'in, da'kirka an ka'ei, All last night my heart could not sleep, in the morning I arose,
Derewfshtu wa ti ka timi degalodoiyo, There were the Dervishes come from their homes,
Darudki5 wagi hore yei dabin oghojen, Darud first had laid his snare,
Dabadedna wa ti lei yimi dagahhan Idoro6, And afterwards he was come to the land of Idoro,
Dareghada7 iyo wa ti guben, dinti Ne'biga dab ku shiden, There were the priests' schools burned, the faith of the Prophet set fire to,
1 Adopted from the English.
2 I have given as literal a translation of these " Gabeis " as I can, but in some cases where I am not able to explain how the meaning is arrived at, I have given the meaning derived from a colloquial paraphrase by the author.
3 1 — 5. Old songs do not suit the present days of strife,
Now keep quiet unless you wish me to stop.
4 And later 1. 7, wa ti, cf. § 289.
6 Name of the Somali tribes, including Dolbohanta, Ogaden, etc., i.e. the tribes of the Mullah.
6 A name for Ishhak.
7 Daregho is a school where young men learn their religion, or are trained for priesthood. The chief schools are at u. Sheikh, Hargeisa ; the u. Sheikh one is that referred to here.
SONGS 181
Dabuna da'ei iyo dunida nafbdei, And he carried off loot and laid waste the earth,
Dadku da'ei, ag6nti dulmiya1, derisadu layei, He robbed the people, injured the orphan, slew the neighbours.
Dubki2 iyo shaladki, arladdi lagu doafei, Their headcovering and chant, as they tramp over the ground,
Sidi danab ku da'ei, rerihi digoda lo rebei. Fell like lightning and thunder, our homes were left as dung.
Ebbo, adi ya dayenah, an duri ku moghene, 0 Father, thou art everlasting, and all knowing,
Dalki adaha laba nin3 ya dasaddu tunei, Two sides have clamoured for portions of the land,
Rabo, kala dabal eida madhar leiss la d6neya. 0 God, separate the armies which seek one another.
XII. Gabei, in m.
My future Wife.
An maleyo tan4 mage wa madahhada Guledo. It is in my mind that she whom I would marry is the (daughter of) the head of the Guleds.
Marrin5 'as weiyei, o ga'amo wa majeno r6bah, She is pink, and her hands are like drops of rain,
Kub malasan ba lehdahai, marodi wa sohhei, Her ankles are round, her skirt is pleated,
Talaboda magug o ma rldei, wa miyirisei. Her steps are not those of a fool, she walks daintily.
Malaek sameis an farsamo, lagu ma nagin6. She is after the fashion of an angel, a virgin full of skill,
7Weli melod jogtana maarag, ku maana moghene. Never yet have I seen the place of your abode, nor have I any knowledge of you.
1 Orphans are ordered to be specially protected by the Koran.
2 The white cloth they tie orer their heads as a badge. 8 The Mullah's people and the British Government.
* tian.
B pink colour, or light copper, the favourite colour among Somalia.
6 From nag woman.
7 The singer now addresses the lady.
182 SONGS
Halun1 ba mirtfdaha ghalbigu ka muradsidei, Last night, for half the night, in my heart I dreamed of you.
Marrwein hoyoda wahhannu sin Mur2 ai rerato3, We will give your aged mother a loading camel,
Walalkana hamar maidan ban malin ho odane4. And to your brother one day I may present a pure bay pony.
Mos ban u jebin abaha, Mura5 iyo Hemaleh6, I will divide a host of camels with your father.
An majalis wada ghaddnne, miday6da kali. Let us all take our places, come to my people.
XIII. Gabei, in d.
To Dahab.
Dirahh h<5rte, Guban6 o lei dilei, dukha la hayamei. In the spring time, Guban is dead, the people have taken the road.
Ninki dano kahhayo banan dauga so ghdbeya, He who leads water-camels, takes the road to the plain.
Dukhan5 iyo Ogaz6 6 dalei, derig la dansh6do, Dukhan and Ogaz have foaled, and are proud with repletion.
Wa derejo labadeni o ghollad 'ss ku darei, Here is honour for both of us, who meet in one room,
Unsiga ad nagu dadisida. Dahab 0, no kali ! While you sprinkle scent over us. 0 Dahab, come !
Wahhad d6nto wa laga heleya, Dahab 0, no kali ! Whatever you wish will be given you, 0 Dahab, come !
Dud7 annu nahai la ma horeyo, Dahab 0, no kali ! Our tribe is second to none, 0 Dahab, come !
Akhal dorah mod leiss ku darei, galmo daba joga, Our goods are laid together in a beautiful house, the camels wait behind,
Durba holaha naga ghobo, Dahab 0, no kali ! Now take our flocks, 0 Dahab, come !
1 Halei un. 2 Name of a camel.
3 That she may load. 4 Ho take, hold. Oflo say.
6 Names of camels.
6 The maritime plain from which the tribes wander into the more fertile Ogo, or southern slopes of the Golis range, at this time of year.
7 Forest. Here used for tribe.
SONGS 183
Wan lei dilei, barur laga dala'ei, A ram is slaughtered, fat is cooked,
Aulalada diran, manfa'an wada d6nonne, Dahab 0, no kali ! The ribs are ready, let us all find food, O Dahab, come !
Sar dab61anx, hes2 danoneiyo, weso darandera, Put on the shield-cloth, hang up spear and white flask,
Tusbah d6rah, iyo watahhan3 hore u si dadsha. Lovely rosary and prayer-mat lay in front.
Kabo dalinka leisska diga e malmo lagu dalo, In weariness one lays aside shoes in which one toils by day,
Iyo ga'anta ka ma dein karo jedal dubandabeyo. And the whip which the hand cannot cease from flicking.
Daf hadan, la so yidi gogolaha darah gogoshuwa, Enter now then, the beds are ready spread,
Dalaghdalagh4 u so'odkad hubki dib u lo lafiyotei5. ? ? ? ?
XIV. Hes, in g.
Dumar 0, kunka kabaha, kulliga damanta, Ye women, the thousand generations, all and everyone,
Sikakaaga akhal gudi u garane. Of your ancestors within the house we may know.
Illahed goisi u garane. Raga gelisi u garane. The partitions of a room we may know. We may know the men's camels.
Gashan ma ghadan, ma ku gaban taghanin ? Do you carry a shield, do you know how to lower it?
Marka rag iss u srt galo, ma gangani taghanin? When men compete, do you know how to draw a bow?
G^ranka afki u badan iyo gojoda lugtaah m6yi. The great clamour from your lips, and the dancing of your feet, I know not
Gembi kaleh ma garatan ? Is there any other art you understand?
1 Somalia keep their shields white and new by covering them with a white cloth.
2 Name of a particular kind of spear.
3 Watann is the tree from which the bark is taken for tanning leather.
4 Wagging of the head. 5 Walk.
THE DIALECTS OF THE OUTCAST TRIBES, YIBIR AND MIDGAN.
1. ACCOUNT OF THE TWO TRIBES.
These two tribes are called by Somalis Sab, or outcast, being considered of low origin and not descended from Darud or Iskhak (cf. Appendix III). For this reason Somalis will not mix with them or intermarry.
The Yibirs are said to be sorcerers, and to have prophetic powers and the power of cursing. They live by begging, but especially by the levy of a tax on Somalis, at a marriage or the birth of a child, according to an old tradition told in a story which is given here in Yibir dialect.
The Midgans are by nature hunters or trappers, and live largely by the meat of game they can kill in the jungle. They are also employed by Somalis to work for them, in return for which they receive occasional payment, in food or otherwise, and protection, from their employer. This work consists in fetching wood, drawing water, and digging and cleaning wells.
Both tribes also work in leather, tanning hides, and making leather ornaments, saddles, shoes, etc.
They profess to be Mohammedans like pure Somalis, but the Midgans are very lax in their religion, being unclean in the matter of the meat they eat. Many, however, are comparatively civilised and are strict on this point.
Neither Yibir nor Midgan have any definite tract of land, like the numerous tribes of Somali. They are scattered as wanderers over the whole country, the Midgans either attaching themselves to some Somali tribe as abban, or living upon them as robbers and thieves.
Each tribe has its own dialect, which has hitherto been kept as a solemn secret from the rest of the world. They still insist upon
YIBIR AND MIDGAN DIALECTS 185
secrecy from Somalis, and made me promise not to divulge to their hereditary enemies what they were quite willing to explain to the white man.
I, therefore, rely upon any who may read this not to disclose to any Somali what I have been allowed to write down for the benefit of the Sirkal, but if any other officer of an enquiring disposition wishes to pursue the subject, he should be acquainted with the Somali language, which all the Sab know, and discuss these things with one of them.
2. OBSERVATIONS ON THE DIALECTS.
(Quoted by kind permission of the Editor of the Journal of the African Society1.)
Yibirs and Midgans are both very jealous of their languages, and keep them a secret from other Somalis, although all speak the common language of the country, namely Somali. There are, I believe, no Somalis who know anything of either dialect, and while I was having my interviews with these people, they were very particular not to allow any Somali within hearing, our conversations having to be carried on in the latter's language.
Here let me repeat that I was put on my word by both peoples not to divulge anything to a Somali, but was allowed to write it down for the use of British officers, their vanity being evidently touched by the idea of a white man wanting to study their language.
Therefore I must ask any who may read this and who may sojourn in the country, not to repeat what I give here to any Somali, not of Yibir or Midgan birth.
A. W. Schleicher is the only author who refers to an unknown language {Die Somali- Sprache, p. x) :
"Unter den Somali leben mehrere Helotenvolker, von denen die Midgan, Tomal und Yibber die bekanntesten sind. Nur die Yibber scheinen eine eigene Sprache zu besitzen, die sie unter sich sprechen."
"Bestimmte Angaben dariiber konnte ich nicht erhalten, dem Somali sind die Yibber ein Greuel. Nach Hussein versteht kein Somali ihre Sprache, doch verstehen die Yibber alle das Somali."
1 Journal of the African Society, No. xni., October, 1904.
186 YIBIR AND MIDGAN DIALECTS
The construction of the languages, I find, is the same as that of the Somali tongue, as spoken all over the country, and by all tribes ; that is to say, they are identical in, and the same rules apply in
(1) Syntax,
(2) Conjugation of Verbs,
(3) Inflexions of Nouns and Adjectives,
(4) Methods of forming Derivative Verbs, etc.
In the matter of Vocabulary, the following parts of speech are practically altogether different from Somali and from one another, though a very few roots are common to all three :
(1) Nouns,
(2) Adjectives,
(3) Verbs, and consequently, (4) Adverbs,
(5) Conjunctions,
(6) Prepositions.
On the other hand such parts of speech as,
(1) Definite Article,
(2) Demonstrative Pronoun,
(3) Possessive Pronoun,
(4) all Particles,
are common to all three, and have the same forms and constructions.
The Yibir vocabulary is fairly complete, though poorer than Somali. The Midgan, on the other hand, is extremely deficient. A large number of words have therefore to do duty for several meanings each, according to the context.
Examples,
Yibir.
dalanga any animal or bird (an appropriate epithet or descrip- tion being required for each individual kind).
agar thing, stuff, food, etc.
a "rer," family, home, flocks, belongings, baggage,
property.
awas any vegetable, tree, grass, wood.
iftin light, sun (fern.), moon (masc), star, rupee, silver,
money (as adjective = bright or white).
NOTES ON THE DIALECTS
187
ilahh fire, gun (as adjective =hot).
mid exist, be, stop, stand.
tomala anything hard, hill, stone (adjective = hard).
lawo water, rain, river, year.
Midgan.
hangaguri any wild beast (carnivore).
nas thing, place, time, town, person, self.
ghoribirro wood, and anything made of wood, tree, bow, shaft of
spear, thorn,
gosad iron, knife, any iron tool,
iftimowa sun, light, day.
gomosfmo water, rain, river,
ghan good, large, heavy, far, white, hot, full,
neghatal bad, small, light, near, black, cold, empty,
makabur stone, hill, money, rupee (as adjective = hard).
I could not find any other native words to translate the various meanings given opposite each of the above.
Where special definition is required, some paraphrase is used. Yibirs have no special names for animals, but use such expressions as the following :
dalangihi khabarki ghandldsan hyaena (lit. the animal with
plenty of noise).
dalangihi walahumo ku dashlya oryx (lit. the animal having
spears).
Midgans describe the lion and leopard as, hangaguri ghan, and hangaguri neghatal, respectively.
The following are good examples of other paraphrases required by the languages :
my father (Mid.) alowihi i so finfinshei.
(Yib.) goriedki i jagh'idei, literally, the man who begat me. yesterday (Mid.) iftimowihi tegedei.
(Yib.) iftinti tegedei, literally, the light that has gone, to-morrow (Mid.) iftimowihi so tegedeya, literally, the light that is coming.
188
YIBIR AND MIDGAN DIALECTS
I am hungry (Mid.) guratada wa neghatal, literally, my belly is
small (or thin), look at (Mid.) ind6kholaha ku yef.
(Yib.) ainta ku yef, literally, turn your eyes to. pray (Mid.) gomosfmo 'ss ku dahhdahhbi, literally,
buy yourself with water. (N.B. Does this refer to the Mohammedan ablutions before praying, or has it any connexion with Christian baptism ?)
evening (Mid.) iftimowihi neghatala himirki so 'idbeya,
literally, the small light, as night comes on.
Notice that these phrases are similar in each language. A number of words too are common to both :
Examples,
teged |
go |
shan |
go |
bakhrin |
head |
ganad |
hand |
yal |
foot |
ruf, rof |
dead |
yef |
turn |
ku dashi |
have |
On perusing a grammar of Galla, I found that no special connexion exists, as I had expected, between that language and either of these dialects. Where any similarity occurs, it pervades the Somali as well.
Many Somali roots are found in these dialects, with additional syllables.
Somali. |
Yibir. |
Midgan. |
English. |
if |
iftin |
iftimowa |
light |
indo (plur.) |
ain |
indokhol |
eye |
makhal |
makhalei |
makhashimei |
hear |
ghori |
ghoribirro |
wood |
|
af |
afjaghin |
mouth |
|
san |
saneg |
nose |
|
kol |
kulhi |
time |
|
laf |
lafil |
lafeiti |
bone |
lugh (voice) |
laghdan (tongue) lagh (talk) |
laghowa (throat) |
NOTES ON THE DIALECTS
189
The inflexions of Yibir and Midgan are the same as those of the Somali, and not of the Galla language, as, for instance, agreement of Adjectives, inflexions of Verbs, plurals of Nouns, and the Definite articles.
Derivative words are formed in the same way as in Somali ;
Examples,
so Idib
Idib shan
go.
so shan
}
fed (Y) wish feflo look for
ind6khol (M) I
ain (Y) J J '
makhali <Y) 1 makhashin (M) J
yifan (Y) j s
kul kusho
shamei J (M) give.
take
eat, or drink.
inddkholei aimei
makhalei
}
i
hear.
makhashimei J
■ mi I make good, yifnei J
so\dbi . I bring, so snamei J
'id (Y)give.
'ido eat, or drink.
indokoleisi|shew
aimeisi J
makhaleido ) listen makhashimeiso J to.
ghamo yifno
be good.
The following Midgan root ragh, or raghahh, is interesting as regards its various derivatives and constructions, which are all purely Somali.
raghahh
raghahhi mayo
'ss ka raghahh
so raghahh
ku raghahh
faras ku raghahh raghahhi
gosad ku raghahhi raghahho raghahhsan
ku raghahhsan raghahhsanei raghahhsano
ku raghahhsano
act, do, fix
I will not do it
sit down (set yourself)
wait
catch, hold
ride a horse
set, place, make
cut (with a knife)
take to yourself, marry
be, exist, He, live
wish, have
give
look for
like, love
In an account, given me by a Midgan, of the traditional origin of his tribe, it was suggested that this language was invented
190
YIBIR AND MIDGAN DIALECTS
by the Midgans' ancestors in the jungle as a secret code. This may possibly be the case, judging from the following examples :
Midgan. |
||
hand farolahato |
from Somali j Uaho |
fingers possess |
arrow degoyir |
fdego tyir |
ears small |
breast fddolahato |
fddo |
ribs |
Clarke's gazelle } diboder (Dibatag) J |
fdibo tder |
tail long |
oryx gesoder |
„ geso |
horns |
sheep yiryiro |
fyeryerplur. form I of yer small |
|
skin gadlahato |
gad |
beard |
liver madobiyo |
f madd tbiyo |
black water |
3. EXAMPLES OF SENTENCES AND CONVERSATION IN YIBIR AND MIDGAN.
Midgan.
higge ka so 'idibtei ?
alowa ba so 'idbeya.
naskas i kul.
goriedki ghansana.
awinti ghansaneid.
higgan so duhur.
'ss ka sir.
higga 'ss ka raghahhsano.
gararati shar bannu dagnei.
gedgharomed ma ku raghahhsana ?
raghahhi mayo.
jalmihi gomosfmodi u 'idbi.
hajiaha g6sad ku raghahhi.
bulalki so shanshamei.
gomosfmo ma raghahhsanid.
makaburta u sharei.
ma dukhanta ?
ma sharodei ?
ghoribirro ghan i kul.
baghdankini i dagsi.
nasina i kulin.
guratada wa neghatal.
wahhan kushodo i kul.
iftim6wihi tegec'lei alowihi i so
finfinshei la rufiyei. iftim6wihi neghatala bodowyashi
higgar u shamei.
English.
where have you come from ?
a Midgan is coming.
give me that.
the good man.
the good woman.
come here.
go away.
stay there.
we saw many horses.
are there trees there ?
I will not do it.
take the camels to water.
cut the rope.
light the fire.
there is no water.
give more money.
are you sick ?
are you well ?
give me a big stick.
teach me your language.
give me nothing.
my stomach is empty.
give me something to eat.
yesterday my father was killed.
in the evening take the burden camels over there.
192
YIBIR AND MIDGAN DIALECTS
Midgan.
iftim6waha ban Aji sukhodin ku
dukhei. awintaida yag61ka raghahhsanta. moyodi higga erifogad iss dukhesa
wa shar. wa mahai naskas bakhrinka ku
raghahhsan ? yag51kaigi makaburta ghan ku
raghahhsana. naskakan hangaguri shar ku
midsha, hajia bannu ku ra-
ghahhadna. hadad hangaguri ghan i indo-
kholeisineso, makabur shar ban
ku kuleya. himirki jalmahaiga laga la sirei.
iftirnowihi tegedeya, kulhidi mo- yodi jalmihi higga erifogad u shameineso, an rufino moyoda, o jalmihi la sirno.
English.
to-day I shot a Somali with a
bow. my wife is at home, the people fighting over there
are many, what is that on your head ?
my house is by the big hill.
here are many animals, we catch them in traps.
if you shew me a lion, I will give you much money.
in the night my camels were
looted, to-morrow, when the people take
the camels over there, let us
kill the people, and go off
with the camels.
Yibir.
ma yafantahai ?
ma yafnan ba ? so yafnan miya ?
higge u bidbidefnesa ?
higga dugageigu wa tegedeya.
mahhad f^desa ?
wahhan ka fedeya inad kalwein
i 'ida. humaggi mahhad 'fdatan ? g6dibki ma 'idatan ? dugagagu weli ma awelisatei ? weli ma awelisan. ddrigas mahhad ku awelein ?
English.
are you well ?
is it peace ?
where are you going ?
I myself am going there.
what do you want ?
I want you to give me a tobe.
what do you eat at night ? do you drink milk ? are you married yet ? I am not married yet. what are you going to do with that?
EXAMPLES OF SENTENCES AND CONVERSATION
193
Yibir.
jalmo ma ku dashisa ?
ku ma dashiyo.
alkhailahagu wa inhima ?
wa ghandid.
awaski yafneisfya, dalanga wa so
bidbideineya. anghagi ad yiftimeisei ma so
ganiden ? g<5riedkas ain ba rufsan. derigi lagu anghaksodo "huwad"
ba la bida. khabar ghandid ba lagu bida. mahha bakhrefneya ? ma la wo ? agarma ku midesa ? agar ku ma mideso. kulhimad bidbideinesa ? higge ka so tegedei ? alkhail ku tegedeya. mahliad u tegedi weida ? goriedki ma mideya ? higga darsad 'ss ka midi. ainta igu so yef. godib i so shimi. jalamada so shimiya. dalangaha bakhreineya agarma
u fedeya? ada biggan midslya. jalamada kabarta ku midsiya. agartada la teged. higgisa ha mideyo. khabarma aweleinesa ? wa lei rufiyei. difadki iga bilehh. kalweinti humaksaneid yifnan
iss ugu shimi. agarma aimeisei ? khabarma makhaleidanesei ? dengas ma ku duhuresa ? ku ma duhuro.
English.
have you any camels ?
I have none.
how many are your horses ?
they are many.
make the zariba strong, a wild
beast will come, have you caught the Mullah
you were fighting? that man is one-eyed, the thing one prays on is a
"huwad." you are good at the language, what is that noise ? rain ? what is in there ? nothing is there, when are you going ? where have you come from ? I am riding a horse, why don't you go ? is the man here ? sit down at the back there, look this way. bring me some milk, bring the camels here, what does the animal making
that noise want ? put the things down here, load up the camels, take your things away, (leave it alone.) let it be. what are you doing ? (abstract.) I am killed, cut the rope from me. fold up the blanket well.
what did you see ? what did you hear ? do you understand that ? I do not understand.
13
194
YIBIR AND MIDGAN DIALECTS
Yibir. kulhida g<5riedka so tegeda, i so
lagh. khabarkas 'ss ka ladishei. agarteidi wa ku midesa. saddehhi kulhiod wa ku laghei. watahhadi darsad galabfdi so
tegeda. watahho walba kulhfdi iftinti so
godista wa so tegedena. ani, yahafnyahh ba la bida. gamaghda, gamaghdis ba la bida. hegha yu lakheya. khabar lagu aweleya, ma ku
duhuresa ? gorieddi yiftimeisa khabar yafan
ma ka so tegedeya ? higga wa lagu oremei. khabarkas urshen ba la bida. gorieddi almanki fedatei agar ma
aimeisei ? agar ghandid bei
aimeisei. higgi lo gurei, almanki ma la ga
bagheyei ? aihi darsad, awas ba aimeina
yafan. ghorimada yafan dugagina awe-
leyei, lawihi laga tegedo, deriihi
urshena ma awelin. igu makhaleido, khabar an ku
laghi. wa ku makhaleidaneya, khabarkas
i lagh. higgas ugu orensanyahai. goried yafan ba lagu bida, kha-
barkagi i lagh, bidbidsin mayo, ha bidin.
waferka katowa ku ma dashlyo. hilaghamaha hadeidinan agar ka
'idin, ma yafna khabarkas.
English. when the man comes, tell me.
never mind that, leave it alone, my things are there. I have told you three times, come back to-morrow evening.
we will come every day at sunrise.
it is big, small.
you are right, he is right.
he is telling a lie.
do you understand what is said
to you ? is there good news from the
army? he was killed there, that is bad news, has the force found some stock ?
they have found plenty.
was the force frightened away from where they went to ?
at the next village we find good grass.
your people made the good boats to cross the sea on, the bad ones they didn't make.
listen to me, I will tell you a story.
I am listening, tell me that story.
it is torn there.
you are a good man, say your
say, I will not go against it. no. it is not. that knife is blunt, if you do not give anything for
the wives, it is not good.
EXAMPLES OF SENTENCES AND CONVERSATION
195
Yibir. fil iftin wa so doi'yoneya. d^rigan asuwan bu ku dashfya. lawihi darsad yu awelisaneya. derigi asuwanti jagh'idei dado yu
u 'ida iyo iftimo. altob yafan, tobanihi fftimod, iyo
lfmihi ganadod o dado yu u
'idei, kulhidan ya ka fedeya. jalmahaiga derigo ya ka almamei. jalanka inhfman kaga doiyoda ? hosi u bidbidei. Abiryaha walahumo aweleya. kabarti horyadedi kulhidi ad
midesen, ya'unki ku la khab-
reyei iyo dugagagu den yafan
ba la bida. dugagisu u yafan. tomalaha aniga adayadau shantei,
lawo iyo awas yu u fedatei. dugageigu u shameya, hadanan
rufin. goriedki jalmihi iyo dadodi fedtei,
ma so tegedeya ? deriihi anghaga ka daras tegedei.
goried difada ya la gu bida. shanihi kulhiod wa anghaksona,
saddebhi kulhiod wa humaggi,
limihhi wa watahhadi. difadki jalanki u lagu awelein
jira. dantashi seyadki lagu shimfn jira. deriihi yabar yifno o Anasioda
'idin jirta, Hanfili ka so godisa. Anas ain rufsanei kulhina ma ku
so godisei ? waferti humaksana lugu tegejiyo.
English. I am going to buy some rice, this one has a wife, he will marry next year, to the girl's father he gives sheep
and money, he gave a good shield, 10 rupees
and 20 sheep, now he is
engaged, that man looted my camels, how much do I pay for a camel 1 put it down below, the Tomals make spears, the old man who spoke with you,
when you went to the front of
the house, and yourself are
great men. he is the senior, my " rer " has gone to that hill,
for water and grazing. I am going myself, in order not
to die. is the man coming who fetched
the camels and sheep ? those who followed after the
Mullah, you are a gentleman, we pray five times, three times
at night, and twice by day.
the rope with which the camel
is tied, the vessel one puts ghi into. Hanfili leaves alone people who
give plenty to the Yibirs. has a blind Yibir ever come to
you? the knife to cut the hair with.
13—2
196
YIBIR
A CONVERSATION, IN YIBIR.
Anaski ya'imkaaha dadodisi inhfde ruftei?
Aferi ganadod iyo limihi ganadod ya rtifei, huwadisi inhida aha.
Khabarma u laghei ?
Kalweinaleh bu u shimlyei.
Iftimo yu ka fedtei, jalankisi anigaaha yu la tegedei.
Inhima ku so shansaneyei ?
Ya'un fila iyo ya'un asera, limihi kalweinod, iyo mado kushan iyo difad asuwanta kalweinta ku shansoto, yu ku so shansodei.
Asuwantadi inhide iftimo u 'idei ?
Aferi iftimod iyo aferi ganadod
inhidas u 'idei. Kulhidiu 'idei
bu i laghei, "higgaga midi,
hadan iftimo darsad aimeisto
wa ku so 'idahaya." Kulhidas dugageda na laghdei,
" Gamagh." Anaskohadi asuwantadi u inhidas
o iftimo u 'idei, asuwanteidi
inhide ad u 'idei ? Limihi ganadod iyo limihi iftimod
ban u 'idei. Hadad inhidas u 'idei, miad inhi
ghandidah u 'idei ? Inhida o iftimo an ku dashiyei,
inhi kelemad hadan ku dashiyo,
ban u 'idi laha. Iftimo mad u maghurtei ? Maghurti aimein wai. An iftimo u maghure, ma u
shimfnesa ? U shimin mayo, higgeigannu
midinena.
How many of the old man's
sheep died? Thirty have died, that number
of skins there were. What did he say ? He took them to Berbera. He wants to sell them, he went
with his big camel. How much was he carrying ? One man's (?) rice and dates, two
tobes, and an anna, and a
sash to tie his wife's dress, he
took. How much money did he give
your wife ? Twenty-four rupees he gave.
When he gave it, he said she
was to stay where she was,
and if he got more money, he
would give it. Then she said to us, "All right."
If that man gave that money to your wife, how much did you give mine ?
I gave her twelve rupees.
If you gave that, did you give
much? So much I had, if I had had
more, I would have given it.
Did you borrow money ?
I could get no loan.
I may lend you some money,
will you take it? I will not take it, we are staying
where we are.
MOHAMMED HANIF 197
MOHAMMED HANIF (Ancestor of the Yibirs).
Kulhfdi horimad anghag ba lagu bidei1. Hig bu mldsha2, The time before a priest there was. Where he lives
goried la ma midfn jirin. Deri'ihini3 horimad, iyo deri'ihi people with not to live used. Your people before, and the people
anghaksodei dehhdodi u mldshei, limihi ya yfftimeyei. Deri (who) prayed (who) among them lived, both fought A man
yabar ghandldsan ya la bidei. Deri'ihini horimad ya u so
of property plenty he was. Your people before to (him)
godisei. "Awas no cidbi," yei laghen. "Khabarkeku fedesan4?" came. " A herb to us bring," they said. " What reason for do you want(it) ? "
yu laghei. Kulhfdas yu laghei, "Deriahan anghaksoda yannu ku he said. Then they said, " These people (who) pray we with (it)
rtifinena." Kulhfdas yu laghei, "Wa iftimo ghandidah, idinku will kill." Then he said, " It is money plenty you
i 'idi mahai5, awaskeiga idin 'idin mayo." Kulhfdas yu
to me give without, my herb to you give (I) will not." Then they
goderdwi iftimo iyo goderdwi jalmo inhfdas awaski yei kaga a hundred rupees and a hundred camels so much the herb they for
doiybden. Kulhf das yu awaski u sara 'idei6. Kulhfdas ya deriihi bought. Then he the herb to (them) gave. Then the people
anghakstfneyei alman so fedten7. Kulhfdasa yei deri'ihini horimad (who) prayed a raid went for. ' Then they your people before
yei alman u so fedten. Kulhfdas limihi godertfwi o lawod8 yei they a raid on (them) went for. Then for two hundred years they
hig midshei, o higgiu tegedei ya aimein waiyen. Kulhidasa a place lived, and where they went (they) find could not. Then
1 Think, la bida it is thought. This is used for "is" (Somali wa). 8 Aorist, from midso.
3 Plur. derio. Here the narrator refers to the people of the person he was addressing (i.e. myself), whom he considers to be the same as the Gala, derllbi anghaksodei means Moslems.
4 Somali : mahhad ku donesan ?
6 Somali: idinku 1 sin mahai unless you give me.
6 Hand over. Somali flib.
7 Look for. (wan fedta.) Somali ddno. alman fe&o, Somali dul.
8 Water, rains, i.e. year.
198 TIBIR
deri'ihi anghaks6neyei higga ku rufen. Kulhfdas yei anghagi the people (who) prayed there died, Then they the priest
yabar yifmefyen1 anghagi bu rufei. Adlsi ya la alman. Weled property fought the priest he died. His home was looted A boy
yahafnyahh u u jagh'idei, ya higgi ka so godisei, weledki iyo small (whom) he begat, there from came, the boy and
aferi kelemad hig midfn jirei. Weledki Mohammed Hanif ba four others a place live used to. The boy Mohammed Hanif
la bidei. Weledku kulhfdas yu anghag nokhdei, asuwano yu was. The boy then he a priest became, women he
difadfn* jirei. Dugaglsu3 higga midsha o asuwano difadsha2, used to. (while) He there lives and women ,
anghagi yifna ya u s<5 shamei, Au-Bakhardli bu nokhdei. Kulhfdas the priest great to (him) came, Au-Bakhardli he was. Then
yu u laghei, " Khabarma higgo u mldesa, o anghag lagugu bida ? " he said, " What there for do you live, and a priest for are ? "
Kulhfdas bu laghei, " Dugagagu ma iga anghaksantahai ? " Then he said, " Yourself (are you) me than (more) holy ? "
Kulhidasu laghei, "Ka anghaksanahai." Kulhfdas yu u laghei, Then he said, " Moge holy I am." Then he said,
"Khabarka ad iga anghaks&ntahai igu aimidsi." Kulhfdasu " The reason you me than (more) holy are me to shew." Then he
laghei, "Higgas an ka4 godisaya, ka godis dugagagu." Kulhfdasu said, " There I will penetrate, through go yourself." Then
tomalaha anigah yu hosidlsi ka godisei. Kulhfdas ka godisei, that hill great he beneath it through went Then (he) went through,
o higgo u ku godisei, yu u laghei Au-Bakhardli, "Tomalaha 0, and there he in went, he to him said Au-Bakhardli, " O Hill,
gan'id." Kulhfdas tomalihi 'ss ku godisei, kulhfdas yu hig u seize." Then the hill together went, then he where he
ka so godiso aimein wai. Tomalaha dehhdlsi yu ku rufei out may come see could not. The hill in it he died
1 This is not correctly given, but the sense is "They fought over the dead priest's property."
2 Whether this means "marry," or "rape" is not clear, dlfad rope. There is one story that Mohammed Hanif was expelled by Sheik Ishhak because of his immorality.
3 Self, person, dugagalga I myself.
4 Through, across.
MOHAMMED HANIF 199
anghagi. Anghagi aihayaga higgas u ku rufei. Kulhfdas ya the priest The priest of our tribe there he died. Then
weldihi1 u jagh'idei yu u laghei, "Augayoada ruflyei, agar
the boys he begat they said, " Our father you have killed, something
no-ga* 'id." Anghagi ba ku laghei, khabarkan kulhfdasu to us for it give." The priest to (them) said, this word then he
u laghei, " Ma watahhadan goder<5wi jalmo idin 'ida, mase said, u (Am I) to-day a hundred camels to you to give, or
weledki goried u jagh'ido yan ilbir idin ka sara 'ida ? Sara- the son a Somali begets I a ewe to you for (him) am I to give ? The
doshiski mian iftin idin ka sara Ida?" Kulhfdas ya weldihi marriage am I money to you for to give ? " Then the boys
laghen, " Weledka ilbir noga sara 'id, saradostriska iftin, said, "The boy a ewe to us for (him) give, the marriage money,
weldahana3 ilbir. Inhfdi ka darseisa inhida khabarka
and the boys a ewe. That (which) follows (hereafter) so much for that
yannu agarta ku 'idtfnena." Khabarkas yannu agar ku we as the price for will receive." For that reason we a price
shansonna, Anasyod&yadu. Kulhidi iftinta iyo ilbirta na lo take, we Yibirs. When the money and the ewe to us is
'ido, awasyo yahafnyahh yannu u 'idna. Wannu u yabartfnna. given, sticks small we to them give. We ' thus earn our living.
Awas kelemad o ghandldah wa ku duhurna. Derigi rufrufeya Herbs other many (we) understood. The man (who) is sick
iyo derigi aim an fed6neya, iyo derigi lagheya, "an and the man (who) is going on a raid, and the man (who) says, "let me
derigas ka ur behhensanado," inhfdas awas lo 'ido yannu than that man be better," for that a herb to be given we
ku duhurna. Deriga, annu u 'idna, iftimo ghandidah yu, know. That man, (to whom) we give, money plenty he,
kulhida u yifnado, no sara 'ida. when he is successful, to us hands.
1 Plur. weldo-ni.
2 na u ka. Cf. ka siso pay for.
3 And.
YIBIR-ENGLISH and MID&AN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
The following is a list of Yibir and Midgan words not used by other Somalis.
Words, such as Pronouns, Particles, etc., are not given, being common to all three dialects.
Nouns are recognised by the Definite Article which follows each noun, separated by a hyphen.
Examples,
ain-ti eye bulal-ki fire
In these examples, ain equals an eye, bulal equals a fire ; " the eye," " the fire," would be, ainti, bulalki.
The suffixes, -ki, -gi, -hi, are masculine, -ti, -di, are feminine.
Abbreviations :
(Y) Yibir dialect.
(M) Midgan dialect
(Y), (M) common to both dialects.
v.i. intransitive verb.
v.t transitive verb.
a. adjective.
The Arabic letter ain (*) is represented by ', ghain is represented by gh, kh. ^
fl represents the " cerebral d," which at the beginning or end of a word sounds like d, but in the middle of a word is more like r.
This letter in Yibir is pronounced usually like dh.
a-di (pi. ao-hi) (Y), family, "rer," agar-ti (Y), thing, any concrete
possessions object ; agarma ku midesa ? what
ababo-di (M), Plateau Gazelle, is there ?
" dero " aghtul v.t. (M), strike, hit
Abir-ki (Y), Tomal (an outcast aimei v.t. (Y), see, find, understand
tribe that work in iron) aimeisi v.t. (Y), shew, teach
adeisfmo-di (M), milk ain-ti (Y), eye ; ainta ku ye/, turn
aferi-hi (Y), four your eye (i.e. look)
afjaghin-ti (M), mouth aintoli-hi (Y), lie, untruth
VOCABULARY
201
Aiyifan-ti (Y), Gala Aji-gi (M), Somali alb&khar-ti (Y), cow aleliso-di (M), bird, bustard alkhail-ki, -shi (Y), horse alman v.t. (Y), rob, loot alman-ki (Y), army, enemy alowa-hi (M), man (esp. ref. to Midgan man), not used in referring to a Somali ; aloicihi i sofinjinshei, my father altob-ki (Y), shield amedo-di (Y), goats anaduhr-ki (M), elephant Anas-ki (Y), Yibir Anasnimeiso v.i., collect the " sa-
manyo " Anasnimo-di, the " samanyo " paid
to Yibirs anghag-gi (Y), priest, "mullah" anghakso v.i. (Y), pray ani-gi (Y), largeness ; ani ba la
bi&a, it is large kniah a. (Y), great anisan a (Y), complete, correct, new asahan-ti (M), woman 'aser-ti (Y), (M), dates ('asero-hi) 'aserah a. (Y), red (sometimes ase-
radh is used) 'asero-hi (Y), blood 'as6wa-hi (M), blood 'assi (M), lynx asuwan-ti (Y) wife au-gi (Y), ancestor Awashona-hi (Y), God awas-ki (Y), vegetable, grass, tree,
bush, zariba, grass mat ; aicaski
aldibo, the sacred tree of the
Yibirs, used as a charm, aweilei v.t. (Y), do, make, construct,
cause aweiliso v.t. (Y). do for yourself,
marry awin-ti (M), woman
babato-di (M), cloth, dress
baghdan, v.i. (M), talk, tell, say ; nasker bad baghdamesa? what are you saying ? baghdan-ki (M), talk, speech, lan- guage bagb v. (Y), (M), be in fear baghei v.t (Y), (M), frighten bagho v.i. (Y), (M), be afraid ; ka
bagho, be afraid of bakhar-ti (M), cow bakhrei v.i. (Y), make a noise
(? inverted "khabrei") bakhrin-ki (Y), (M), head balkhalo-bi (M), lesser bustard baneisin-ki (M), in front, before behhensan a (Y), useful bid v.t. (Y), think ; khabarma bi- desa ? what do you think ?
The Passive, formed by "la," is used for the verb " be " —
lei bida, I am ; lagu bida, thou art ; he, she is ; you, they are ; la na bida, we are —
e.g. derigas ba la bida, that is ;
Anas ba lei bida, I am a Yibir ;
ha bidin (don't think) it is not. No
bidbidei v. (Y), go
bidbidsei v.t. (Y), make to go, send
away, throw away bikho-di(M), "Dik-dik" bilehk v.t. (Y), cut bi'yuso v.t. (Y), like, be pleased boba'un v.t. (M), gulp down bod6wa-bi (M), camel buf-ki (M), donkey bulal-ki (M), fire, smoke, fire-arm bulalyei, v.t. (M), burn, heat, forge bulbul-ki (Y), stick bulbul-shi (Y), whip buskulohh-i (Y), butter
dabo-'ad (M), Haartebeest dado-di (Y), sheep dag v.t. (M), see, understand dahir-ki (M), fat, ghi dahhbi v.t. (M), buy
202
YIBIR AND MIDGAN
dalanga-hi (Y), animal damdmei v.t. (M), dig, excavate damomya-hi (M), inside dangharei v.t. (Y), refuse daras-ti (Y), behind, tail ; ka ddras
teged, follow behind d'arowa-hi (Y), breast, udder darsad (Y), afterwards, subsequent ;
watahhddi darsdd, to-morrow darsei v.i. (Y), be behind, be left ;
kulhidi ka darseisa, afterwards dashi v.t. (Y) (M), have, possess
(always used with "ku"); inhima
ku dashisa ? how many have
you? degayir (M), arrow degig-gi (M), donkey deri- -gi, -di (Y), finger; one
person ; derigas, that one ; deri
ba ku mideya, there is one derigab (Y), loins diboder (M), Clarke's Gazelle dibyalin-ki (M), behind, after, back,
tail (of an animal) ; dibyalin u
raghahh, stand back ; dibyalin-
keigi, behind me dffad-ki (Y), rope, snare dikhxarin-ki (M), hide (of game),
prayer-mat dilin-ti (M), " Dero " dolyo v.t. (Y), buy dubadyo hi (Y), jugular vessels dugag-gi (Y), person, people, self;
dugaggeigu, I myself duhur v.i. (M), travel, go ku duhur v.t. (Y), understand;
ku duhuri mayo, I don't under- stand dujo v.t. (M), leave ; 'ss ka dujo, let
be, never mind duk v.t. (M), strike, kill dukhan v.i. (M), be sick, be afraid ;
be empty, be broken dukhumei v. (M), ? fear dul-shi (Y), end of backbone dusar-ki (M), elephant
dussi (M), leopard
erifogad-ki (M), distance, in time or space, year, country ; higgar erifuydd, away over there ; erifo- gddkini, your country ; erifogddki tegedei, last year
faled-di (M), rupee fardaho-hi (?M), finger farolahato-hi (M), hand, arm fed v.t. (Y), wish, want, mean ;
mahhad fedesa ? what do you
want? fedo v.t. (Y), look for fedolahato-di (M), breast fidsin-ki (Y), camel's hump fil-shi (Y), grain ; / tomdlaah,
jowaree ; f. if tin, rice fin, or finfin v.t. (M), give birth to,
beget finso v.i. (M), be born
ga'alo v.t. (M), like
gabar-ti (M), water-flask
gabis-ki (M), shield
gadlahato-di (M), camel-skin, shield
galabi-di (Y), evening
gamagh-i (Y), truth. Yes. All
right gamagho v.i. (Y), be right, correct,
true ganad-di (Y), (M), hand
In counting, "ganad " refers to
the five fingers and means five : limihi gdnadod, ten ; saddehhi
gdnadod, fifteen ; aferi gdnadod,
twenty gdnaddi yafneid, right hand ;
g. yahainyahheid, left hand gana'id v.t. (Y), catch gararati-gi (M), horse gedgharom^d-ki (M), tree geryal-ki (M), Waller's Gazelle
ge8°?T* }(M),Oryx gesolahato-di J
VOCABULARY
203
gir-ki (M), ostrich
godanahh-i (M), chest
goiierowi-gi (Y), rosary, hundred
godib-ki (Y), milk
godis v.i. (Y), come, arise, come up,
begin ; kulhiddi iftinti so godista,
at sunrise ; humaggi wa godisa,
the night is coming on golof-ti (M), woman gomosfmo-di (M), water, river, rain gonya-hi (M), inside, within gorad-ki (M), cup gorbei v.t (Y), pray for, beg goried-di (Y), (M) (plur. ofgoriedki),
people, men goried-ki (Y), (M), man, person gdsad-di (M), iron, metal, any metal
article, knife ; gosadku raghahhi,
cut (with a knife) gosin-ki (M), "Aoul," Soemering's
Gazelle gujin-ki (Y), meat guratd-di(M), stomach, belly ; gura-
iddi wa neghatal, I am hungry ghami v.t. (M), make good, im- prove ghamo v.i. (M), be good ghan a. (M), large, long, good (far,
fat, hot, white) ghandid-ki (Y), plenty ghandldah a. (Y), many; jalmihi
ghandidkadh, the many camels, ghandidei v.t. (Y), increase ghansan a. (M), good ghodahh-di (Y), tin for ghi ghoribfrro-di (M), wood, bush, thorn,
branch of a tree, any article of
wood, bow ghorin-ki (Y), plate, dish, ship
hajla-hi (M), rope, string, trap haman-ti (Y), bird Hanan-ki (M), Yibir Handud-ki (M), Tomal Hanflli (Y), Hanfili, the Yibirs' ancestress, spirit
hangaguri-gi (M), animal, any wild
animal hainyalisan a. (Y), mad halyokho-di (Y), iron hawar-ti (Y), backbone hedig-gi (M), ostrich hekho-di (Y), lie, untruth big-gi (Y), (M), place; higgan,
here; higgcb, there; higge? higma?
where ? bilghan-ki (Y), see 'ilaghan himir-ki (M), night horimad (Y), before, (time) horyad-di ( Y), before, in front, (place) horyalin-ki (M), before, in front hosyad-di (Y), below, beneath hosyalin-ki (M), beneath, below humag-gi (Y), night humaksan a. (Y), black; humak-
sano bakhrinka, hair humbur-ki (M), fox hur-ki (M), quiver (of arrows) huwad-ki (Y), prayer-mat huwiya-hi (M), sheep-skin
'id v.t. (Y) (M), give
'idbi v.t. (M), make to go, take, lead ; so Hdbi, bring
Idib v.i. (M), go ; so lidib, come
'ido v.t. (Y) (M), eat, drink
idon v.i. (M), go away, run away
iftimo-hi (Y), money (plur. of iftin)
iftim6wa-bi (M), light, sun, day ; iftimoicaha, to-day; i. tegedei, yesterday ; i. so tegedeya, to- morrow ; i. neghatal, twilight ; i. n. himirki soHdbeya, evening
iftin a. (Y), white, bright
iftin-ki (Y), moon
iftin-ti (Y), sun, light, rupee
flaghan-ti or -ki (Y), child, daugh- ter, or son
ilahh-hi (Y), fire, fire-arm ; ilahh awelei, light the fire
ilan-ti (Y), leg
204
YIBIR AND MIDGAN
ilbir-ki (M), limb ilbir-ti (Y), ewe ildighan-ti (Y), bow ilowa-M (Y), ram imil-ki (Y), male camel imitirahh-i (M), wing inddholeisi v.t. (M), point out, shew ind6khol-shi (M), eye ; indokholaha
u yef, look ind6kholei v.t. (M), look at inhi-di (Y), (M), quantity: inhidas,
so much; inhima? how much?
how many ? irso v.i. (M), remain still
jagaflaho-di (M), shoe, sandal (plur.
jagafiahoin-ki) jagh'id v.t. (Y), give birth to, beget;
goriedki ijaghHdei, my father jagha-bi (Y), child jalan-ti (Y), (M), she-camel (plur.
jalmo-hi) jankho-hi (Y), kid, young goat jehhar-ki (M), buck-Aoul jimikb-hi (M), caracal-cat jindar-ki (Y), ox, bull
kabar-ti (Y), house, loading-mat, load of a camel
kalabed-ki (Y), half
kalwein-ti (Y), cloth, clothing; k. hutnaksan, blanket
kalweinaleh-di (Y), town, Berberah
katowa-hi (Y), mouth, edge; wa- ferka katowa ku ma dashlyo, that knife has no edge
kelemad a. (Y), other
kbabar v.i. (Y), talk, speak
khabar-ki (Y), speech, talk, lan- guage, news ; khdbarkas 'ss ka ladishei, stop that talk ; khabar- Jcas, like that ; khabarmad fedesa? what do you want 1
khabrei v.i. (Y), talk, speak
kub'en-ti (Y), tail, tail-fat.
kul v.t. (M), give
kul-ki (M), half
kulhi-di (Y), time ; kulhidan, now ;
kulhidas, then ; kulhima ? when ? saddehhi kulhiod, three times ;
kulhidi horyad, before kulun, v.i. (M), be sick kunoli-hi (Y), heart kushan-ki (Y), ring kusbo, v.t. (M), eat, drink
labodin-ki (Y), (M), body, belly ladishei (Y), leave ; 'ss ka ladishei,
cease, let be lafeiti-di (M), bone lafil-shi (Y), breastbone lagh v.i. (Y), speak, tell, say laghdam-ki (Y), tongue lagbowa-hi (M), tongue, throat lamdi (see limdi) langharomid-ki (M), rice lawo-hi (Y), water, rain, river, year ;
lawihi darsad, next year lawodaur-ki (Y), water-bottle (lawo-bi (M), milk) lig-gi (M), buck-Gerenuk limdi v.i. (Y), (M), sleep, lie down ;
(infin. limdiyi) limi-hi (Y), two ludub-ki (M), penis
mad6biyo-hi (M), liver maddkushan-ki (Y), anna madola-hi (M), tortoise maghur v.t. (Y), lend makabur a. (M), hard makabur-ti (M), hill, stone, pebble,
money makabur-ti (Y), tortoise makbalei v.t. (Y), hear makhaleido v.t. (Y), listen makhali-di (Y), ear makbasbin-ti (M), ear makbashimei v.t (M), hear makhashimeiso v.i. (M), listen manabho-di (Y), food marubo-bi (M), plate, dish
VOCABULARY
205
mid v.i. (Y), be, exist, be present, remain, be alive ; agarma ku midesa ? what is there ?
mid (Y), (M). go ; 'ss ka mid, go away; so mid, come; la mid, go with, accompany
midsan v.i. (M), sit down
midsi v.t. (Y), bring
midso v.i. (Y), remain, live; ya^unki ku jaghHdei ma midsha? is your father alive ?
mirdolo-hi (Y), penis
mirgin-ki (M), plant, vegetable
moyo-di (M), people
mukhtaren-ki (Y), needle, bodkin
nafel-ki (Y), hunger
nafelo v.i. (Y), be hungry
nani-gi (Y), bag, satchel carried
by Yibirs nas-ki (M), thing, place, time, self neghatal a. (M), small, bad, few
(thin, near, black, light) nirokh-i (Y), loins
omas-ki (M), bird oran-ki (M), guinea-fowl oremi v.t. (M), kill oren v.i. (M), die
orensan v.i. (M), be sick; (Y), be spoilt, torn
raghahh v.i. (M), act, do, catch; raghahhi mayo, I will not do it ; 'ss ka raghahh, sit down ; so raghahh, come here, wait here ; ku raghahh, catch, hold ; gararati ku raghahh, ride a horse
raghahhi v.t. (M), set, place, make ; gosad ku raghahhi, cut (with a knife) ; 'ss ka raghahhi, put it down there
raghahho v.t. (M), take for your- self, marry
raghahhsan v.i. (M), be, exist, lie,
live, think; ku raghahftsdn, have,
want raghahtsanei v.t. (M), give raghahhsano v.t. (M), look for ; ku
raghahsdno, like remi v.t. (M), hit, strike rer-ki (M), feather rihin-ki (M), meat rish-ki (M), ostrich-feather robsahan-ki (Y), (M), loins r6f v.i. (M), die r6f-ki (M), corpse ruf v.i. (Y), die rufi v.t. (Y), (M), kill rufsail v.i. (M), be sick, be poor
saddehh-hi (Y), three
sakhsakh v.t. (Y), slay, cut the
throat saneg-gi (Y), nose salolad-ki, -di (M), goat saradoshis-ki (Y), bridegroom,
wedding sareyagh-i (M), ostrich saryen-ki (M), bull-Oryx sedah-hi (M), legs of ostrich seyad-di (Y), (M), oil, ghi shamei v.t. (Y), (M), take, lead ; so
shamei, bring shan v.i. (Y), iW), go ; so shar,
come shani-hi (Y), five
shanshamei v.t. (M), kindle (a fire) shanso v.t. (Y), take for yourself,
keep, put in, cany shar a. (M), many, plenty sharei v.t. (M), increase sharo v.i. (M) be well shashin-ki (M), things, property,
belongings shimi v.t. (M), take ; u shimi,
put in shirfei-di (Y), small quantity siftihh a. (Y), fat siftihh-di (Y), fat
206
YIBIR AND MIDGAN
silsil-ki (M), hair (usu. plur. sil-
silodi) simokh-i (Y), leg sir v.i.'(M), go so'oto-di (M), foot, track sukhodin-ti (M), bow
tabantab v.i. (M), walk, pass,
wander tagi v.t. (Y), fasten tahab v.i. (MX move, go ; mahhad
u so tahdbtei 1 what have you
come for? takhalamo-di (Y), song teged v.i. (Y), (M), go ; so teged,
come ; alkhail ku teged, ride a
horse; ka teged, cross tegeji v.t. (Y), send tingir-ki (M), Waller's Gazelle tiro-gi (Y), liver tobani-hi (Y), ten tomala a. (Y), hard tomala-bi (Y), stone, hill
ukub-ki (M), ram ulud-di (M), upper arm 'unimad6- (M), cheetah 'unukh-bi (Y), throat uro-di or ur-ti (Y), stomach 'urshen a. (Y), bad 'urshen v.i. (M), smell 'urshen-ti (M), nose 'ursheni v.t. (M), smell 'ursheni-gi v.t. (M), anything that
smells, dung, etc. uskin-ki (M), leg
wafer-ki (M), spear
„ (Y), knife, tooth
walabun-ki (Y), spear
Waran-ti (Y), Midgan
watahh6-di (Y), day ; watahhddan, to-day ; watahhddi darsad, to- morrow
wawa'li-gi (M), dog
weled-ki (Y), boy
yabar-ki (Y), goods, wealth, pro- perty
yabaro v.i. (Y), make your living, earn your living
Yadur-ki (Y), Midgan
yafan or yifan a. (Y), good, right hand
yafnan-ti (Y), goodness, health, Peace
yafneisi v.t. (Y), make good
yafneisiso v.t. (Y), arrange for your- self
yafno v.i. (Y), be good
yag61-ki (M), "herio," camel-mat, hut
yahafnyahh a. (Y), small, bad
yaban-ti (Y), two annas
yahbab-ti (M), herd of Oryx
yal-sbi (Y), (M), leg
yaliyifo-bi (Y), shoes
ya'un-ki, -ti (Y), old man, woman ; ya'unti jaghHdei, mother
yef v.t (Y), (M), turn
yiftimei v.i. (Y), fight
yihan-ki, ti (M), man, woman
yiryiro-hi (M), sheep and goats
COMPARATIVE VOCABULARY OF SOMALI, YIBIR, AND MIDGAN.
English |
Somali |
Yibir |
Midgan |
after |
dambe |
darsad |
dibyalin |
amulet |
ghordas-ki |
godahhed-ki |
|
animal |
bahal-ki |
dalanga-hi |
hangagiiri-gi |
anna |
gambo-di |
madokushan-ki |
|
2 annas |
antin-ti |
yahan-ti |
|
arm |
ga'an-ti |
ganad-di |
farolahato-di |
army |
'oU-ki |
alman-ki |
moyo-di |
arrow |
fallad-di |
wafero yahainyahh |
degoyir |
backbone |
adahh-hi |
hawar-ti |
|
bad |
hhun |
hirshen |
neghatal |
be |
aho |
la bid (be thought) |
|
bear (beget) |
dal |
jaghld |
finfin |
before |
hor |
horyad |
horyalin |
beg |
bari |
gorbei |
|
belly |
leg-gi |
labodin-ki |
labodin-ki |
beneath |
hds |
hosyad |
hosyalin |
bird |
shimbir-ti |
haman-ti . |
aleliso-di |
black |
inado |
humaksan |
neghatal |
blood |
dig-gi |
'asero-hi |
'asowa-hi |
bone |
laf-ti |
lafil-shi |
lafeiti-di |
bow |
ghanso-di |
ildighan-ti |
sukhodin-ti |
boy |
wil-ki |
weled-ki |
janakh-i |
bradawl |
muda'-i |
mukhtaren-ki |
|
breast |
lab-ti |
d'arowa-hi |
fedolahato-di |
bring |
j la kali ( so kahhai |
so shimi |
so shamei |
so idbi |
|||
burden (of camel) |
akhal-ki |
kabar-ti |
yagdl-ki |
bush |
tged-ki Idir-ti |
awas-ki |
ghoribirro-di |
buy |
Ibso |
doiyo |
dahhbi |
butter |
bur'ad-di |
buskulohh-i |
208
COMPARATIVE VOCABULARY
English |
Somali |
Yibir |
Midgan |
camel (female) |
hal-shi |
jalan-ti |
jalan-ti |
„ (male) |
aur-ki |
( imil-ki (jalan-ki |
bodowa-hi |
carry |
sido |
shanso |
raghahho |
catch |
ghobo |
ganaldo |
ku raghahho |
chest |
sakar-ki |
godanahh-i |
|
child |
inau |
ilaghan |
janakh |
cloth |
maro-di |
kalwein-ti |
babato-di |
come |
j imo fkali |
so teged (etc.) |
si idib (etc.) |
godis |
|||
corpse |
miyid-di |
ruf-ki |
r6f-ki |
country |
bilad-ki |
hig-gi |
erifogad-ki |
cow |
( lo'-di ( sa'-i |
albakhar-ti |
bakhar-ti |
cup |
dasad-di |
gorad-di |
|
cut |
goi |
bilehh |
gdsad ku raghahh |
dates |
timir-ti |
'aser-ti |
( 'assi-di { nahhad-ki |
day |
malin-ti |
watahho-di |
iftimowa-hi |
die |
bakhti |
ruf |
r6f |
dig |
ghod |
damdmei |
|
do |
/fal •< ghobo I samei |
aweilei |
raghahh |
dog |
e'i-gi |
• |
wawa'li-gi |
donkey |
dabeir-ki |
himar-ki |
(buf-ki \ degig-gi |
drink |
«ab |
ido |
kusho |
dung |
har-ki |
'ursheni-gi |
|
ear |
deg-ti |
makhali-di |
makhashin-ti |
eat |
*un |
ido |
kusho |
evening |
galab-ti |
galabi-di |
iftimowihi negh- atala |
ewe |
sabein-ti |
ilbir-ti |
|
eye |
il-shi (pi. |
indo) ain-ti |
ind6khol-shi |
far |
fog |
erifogad-ki |
|
fat (n.) |
haid-di |
( sahol-shi \ siftihh-di |
dahir-ki |
tail-fat |
badi-di |
kubi'in-ti |
|
fear |
bagho |
bagho |
dukhun |
feather |
bal-ki |
rer-ki |
COMPARATIVE VOCABULARY
209
English |
Somali |
Yibir |
Midgan |
fight |
dirir |
yiftimei |
iss duk |
finger |
far-ti |
deri-gi |
|
fire (and fire-arm) |
dab-M |
ilohh-i |
bulal-ki |
flask |
weiso-di |
lawodaur-ki |
gabar-ti |
food |
sor-ti |
manaho-di |
|
foot |
ag-ti |
ilan-ti |
so'oto-di |
forge (v.) |
tun |
awelei |
bulalyei |
frighten |
baji |
baghi |
dukhumei |
Gala |
Galo-hi |
Aiyifan-ti |
• |
ghi |
subukh-i |
seyad-di |
dahir-ki |
girl |
gabad-di |
ilaghan-ti |
janakh-di |
give |
si |
id |
kul |
go |
(tag \ so'o |
l teged |
( teged |
•< shan |
shan |
||
( bidbidei |
Idib tahab I sir |
||
goat (female) |
ri-di |
amed-di |
salolad-di |
„ (male) |
orgi-gi |
yahan-ki |
salolad-ki |
God |
Ilahh |
Awashona |
|
good |
wanaksan |
yafan, yifan |
ghknsan |
goodness |
yifnan-ti |
||
be good |
samo |
yifno |
ghamo |
make good |
(samei = make) |
yifneisi |
ghkmi |
grass |
aus-ki |
awas-ki |
aus-ki |
great |
wein |
aniah |
ghan |
greatness |
weinan-ti |
ani-gi |
|
gulp |
lukho |
bobahin |
|
hair |
timo-hi |
humaksano-hi |
silsilo-di |
half |
bad-ki |
kalahed-ki |
kul-ki |
hand |
ga'an-ti |
ganad-di J |
ganad-di |
farolahato-di |
|||
hard |
adag |
tomklaah |
makabiir |
have |
( hai ( laho |
ku dashi |
ku dashl |
ku raghahhsan |
|||
head |
madah-hi |
bakhrin-ki |
bakhrin-ki |
hear |
makhal |
makhalei |
makhashimei |
heart |
wadna-hi |
kundli-hi |
|
hill |
bilr-ti |
tomala-hi |
makabtir-ti |
horse |
faras-ki |
alkhail-ki ( |
gararati-gi |
fuf-ki |
|||
house |
akhal-ki |
kabkr-ti |
yagdl-ki |
14
210
COMPARATIVE VOCABULARY
English |
Somali |
Yibir |
Midgan |
how many ? |
imisa ? |
inhima ? |
inhima ? |
hot |
kulul |
ilohh |
|
hump (of camel) |
kurus-ki |
fidsin-ki |
|
hunger |
gajo-di |
nafel-ki |
|
be hungry |
gajo |
nafelo |
guratadi wa negh atal |
improve |
wanaji |
yifneisi |
ghami |
increase |
(badi ( kordi |
ghandidei |
sharei |
iron |
bir-ti |
halyokho-di |
gAsad-di |
jowaree |
harud-ki |
fil tomalah |
|
jugular vessels |
tuman-ki |
dubadyo-hi |
|
kid |
makhal-shi |
jagho-di |
janakh-di |
kill |
dil |
rufi |
(r6fi \ oremi |
kindle (fire) |
shid |
aweilei |
shanshamei |
knife |
bilawa-hi |
wafer-ki |
g6sad-di |
language |
( af-ki ( hadal-ki |
khabar-ki |
afjaghin-ki |
baghdan-ki |
|||
leave |
da |
ladishei |
dujo |
leg |
lug-ti |
yal-shi |
( yal-shi ( uskin-ki |
lend |
amahho |
' maghilr |
|
lie (untruth) |
bein-ti |
I hekho-di \ aintoli-di |
|
lie down |
jif |
midi |
hmdi |
light (n.) |
if-ki |
iftin-ki |
iftimdwa-hi |
like (v.) |
ja'alaho |
ku bi'yuso |
ku raghahhsano |
limb |
lahhad-ki |
ilbir-ki |
|
listen |
degeiso |
makhaleido |
makhashimeiso |
liver |
b&r-ki |
tiro-gi |
mad6biyo-hi |
loins |
sarar-ki |
( robsahan-ki ( nirokh-i |
robsahan-ki |
long |
der |
der |
ghan |
look |
eg |
ainta ku yef |
indokholei |
look for |
ddno |
fedo |
raghahhsano |
loot |
(da' ) la tag |
alman |
la sir |
mad |
wallan |
hainyalisan |
|
madness |
wallo-di |
hainyali-di |
|
make |
samei |
aweilei |
raghhah |
man |
nin-ki |
goried-ki |
goried-ki |
COMPARATIVE VOCABULARY
211
English |
Somali |
Yibir |
Midgan |
old man |
odei-gi |
ya'un-ki |
yahan-ki |
many |
badan |
ghandidah |
shar |
marriage |
aros-ki |
saradoshis-ki |
|
marry |
gurso |
aweiliso |
raghahho |
mat (prayer-mat) |
masala-hi |
huwad-ki |
dikhrarin-ki |
meat |
hilib-ki |
gujin-ki |
rihin-ki |
Midgan |
Midgan-ki |
( Yadur-ki ( Waran-ti |
Alowa-hi |
milk |
'ano-hi |
godib-ki |
adeisfmo-di |
money |
lalag-ti |
iftimo-hi |
makabur-ti |
moon |
dayah-hi |
iftin-ki |
iftimo\rihi himirka |
mouth |
af-ki |
katowa-hi |
afjaghin-ti |
near |
ag-ti |
gonia-hi |
|
new |
'usub |
anisan |
|
news |
war-ki |
khabar-ki |
baghdan-ki |
night |
haben-ki |
humag-gi |
himir-ki |
no |
maaha, maya |
ha bidin |
|
nose |
san-ki |
saneg-gi |
'urshen-ti |
other |
kaleh |
kelemad |
|
ox |
dibi-gi |
jindar-ki |
|
peace |
nabad |
yifnan-ti |
|
people |
( dad-ki I r5g-i |
moyo-di |
moyo-di |
goried-di |
|||
person |
ghof-ki |
deri-gi |
|
penis |
gus-ki |
mirdolo-hi |
ludub-ki |
place |
hag-gi |
hig-gi |
| hig-gi \ nas-ki |
plant (n.) |
beir-ti |
awas-ki |
mirgin-ki |
plate |
hedo-di |
ghorin-ki |
maruba-hi |
plenty |
in badan |
ghandid-ki |
shar |
pluck |
rif |
rug |
|
pray |
tuko |
anghakso |
|
put down |
dig |
midsi |
raghahhi |
put in |
rid |
shanso |
|
quantity |
in-ti |
inhi-di |
inhi-di |
quiver |
gaboyo-di |
hur-ki |
|
rain |
rdb-ki |
lawo-hi |
gomosimo-di |
ram |
wan-ki |
ilowa-hi |
ukub-ki |
red |
'as |
'aserah |
|
refuse |
did |
dangharei |
|
remain |
j^g |
midi |
raghahhsan |
"rer" (family) |
rer-ki |
k-di (pi. ayo-hi) |
yagdl-ki |
212
COMPARATIVE VOCABULARY
English
rice
right hand
ring
rope
rosary
run
rupee
sandal
satchel
say
see
send
sheep shew
shield
Somali
baris-ki
midig-ti
katun-ki
hadig-gi
tusbah-hi
orod
rubiad
kab-ti
ghandi-gi
odo
arag |dir ( kahhai
adi-gi tus
gashan-ki
Yibir
fil iftin
yifan
kushan-ki
difad-ki
goderowi-gi
bidbid
iftin-ti
yaliyifo-hi
nani-gi
(see "speak")
aimei
shimi
tegeji
bidbidsei
dado-di
aimidsi
altob-ki
sheep skin |
harag-gi |
|
ship |
markab-ki |
ghorin-ki |
skin |
san-ti |
huwad-ki |
slaughter |
ghal |
sakhsakh |
sleep |
sehho |
limdi |
small |
yer |
yahainyahh |
smell (v. t.) |
'urso |
|
smell (v. i.) |
'ur |
|
Somali |
Somali-di |
Goried-ki |
song |
gabei-gi |
takalamo-di |
speak |
hadal |
( khabrei Uagh |
stick |
ul-shi |
bulbul-shi |
still (be) |
jdgso |
|
stomach |
aldl-shi |
uro-di |
stone |
dagahh-i |
tomala-hi |
strike |
ku dufo |
|
sun |
ghorahh-di |
iftin-ti |
tail |
dibo-di |
daras-ti |
take |
ghad |
shimi |
take to yourself |
ghado |
shanso |
then |
kolkas |
kulhidas |
there |
hagga |
higga |
Midgan langharomed-ki
hajia-hi alel-ki
faled-di jagaflaho-di
dag shamei
yeryero-hi
indokholeisi
dagsi
gabis-ki
gatilahato-di
huwiya-hi
gadlahato-di
alemdi
neghatal
'ursheni
hirshen
Aji-gi
baghdan
ghoribirro-di
irso
gurato-di
makabilr-ti
aghtul
duk
iftimowa-hi
dibyalin-ki
shamei
shanso
naskas
higga
naska
COMPARATIVE VOCABULARY
213
English |
Somali |
Yibir |
Midgan |
thigh |
b6do-di |
derighab-ki |
|
thing |
wahh-i |
I deri-gi (indef.) J. agar-ti (concrete) (khabar-ki (abstract) |
nas-ki |
(possessions) ghalab-ki |
a-di |
shashin-ki |
|
think |
mdd |
bid |
|
throat |
hunguri-gi |
unukh-i |
lakhowa-hi |
time |
kol-ki (etc.) |
kulhi-di |
nas-ki (?) |
tobacco |
buri-gi |
mado-di |
|
to-day |
manta |
watahhadan |
iftimowaha |
Tomal |
Tomal-ki |
Abir-ki |
Handud-ki |
to-morrow |
berri |
watahhadi darsad |
iftimowihi so tege deya |
tongue |
arab-ti |
laghdam-ki |
laghowa-hi |
tooth |
ilig-gi |
wafer-ki |
|
town |
magalo-di |
kalweinaleh-di |
nas-ki (?) |
track |
rad-ki |
so'oto-di |
|
trap |
dabin-ti |
hajia-hi |
|
tree |
ged-ki |
awas-ki |
gedgharomed-ki |
truth |
run-ti |
ghamagh-di |
ghkn |
turn |
rug |
yef |
yef |
under |
hos |
hosyad |
hosyalin |
understand |
garo |
ku duhur |
dag |
useful |
fi'an |
behhensan |
|
water |
biyo-hi |
lawo-hi |
gomosimo-di |
when |
kolki |
kulhldi |
|
when ? |
gorma ? |
kulhima ? |
|
where |
haggi |
higgi |
, higgi |
where ? |
hagge? |
j higge ? \ higma ? |
j higge ? ( higma ? |
white |
'ad |
iftin |
|
whip |
jedal-ki |
bulbul-ki |
ghorin-ki |
wing |
bal-ki |
imitirahh-i |
|
wish |
ddn |
fed |
ku raghahhsan |
woman |
nag-ti |
asuwan-ti |
i awin-ti | asahan-ti |
habar-ti |
yahin-ti |
< yihan-ti \ golof-ti |
|
wood |
ghori-gi |
ghoribirro-di |
|
word |
erei-gi |
deri-gi |
|
year |
gu-gi |
lawo-hi |
erifogad-ki |
yesterday |
shalei |
watahhadi horyad |
iftimowihi tegedei |
Yibir |
Yibir-ki |
Anas-ki |
Hanan-ki |
214
COMPARATIVE VOCABULARY
Numbers. |
|||
English |
Somali |
Yibir |
Midgan |
one |
mid |
deri (= finger) |
|
two |
laba |
limihi |
|
three |
sadehh |
sadehhi |
|
four |
afar |
aferi |
|
five |
shan |
ganad ( = hand) |
|
six |
lehh |
ganad iyo deri |
|
ten |
toban |
limihi ganadod, or |
tobanihi |
fifteen |
shanyo-toban |
sadehhi ganadod |
|
hundred |
boghol |
goderowi-gi ( = rosary of 100 beads) |
|
thousand |
kun |
tobanihi goderowiyod |
|
The Midgans |
use the Yibir numbers up to ten. |
||
Names or descriptions of wild animals. |
|||
Caracal |
jambel |
jimikh |
|
Cheetah |
harimad |
'unimado |
|
Dikdik |
sagaro |
d * yahainyahha awaski ka godisa |
bikho |
Elephant |
marodi |
dusar |
|
Fox |
da'wo |
d. dado 'ita |
humbur |
Gazelle, Clarke's |
dibotag |
d. darasti tegeja |
diboder |
„ Soemmerin |
g's 'aul |
d. darasti |
gosinki |
iftimaleh |
(buck) jehhar |
||
„ Speke's |
dero |
d. amedo la hega |
ababo |
„ Waller's |
geren&k |
d. la bilehhoda |
tingir geryal (buck) lig |
Guinea-fowl |
digirin |
oran |
|
Haartebeest |
sig |
d. albakharki |
dabo'ad |
Hyaena |
waraba |
d. khabarki ghandidsanleh |
furat |
Koodoo |
aderyo |
godir |
|
Leopard |
shabel |
d. amedo Ita |
dussi |
Lion |
libahh |
d. jalmo 'ita |
hangagiiri ghan |
Oryx |
b'e'id |
d. walahumo ku |
\ gesodcr |
dashiya |
\ gesolahato (buck) saryen |
||
herd of Oryx |
yahhab-ki |
||
Ostrich |
gorei |
| hedig |
|
balda |
( sareyagh |
||
0. feather |
bal |
rish |
|
Rhinoceros |
wiyil |
aiuadur |
|
Tortoise |
din |
makabur |
madola |
Note, d (in Yibir) representa daianga animal.
INDEX.
The numbers refer to the sections.
Ablative 159, 245 Accents 3, 60, 214 Accusative, see Object Adjective 69, 169
Inflections 75
Comparison 82, 172
Derivative 73
Adjective Nouns 15
Demonstrative, Possessive and In- terrogative, see Suffixes Adverb 10, 44, 129, 130, 131, 137, see
Particles Article
Indefinite 149
Definite (Suffix) 23, 28, 31, 32, 55, 63, 75, 150, 197
Gender Nouns 17
Linking Consonant 25, 26 Plurals 164, 165
Interjections 134 Interrogative
Adjective 23, 33, 202
Pronoun 65, 146, 202
Adverbs 131, 146
Sentences 145, 146
Linking consonant 24, 31, 32, 34, 75 ;
omission of, 27 ; with Plurals 164,
165 la 67, 118
"be" 142 (b), 143, 147 belli 201
mahhan etc. 58, 131, 194, 202 mayo 92
Concord 75, 164-168 Conjunctions 10, 133, see Particles Consonants 7 Coordinate sentences 127 (b), 252
Dative 157 Demonstrative
Adjective 23, 198
Pronoun 63, 199
Euphony 6, 20, 25 (iii), 35, 87, 95,
97, 98, 104, 123, 186 Existence 147
Negative
Conjugation 91, 145, 230
of aho 112
Indefinite Pronouns 210
wah 195
in Subordinate clauses 258
see Particles Nominative, see Subject Nouns 10, 12
Abstract 15
Cases 43, 155
Gender 17, 164
Plural 34, 162
216
INDEX
Nouns
used Adjectivally 160, 170 used Adverbially 29, 152, 158
Numerals 10, 46, 163, 168, 170, 178
Object 44, 136, 156 o, Conjunctive Particle 127, 170, 254, 261
Particles 9, 124, 236 wa, ba, ya 54, 138, 171, 185
ba witb Negative 213
wa Perfect Tense 220
ma Negative 91, 145, 230
ma Interrogative 93, 145
Adverbial 236
Prepositional 125, 236, 241
Conjunctive 127, 144, 253 Partitive Case 161, 208 Passive 118
Place 157, 158, see Adverbs Plural
Nouns 34
Pronouns 63
Adjectives 76
Gender and Concord of 164-168 Possessive Case 45
Adjective, see Suffixes Prepositions 10, 132, see Particles Pronouns
Personal 10, 53, 183
Demonstrative 63
Empbatic 55, 229
Indefinite 67, 204
Interrogative 65, 146, 202
Possessive 62, 198
Beflexive 61, 196
Relative 64, 259
run 201
Salutations 135
Similarity 177
Subject 44, 53, 136, 141, 156
Subordinate sentences 257
Substantives 10, 11 Suffixes 10, 22, 197
Combination of 31, 198
with numerals 47
as Pronouns 62, 63, 65, 199
-ah 73, 160
-ed 73
-la 48, 73
-leh 73, 116, 160, 203
-ma 66, 131, 202
-na 127, 210
-se 127 Superlative 176
Time 48, 130, 265
Verbs 83, 211
Adjectives 72, 108, 113
Attributive 103, 122, 171
Auxiliary 86, 214
Causative 123
Conjugations 89, 95
Continuative Tenses 5, 86, 92, 96, 221, 222,
Intensive 120
Moods and Tenses 211
Nouns 15
Negative form 91, 112, 231
Persons 88, 228
Reflexive 121
aho 111, 147
fadi 109, 148
j6g 148
jir 85, 148, 214, 224
imo 106
laho 115, 148, 203, 214
nokho 105, 148
odo 106
ogho 106
oil 100, 148
wah 117, 195, 274 (note) Vowels 3, 6
wahhan etc. 57, 192, 264, 288
CAMBRIDGE: PRINTED BY JOHN CLAY, M.A. AT THE UNIVERSITY FRE8S.
PJ Kirk, John William Carnegie 2532 \ grammar of the Somali
K57 language 1905
PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY
SMI mmm
D HI • i.:- ■ ■ ££01
rrf Trnnr ^BBWihTllffl LraiHtM
$$y8i2» tilliHB mSR 9HHI
mmmWmm